Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutCAG2021-028 - Original - Christensen, Inc. - Phase III Riverbend Driving Range Remodel - 01/29/2021ApprovalOriginator:Department: Date Sent:Date Required: Authorized to Sign: Director or Designee Mayor Date of Council Approval: Grant? Yes No Type:Review/Signatures/RoutingDate Received by City Attorney: Comments: Date Routed to the Mayor’s Office: Date Routed to the City Clerk’s Office:Agreement InformationVendor Name:Category: Vendor Number:Sub-Category: Project Name: Project Details: Agreement Amount: Start Date: Basis for Selection of Contractor: Termination Date: Local Business? Yes No* Business License Verification: Yes In-Process Exempt (KCC 5.01.045) If meets requirements per KCC 3.70.100, please complete “Vendor Purchase-Local Exceptions” form on Cityspace. Notice required prior to disclosure? Yes No Contract Number: Agreement Routing Form For Approvals, Signatures and Records Management This form combines & replaces the Request for Mayor’s Signature and Contract Cover Sheet forms. (Print on pink or cherry colored paper) Visit Documents.KentWA.gov to obtain copies of all agreementsadccW22373_1_20 Budget Account Number: Budget? Yes No Dir Asst: Sup/Mgr: Dir/Dep: rev. 200821 FOR CITY OF KENT OFFICIAL USE ONLY (Optional) * Memo to Mayor must be attached January 27, 2021 OK to sign, TW, 1/28/2021. Mayor, there is a spot on page 18 of the electronic document that requires your initial also to strike a section that was included in the invitation to bid in error. CAG2021-028 PUBLIC WORKS AGREEMENT - 1 (Over $20K with Performance Bond) PUBLIC WORKS AGREEMENT between City of Kent and Christensen, Inc., General Contractor. THIS AGREEMENT is made by and between the City of Kent, a Washington municipal corporation (hereinafter the "City"), and Christensen, Inc., General Contractor, dba Christensen, Inc, organized under the laws of the State of Washington, located and doing business at 2840 Crites St SW, Suite 100, Tumwater, WA 98512, 360-709-0330, Kevin Christensen, (hereinafter the "Contractor"). AGREEMENT The parties agree as follows: I. DESCRIPTION OF WORK. Contractor shall perform the following services for the City in accordance with the following described plans and/or specifications: This project is Phase III of renovations at the Riverbend Golf Complex and involves both an addition and remodel of the existing building at the Riverbend Driving Range. The scope of work includes adding fourteen (14) new driving stalls and new conditioned area for restrooms; new ball wash area; new reception/retail area as well as a new entry point from parking area; new roof framing; and a new metal roof at remodeled area; (the "Work"), all in accordance with: (i) the City's bid solicitation; the Contractor's proposal in response to the City's bid solicitation, dated 12/11/2020; the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction prepared by Broderick Architects; and the project's Technical Specifications; all attached and incorporated as Exhibit A and (ii) all project drawings, plans, and other documents described in Exhibit A. (collectively, (i) and (ii) constitute the "Contract Documents"). Each part of these Contract Documents complement each other in describing a complete Work. Any requirement in one part binds as if stated in all parts. The Contractor shall provide any Work or materials clearly implied in this Agreement even if the Agreement does not mention it specifically. Any inconsistency in the parts of this Agreement shall be resolved by following this order of precedence (e.g., 1 presiding over 2, 3, 4, and 5; 2 presiding over 3, 4, and 5; and so forth): 1.Approved Change Orders 2.This Agreement 3.Technical Specifications 4.Contract Plans and Drawings 5.General Conditions of the Contract for Construction On the plans and working drawings, figured dimensions shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. This order of precedence shall not apply when Work is required by one part of this Agreement but omitted from another part or parts of the Agreement. The Work required in one part must be furnished even if not mentioned in other parts of the Agreement. Whenever reference is made in the specifications to codes, rules, specifications, and standards, the reference shall be construed to mean the code, rule, specification, or standard that is in effect on the bid advertisement date, unless otherwise stated or as required by law. PUBLIC WORKS AGREEMENT - 2 (Over $20K with Performance Bond) If any part of the Agreement requires Work that does not include a description for how the Work is to be performed, the Work shall be performed in accordance with standard trade practice(s). For purposes of the Contract, a standard trade practice is one having such regularity of observance in the trade as to justify an expectation that it will be observed by the Contractor in doing the Work. In case of any ambiguity or dispute over interpreting the Agreement, the Architect’s decision will be final. The Contractor further represents that the services furnished under this Agreement will be performed in accordance with generally accepted professional practices within the Puget Sound region in effect at the time such services are performed. II.TIME OF COMPLETION. The parties agree that work will begin on the tasks described in Section I above within __5___ calendar days after the City issues its Notice Proceed, and all physical work shall thereafter be substantially complete within 90 working days. The term of this Agreement shall continue until all work has been completed, final acceptance has occurred, and all Contractor obligations have been fulfilled. III.COMPENSATION. The City shall pay the Contractor a total amount not to exceed $1,700,600, including any applicable Washington State Sales Tax, for the work and services contemplated in this Agreement. The Contractor shall invoice the City monthly. The City will pay for the portion of the work described in the invoice that has been completed by the Contractor and approved by the City. The City’s payment shall not constitute a waiver of the City’s right to final inspection and acceptance of the project. Card Payment Program. The Contractor may elect to participate in automated credit card payments provided for by the City and its financial institution. This Program is provided as an alternative to payment by check and is available for the convenience of the Contractor. If the Contractor voluntarily participates in this Program, the Contractor will be solely responsible for any fees imposed by financial institutions or credit card companies. The Contractor shall not charge those fees back to the City. A. Payment and Performance Bond. Pursuant to Chapter 39.08 RCW, the Contractor, shall provide the City a payment and performance bond for the full contract amount. B. Retainage. The City shall hold back a retainage in the amount of five percent (5%) of any and all payments made to the Contractor for a period of sixty (60) days after the date of final acceptance, or until receipt of all necessary releases from the State Department of Revenue, the State Department of Labor & Industries, and the State Employment Security Department, and until settlement of any liens filed under Chapter 60.28 RCW, whichever is later. The amount retained shall be placed in a fund by the City pursuant to RCW 60.28.011(4)(a), unless otherwise instructed by the Contractor within fourteen (14) calendar days of the Contractor’s signature on the Agreement. C. Defective or Unauthorized Work. The City reserves its right to withhold payment from the Contractor for any defective or unauthorized work. Defective or unauthorized work includes, without limitation: work and materials that do not conform to the requirements of this Agreement; and extra work and materials furnished without the City’s written approval. If the Contractor is unable, for any reason, to satisfactorily complete any portion of the work, the City may complete the work by contract or otherwise, and the Contractor shall be liable to the City for any additional costs incurred by the City. “Additional costs” shall mean all reasonable costs, including legal costs and attorney fees, incurred by the City beyond the maximum Contract price specified above. The City further reserves its right to deduct the cost to complete the Contract work, including any Additional Costs, from any and all amounts due or to become due the Contractor. PUBLIC WORKS AGREEMENT - 3 (Over $20K with Performance Bond) D. Final Payment: Waiver of Claims. THE CONTRACTOR’S ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT (EXCLUDING WITHHELD RETAINAGE) SHALL CONSTITUTE A WAIVER OF CONTRACTOR’S CLAIMS, EXCEPT THOSE PREVIOUSLY AND PROPERLY MADE AND IDENTIFIED BY CONTRACTOR AS UNSETTLED AT THE TIME FINAL PAYMENT IS MADE AND ACCEPTED. IV.INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. The parties intend that an Independent Contractor- Employer Relationship will be created by this Agreement. By their execution of this Agreement, and in accordance with Ch. 51.08 RCW, the parties make the following representations: A. The Contractor has the ability to control and direct the performance and details of its work, the City being interested only in the results obtained under this Agreement. B. The Contractor maintains and pays for its own place of business from which the Contractor’s services under this Agreement will be performed. C. The Contractor has an established and independent business that is eligible for a business deduction for federal income tax purposes that existed before the City retained the Contractor’s services and is a service other than that furnished by the City, or the Contractor is engaged in an independently established trade, occupation, profession, or business of the same nature as that involved under this Agreement. D. The Contractor is responsible for filing as they become due all necessary tax documents with appropriate federal and state agencies, including the Internal Revenue Service and the state Department of Revenue. E. The Contractor has registered its business and established an account with the state Department of Revenue and other state agencies as may be required by the Contractor’s business, and has obtained a Unified Business Identifier (UBI) number from the State of Washington. F. The Contractor has a valid contractor registration pursuant to Ch. 18.27 RCW or an electrical contractor license pursuant to Ch. 19.28 RCW. G. The Contractor maintains a set of books dedicated to the expenses and earnings of its business. V. TERMINATION. The City may terminate this Agreement for good cause. “Good cause” shall include, without limitation, any one or more of the following events: A. The Contractor’s refusal or failure to supply a sufficient number of properly skilled workers or proper materials for completion of the Contract work. B. The Contractor’s failure to complete the work within the time specified in this Agreement. C. The Contractor’s failure to make full and prompt payment to subcontractors or for material or labor. D. The Contractor’s persistent disregard of federal, state or local laws, rules or regulations. E. The Contractor’s filing for bankruptcy or becoming adjudged bankrupt. F. The Contractor’s breach of any portion of this Agreement. If the City terminates this Agreement for good cause, the Contractor shall not receive any further money due under this Agreement until the Contract work is completed. After termination, the City may PUBLIC WORKS AGREEMENT - 4 (Over $20K with Performance Bond) take possession of all records and data within the Contractor’s possession pertaining to this project which may be used by the City without restriction. VI.PREVAILING WAGES. The Contractor shall file a “Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages,” with the State of Washington Department of Labor & Industries prior to commencing the Contract work. The Contractor shall pay prevailing wages in effect on the date the bid is accepted or executed by the Contractor, and comply with Chapter 39.12 of the Revised Code of Washington, as well as any other applicable prevailing wage rate provisions. The latest prevailing wage rate revision issued by the Department of Labor and Industries is attached. VII. CHANGES. The City may issue a written change order for any change in the Contract work during the performance of this Agreement. If the Contractor determines, for any reason, that a change order is necessary, the Contractor must submit a written change order request to the person listed in the notice provision section of this Agreement, Section XVI(D), within fourteen (14) calendar days of the date the Contractor knew or should have known of the facts and events giving rise to the requested change. If the City determines that the change increases or decreases the Contractor's costs or time for performance, the City will make an equitable adjustment. The City will attempt, in good faith, to reach agreement with the Contractor on all equitable adjustments. However, if the parties are unable to agree, the City will determine the equitable adjustment as it deems appropriate. The Contractor shall proceed with the change order work upon receiving either a written change order from the City or an oral order from the City before actually receiving the written change order. If the Contractor fails to require a change order within the time specified in this paragraph, the Contractor waives its right to make any claim or submit subsequent change order requests for that portion of the contract work. If the Contractor disagrees with the equitable adjustment, the Contractor must complete the change order work; however, the Contractor may elect to protest the adjustment as provided in subsections A through E of Section IX, Claims, below. The Contractor accepts all requirements of a change order by: (1) endorsing it, (2) writing a separate acceptance, or (3) not protesting in the way this section provides. A change order that is accepted by the Contractor as provided in this section shall constitute full payment and final settlement of all claims for contract time and for direct, indirect and consequential costs, including costs of delays related to any work, either covered or affected by the change. VIII.FORCE MAJEURE. Neither party shall be liable to the other for breach due to delay or failure in performance resulting from acts of God, acts of war or of the public enemy, riots, pandemic, fire, flood, or other natural disaster or acts of government (“force majeure event”). Performance that is prevented or delayed due to a force majeure event shall not result in liability to the delayed party. Both parties represent to the other that at the time of signing this Agreement, they are able to perform as required and their performance will not be prevented, hindered, or delayed by the current COVID-19 pandemic, any existing state or national declarations of emergency, or any current social distancing restrictions or personal protective equipment requirements that may be required under federal, state, or local law in response to the current pandemic. If any future performance is prevented or delayed by a force majeure event, the party whose performance is prevented or delayed shall promptly notify the other party of the existence and nature of the force majeure event causing the prevention or delay in performance. Any excuse from liability shall be effective only to the extent and duration of the force majeure event causing the prevention or delay in performance and, provided, that the party prevented or delayed has not caused such event to occur and continues to use diligent, good faith efforts to avoid the effects of such event and to perform the obligation. Notwithstanding other provisions of this section, the Contractor shall not be entitled to, and the City shall not be liable for, the payment of any part of the contract price during a force majeure event, or any costs, losses, expenses, damages, or delay costs incurred by the Contractor due to a force majeure event. Performance that is more costly due to a force majeure event is not included within the scope of this Force Majeure provision. If a force majeure event occurs, the City may direct the Contractor to restart any work or performance that may have ceased, to change the work, or to take other action to secure the work or the project site during the force majeure event. The cost to restart, change, or secure the work or project site PUBLIC WORKS AGREEMENT - 5 (Over $20K with Performance Bond) arising from a direction by the City under this clause will be dealt with as a change order, except to the extent that the loss or damage has been caused or exacerbated by the failure of the Contractor to fulfill its obligations under this Agreement. Except as expressly contemplated by this section, all other costs will be borne by the Contractor, IX.CLAIMS. If the Contractor disagrees with anything required by a change order, another written order, or an oral order from the City, including any direction, instruction, interpretation, or determination by the City, the Contractor may file a claim as provided in this section. The Contractor shall give written notice to the City of all claims within fourteen (14) calendar days of the occurrence of the events giving rise to the claims, or within fourteen (14) calendar days of the date the Contractor knew or should have known of the facts or events giving rise to the claim, whichever occurs first . Any claim for damages, additional payment for any reason, or extension of time, whether under this Agreement or otherwise, shall be conclusively deemed to have been waived by the Contractor unless a timely written claim is made in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of this Agreement. At a minimum, a Contractor's written claim shall include the information set forth in subsections A, items 1 through 5 below. FAILURE TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE, WRITTEN NOTIFICATION OF CLAIM WITHIN THE TIME ALLOWED SHALL BE AN ABSOLUTE WAIVER OF ANY CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THE FACTS OR EVENTS SURROUNDING THAT CLAIM OR CAUSED BY THAT DELAY. A. Notice of Claim. Provide a signed written notice of claim that provides the following information: 1.The date of the Contractor's claim; 2.The nature and circumstances that caused the claim; 3.The provisions in this Agreement that support the claim; 4.The estimated dollar cost, if any, of the claimed work and how that estimate was determined; and 5.An analysis of the progress schedule showing the schedule change or disruption if the Contractor is asserting a schedule change or disruption. B. Records. The Contractor shall keep complete records of extra costs and time incurred as a result of the asserted events giving rise to the claim. The City shall have access to any of the Contractor's records needed for evaluating the protest. The City will evaluate all claims, provided the procedures in this section are followed. If the City determines that a claim is valid, the City will adjust payment for work or time by an equitable adjustment. No adjustment will be made for an invalid protest. C. Contractor's Duty to Complete Protested Work. In spite of any claim, the Contractor shall proceed promptly to provide the goods, materials and services required by the City under this Agreement. D. Failure to Protest Constitutes Waiver. By not protesting as this section provides, the Contractor also waives any additional entitlement and accepts from the City any written or oral order (including directions, instructions, interpretations, and determination). E. Failure to Follow Procedures Constitutes Waiver. By failing to follow the procedures of this section, the Contractor completely waives any claims for protested work and accepts from the City any written or oral order (including directions, instructions, interpretations, and determination). X. LIMITATION OF ACTIONS. CONTRACTOR MUST, IN ANY EVENT, FILE ANY LAWSUIT ARISING FROM OR CONNECTED WITH THIS AGREEMENT WITHIN 120 CALENDAR DAYS FROM THE DATE THE CONTRACT WORK IS COMPLETE OR CONTRACTOR’S ABILITY TO FILE THAT CLAIM OR SUIT SHALL BE PUBLIC WORKS AGREEMENT - 6 (Over $20K with Performance Bond) FOREVER BARRED. THIS SECTION FURTHER LIMITS ANY APPLICABLE STATUTORY LIMITATIONS PERIOD. XI.WARRANTY. The Contractor warrants that it will faithfully and satisfactorily perform all work provided under this Agreement in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. The Contractor shall promptly correct all defects in workmanship and materials: (1) when the Contractor knows or should have known of the defect, or (2) upon the Contractor’s receipt of notification from the City of the existence or discovery of the defect. In the event any parts are repaired or replaced, only original replacement parts shall be used—rebuilt or used parts will not be acceptable. When defects are corrected, the warranty for that portion of the work shall extend for an additional year beyond the original warranty period applicable to the overall work. The Contractor shall begin to correct any defects within seven (7) calendar days of its receipt of notice from the City of the defect. If the Contractor does not accomplish the corrections within a reasonable time as determined by the City, the City may complete the corrections and the Contractor shall pay all costs incurred by the City in order to accomplish the correction. XII.DISCRIMINATION. In the hiring of employees for the performance of work under this Agreement or any sub-contract, the Contractor, its sub-contractors, or any person acting on behalf of the Contractor or sub-contractor shall not, by reason of race, religion, color, sex, age, sexual orientation, national origin, or the presence of any sensory, mental, or physical disability, discriminate against any person who is qualified and available to perform the work to which the employment relates. The Contractor shall execute the attached City of Kent Equal Employment Opportunity Policy Declaration, Comply with City Administrative Policy 1.2, and upon completion of the contract work, file the attached Compliance Statement. XIII. INDEMNIFICATION. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City, its officers, officials, employees, agents and volunteers harmless from any and all claims, injuries, damages, losses or suits, including all legal costs and attorney fees, arising out of or in connection with the Contractor's performance of this Agreement, except for that portion of the injuries and damages caused by the City's negligence. The City's inspection or acceptance of any of the Contractor's work when completed shall not be grounds to avoid any of these covenants of indemnification. Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this Agreement is subject to RCW 4.24.115, then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damages to property caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of the Contractor and the City, its officers, officials, employees, agents and volunteers, the Contractor's duty to defend, indemnify, and hold the City harmless, and the Contractor’s liability accruing from that obligation shall be only to the extent of the Contractor's negligence. IT IS FURTHER SPECIFICALLY AND EXPRESSLY UNDERSTOOD THAT THE INDEMNIFICATION PROVIDED HEREIN CONSTITUTES THE CONTRACTOR'S WAIVER OF IMMUNITY UNDER INDUSTRIAL INSURANCE, TITLE 51 RCW, SOLELY FOR THE PURPOSES OF THIS INDEMNIFICATION. THE PARTIES FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THEY HAVE MUTUALLY NEGOTIATED THIS WAIVER. In the event the Contractor refuses tender of defense in any suit or any claim, if that tender was made pursuant to this indemnification clause, and if that refusal is subsequently determined by a court having jurisdiction (or other agreed tribunal) to have been a wrongful refusal on the Contractor’s part, then the Contractor shall pay all the City’s costs for defense, including all reasonable expert witness fees and reasonable attorneys’ fees, plus the City’s legal costs and fees incurred because there was a wrongful refusal on the Contractor’s part. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement. XIV.INSURANCE. The Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Agreement, insurance of the types and in the amounts described in Exhibit B attached and incorporated by this reference. PUBLIC WORKS AGREEMENT - 7 (Over $20K with Performance Bond) XV.WORK PERFORMED AT CONTRACTOR'S RISK. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions and shall be responsible for the safety of its employees, agents, and subcontractors in the performance of the contract work and shall utilize all protection necessary for that purpose. All work shall be done at the Contractor's own risk, and the Contractor shall be responsible for any loss of or damage to materials, tools, or other articles used or held for use in connection with the work. XVI.MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. A. Recyclable Materials. Pursuant to Chapter 3.80 of the Kent City Code, the City requires its contractors and consultants to use recycled and recyclable products whenever practicable. A price preference may be available for any designated recycled product. B. Non-Waiver of Breach. The failure of the City to insist upon strict performance of any of the covenants and agreements contained in this Agreement, or to exercise any option conferred by this Agreement in one or more instances shall not be construed to be a waiver or relinquishment of those covenants, agreements or options, and the same shall be and remain in full force and effect. C. Resolution of Disputes and Governing Law. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Washington. If the parties are unable to settle any dispute, difference or claim arising from the parties’ performance of this Agreement, the exclusive means of resolving that dispute, difference or claim, shall only be by filing suit exclusively under the venue, rules and jurisdiction of the King County Superior Court, King County, Washington, unless the parties agree in writing to an alternative dispute resolution process. In any claim or lawsuit for damages arising from the parties' performance of this Agreement, each party shall pay all its legal costs and attorney's fees incurred in defending or bringing such claim or lawsuit, including all appeals, in addition to any other recovery or award provided by law; provided, however, nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to limit the City's right to indemnification under Section XIII of this Agreement. D. Written Notice. All communications regarding this Agreement shall be sent to the parties at the addresses listed on the signature page of the Agreement, unless notified to the contrary. Any written notice hereunder shall become effective three (3) business days after the date of mailing by registered or certified mail, and shall be deemed sufficiently given if sent to the addressee at the address stated in this Agreement or such other address as may be hereafter specified in writing. E. Assignment. Any assignment of this Agreement by either party without the written consent of the non-assigning party shall be void. If the non-assigning party gives its consent to any assignment, the terms of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect and no further assignment shall be made without additional written consent. F. Modification. No waiver, alteration, or modification of any of the provisions of this Agreement shall be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of the City and the Contractor. G. Entire Agreement. The written provisions and terms of this Agreement, together with any Exhibits attached hereto, shall supersede all prior verbal statements of any officer or other representative of the City, and such statements shall not be effective or be construed as entering into or forming a part of or altering in any manner this Agreement. All of the above documents are hereby made a part of this Agreement. However, should any language in any of the Exhibits to this Agreement conflict with any language contained in this Agreement, the terms of this Agreement shall prevail. H. Compliance with Laws. The Contractor agrees to comply with all federal, state, and municipal laws, rules, and regulations that are now effective or in the future become applicable to the Contractor's business, equipment, and personnel engaged in operations covered by this Agreement or accruing out of the performance of those operations. I. Public Records Act. The Contractor acknowledges that the City is a public agency subject to the Public Records Act codified in Chapter 42.56 of the Revised Code of Washington and documents, notes, emails, and other records prepared or gathered by the Contractor in its performance of this Agreement may PUBLIC WORKS AGREEMENT - 8 (Over $20K with Performance Bond) be subject to public review and disclosure, even if those records are not produced to or possessed by the City of Kent. As such, the Contractor agrees to cooperate fully with the City in satisfying the City’s duties and obligations under the Public Records Act. J. City Business License Required. Prior to commencing the tasks described in Section I, the Contractor agrees to provide proof of a current city of Kent business license pursuant to Chapter 5.01 of the Kent City Code. K. Counterparts and Signatures by Fax or Email. This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall constitute an original, and all of which will together constitute this one Agreement. Further, upon executing this Agreement, either party may deliver the signature page to the other by fax or email and that signature shall have the same force and effect as if the Agreement bearing the original signature was received in person. -Signatures Appear on Following Page - / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / PUBLIC WORKS AGREEMENT - 9 (Over $20K with Performance Bond) IN WITNESS, the parties below execute this Agreement, which shall become effective on the last date entered below. All acts consistent with the authority of this Agreement and prior to its effective date are ratified and affirmed, and the terms of the Agreement shall be deemed to have applied. CONTRACTOR: By: _______________________________ Print Name: _________________________ Its: _______________________________ DATE: _____________________________ CITY OF KENT: By: _______________________________ Print Name: Dana Ralph ________________ Its: Mayor___________________________ DATE: _____________________________ NOTICES TO BE SENT TO: CONTRACTOR: Kevin Christensen Christensen Inc 2840 Crites St SW, Suite 100 Tumwater, WA 98512 (360)709-0330(telephone) (360)709-0220(facsimile) NOTICES TO BE SENT TO: CITY OF KENT: Nathen Harper City of Kent 220 Fourth Avenue South Kent, WA 98032 (253) 856-5082(telephone) (253) 856-6080(facsimile) APPROVED AS TO FORM: Kent Law Department ATTEST: Kent City Clerk 01/29/2021 EEO COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTS - 1 DECLARATION CITY OF KENT EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY POLICY The City of Kent is committed to conform to Federal and State laws regarding equal opportunity. As such all contractors, subcontractors and suppliers who perform work with relation to this Agreement shall comply with the regulations of the City’s equal employment opportunity policies. The following questions specifically identify the requirements the City deems necessary for any contractor, subcontractor or supplier on this specific Agreement to adhere to. An affirmative response is required on all of the following questions for this Agreement to be valid and binding. If any contractor, subcontractor or supplier willfully misrepresents themselves with regard to the directives outlines, it will be considered a breach of contract and it will be at the City’s sole determination regarding suspension or termination for all or part of the Agreement; The questions are as follows: 1. I have read the attached City of Kent administrative policy number 1.2. 2. During the time of this Agreement I will not discriminate in employment on the basis of sex, race, color, national origin, age, or the presence of all sensory, mental or physical disability. 3. During the time of this Agreement the prime contractor will provide a written statement to all new employees and subcontractors indicating commitment as an equal opportunity employer. 4. During the time of the Agreement I, the prime contractor, will actively consider hiring and promotion of women and minorities. 5. Before acceptance of this Agreement, an adherence statement will be signed by me, the Prime Contractor, that the Prime Contractor complied with the requirements as set forth above. By signing below, I agree to fulfill the five requirements referenced above. By: __________________________________________ For: _________________________________________ Title: ________________________________________ Date: ________________________________________ EEO COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTS - 2 CITY OF KENT ADMINISTRATIVE POLICY NUMBER: 1.2 EFFECTIVE DATE: January 1, 1998 SUBJECT: MINORITY AND WOMEN SUPERSEDES: April 1, 1996 CONTRACTORS APPROVED BY Jim White, Mayor POLICY: Equal employment opportunity requirements for the City of Kent will conform to federal and state laws. All contractors, subcontractors, consultants and suppliers of the City must guarantee equal employment opportunity within their organization and, if holding Agreements with the City amounting to $10,000 or more within any given year, must take the following affirmative steps: 1.Provide a written statement to all new employees and subcontractors indicating commitment as an equal opportunity employer. 2.Actively consider for promotion and advancement available minorities and women. Any contractor, subcontractor, consultant or supplier who willfully disregards the City’s nondiscrimination and equal opportunity requirements shall be considered in breach of contract and subject to suspension or termination for all or part of the Agreement. Contract Compliance Officers will be appointed by the Directors of Planning, Parks, and Public Works Departments to assume the following duties for their respective departments. 1.Ensuring that contractors, subcontractors, consultants, and suppliers subject to these regulations are familiar with the regulations and the City’s equal employment opportunity policy. 2.Monitoring to assure adherence to federal, state and local laws, policies and guidelines. EEO COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTS - 3 CITY OF KENT EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY COMPLIANCE STATEMENT This form shall be filled out AFTER COMPLETION of this project by the Contractor awarded the Agreement. I, the undersigned, a duly represented agent of Company, hereby acknowledge and declare that the before-mentioned company was the prime contractor for the Agreement known as that was entered into on the (date), between the firm I represent and the City of Kent. I declare that I complied fully with all of the requirements and obligations as outlined in the City of Kent Administrative Policy 1.2 and the Declaration City of Kent Equal Employment Opportunity Policy that was part of the before-mentioned Agreement. By: __________________________________________ For: _________________________________________ Title: ________________________________________ Date: ________________________________________ CITY OF KENT KrNG COUNTY, WASHTNGTON Riverbend Driving Range Phase III 2O2O W. MEEKER STREET, KENT WA Project #FAC 2O-O4 BIDS ACCEPTED UNTIL December 1,1,t 2O2O 2:OO P.M. BID OPENING December t Lt 2O2O 2=15 P.M. WAsHrNcroN DELIVER TO crTY oF KENT, CITY HALL 22O {th Avenue S., Kent, WA 98032-5895 Nathen Harper Project Coordinator City of Kent Facilities / Parks Recreation & Community Services KENT BIDDER'S NAMEChristensen lnc. General Contractor EXHIBIT A INVITATION TO BID Notice is hereby given that the City of Kent, Washington, will receive sealed bids at the C¡ty Clerk's office through December LL,ãO?:O up to 2:00 p.m. as shown on the clock on the east wall of the City Clerk's Office on the first floor of Kent City Hall, 220 4rh Avenue South, Kent, Washington 98032. All bids must be properly marked and sealed in accordance with the "lnvitation to Bid." Bids must be delivered and received at the City Clerk's office by the above- stated time, regardless of delivery method, including U.S. Mail. Only sealed bids wlll be accepted. No facsimiles will be considered. All Bids will be opened and read publicly aloud at 2:15 pm for the City of Kent project named as follows: City of Kent - Riverbend Driving Range Phase lll: Building Addltion & Remodel Re-Bld, Project Number FAC20-04 The Clty of Kent will conduct the bid opening at the time and date as scheduled, however, due to COVID-19 pandemic and lts lmpacts the b¡d opening process will take place as follows: Bldders shall call the Clty Clerk at (2531 856-5725 to drop off bids. The City Clerk will read the blds out loud from the Clerk's office. lndlviduals can stand in the lobby outslde the Clerk's office during the b¡d opening to hear the bid results, but must stand 6 feet or more apart. This project involves both an addition and remodel of the existing building. The scope of work includes adding fourteen (14) new driving stalls and new conditioned area for restrooms; new ball wash area; new reception/reta¡l area as well as new entry point from parking area; new roof framing; and new metal roof at remodeled area. The project has one additive alternate: Fabricate and install new benches and tables. The City of Kent has determlned the project ls essential pursuant to the Governor lnslee lssued Proclamation 20-25. Should a contract be executed and this Proclamation or a similar proclamation be in place, specialized plans and protocols must be establlshed and lmplemented to meet the social distancing and sanitation measures set forth by the United States Department of Labor or the Washington State Department of Health. lt is the contractoy's responsibility to implement these measures. The Engineer's estimated range for this project is approximately ($1,800,000). Bid documents may be obtained by contacting Kevln Broderick at Broderlck Architects,12061 682-75251 kevin@broderickarchitects.com. For technical questions, please call Kevin Broderick at BroderÍck Architects, (206) 682-7525. Bids must be clearly marked "Bid" with the name of the project on the outs¡de of the envelope, addressed to the City Clerk, 22O 4th Avenue South, Kent, WA 98032-5895. Only sealed bids will be accepted. No facsimiles will be considered. provided to Builders Exchange of VfA, Inc, For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify ScaI Each bid shall be in accordance with the plans and specifications and other contract documents now on file in City of Kent Parks Facilities. Copies of the plans and Special Provisions may be purchased at a non-refundable cost of 345.00 for each set. Plans and specifications can also be downloaded at no charge by contactlng the Architect, Kevln Broderick or at https://www. kentwa.sov/doins-business/bids-procurement. There wlll be a walk-through at 114.M. on Wednesday, December 2, 20201o¡ General Contractors, at the Rlverbend Driving Range,2020 West Meeker St., Kent 98032. Apprentice Utilization Requirements are mandatory for all public works estimated to cost one million dollars or rnore, in which case no less than 15% of the labor hours must be performed by apprentices. KCC 6.01.030. A cashier's check, cash or surety bond in the amount of 5o/o of the b¡d must be included with the b¡d. The City of Kent reserves the right to reject any and all bids on any or all schedules or alternated or to waive any informalities in the b¡dding and shall determine which bid or bidders is the most responsive, satisfactory, and responsible bidder and shall be the sole judge thereof, No plea of mistake in the bid shall be available to the bidder for the recovery of his/her deposit or as a defense to any action based upon the neglect or refusal to execute a contract. Bidders must submit with their initial bid a signed statement as to whether they have previously performed work subject to the President's Executive Order No. 11246. No bidder may withdraw his/her bid for a period of sixty (60) days after the day of bid opening, Dated December Ll, 2020. BY Kimberley A City Clerk Published in the Daily Journal of Commerce on November Lg &27,2020 Provided to Bu.ilders Exchange of tú4, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa,com - Always Verify ScaI IN FORMATTON FOR BIDDERS Bidders shall be qualified by ability, experience, financing, equipment, and organization to do the work called for in the Contract Documents. The City reserves the right to take whatever action it deems necessary to ascertain the ability of the Bidder to perform the work satisfactorily. This action includes the City's review of the qualification information in the bid documents. The City will use this qualification data in its decision to determine whether the lowest responsive bidder is also responsible and able to perform the contract work. If the City determines that the lowest bidder is not the lowest responsive and responsible bidder, the City reserves its unqualified right to reject that bid and award the contract to the next lowest bidder that the City, in its soled judgment, determines is also responsible and able to perform the contract work (the "lowest responsive and responsible bidder"). All blanks in the proposal forms must be appropriately filled in. Proposal must contain original signature pages. Facsimiles are not acceptable and are considered non-responsive submittals. All bids must be sealed and delivered in accordance with the "Invitation to Bid." Bids must be received at the City Clerk's office by the stated time, regardless of delivery method, including U.S. Mail. The City also reserves the right to include or omit any or all schedules or alternates of the Proposal and will award the contract to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder based on the total bid amount, including schedules or alternates selected by the City. A bidder who wished to claim error after the Bids have been opened and tabulated shall submit a notarized affidavit signed by the Bidder, accompanied by original work sheets used in the preparation of the Bid, requesting relief from the responsibilities of Award. The affidavit shall describe the specific error(s) and certify that the work sheets are the originals used in the preparation of the Bid. The affidavit and the work sheets shall be submitted to the Project Manager no later than 5:00 p.m. on the first business day after Bid opening, or the claim will not be considered. The Architect will review the certified work sheets to determine validity of the claimed error, and make a recommendation to the City. If the City concurs in the claim of error, the Bidder will be relieved of responsibility, and the Bid Deposit of the Bidder will be returned. Thereafter, at the discretion of the City, all Bids may be rejected or award made to the next lowest responsive, responsible Bidder. The form of contract that the successful bidder, as the Contractor, will be required to execute, and the forms and the amount of surety bonds that it will be required to furnish at the time of execution of the contract are included in 1 2 3 4 5 provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scal DR CoNTRACTO R'S QUALI FTCATTON STATE M ENT (RCW 39.O4.35O) THE CTTY WTLL REVTEW THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPOAISES TO THTS FORM TO DETERMTNE WHETHER THE BTDDTNG CONTRACTOR.TS RESPOAI,STB¿E TO PERFORM THE CONTRACT WORK. THTS FORM INCLUDES CRTTERTA ESTABLISHED BY STATE LAW THAT MUST BE MET TO BE CONSTDERED A RESPO'VSTBLE BTDDER AND QUALTFTED TO BE AWARDED THTS PUBLTC WOR,KS PROJECT AS WELL AS SUPPLEMENTAL CR,TTERIA ESTABLTSHED BY THE CTTY THAT ARE APPLTCABLE TO THIS PUBLTC WORKS PRO]ECT. T}IE BTDDER SHOULD READ AND RESPOND TO THIS FORM CAREFULLY. Indicia of contractor's responsibility inherently involve subjective determinations as to the contractor's ability to perform and complete the contract work responsibly and to the owner city's satisfaction. The city has an obligation and a duty to its citizens and its taxpayers to administer its budgets and complete its projects in a businesslike manner. Accordingly, it has a duty to exercise the type of inquiry and discretion a business would conduct when selecting a contractor who will be responsible to perform the contract work. The city's supplemental criteria are based, in large part, on the qualification statement form used by the American Institute of Architects. The city provides these criteria so as to provide the most objective framework possible within which the city will make its decision regarding the bidder's ability to be responsible to perform the contract work. These criteria, taken together, will form the basis for the city's decision that a bidder is or is not responsible to perform the contract work. Any bidder may make a formal written request to the city to modify the criteria set forth in this qualification statement, but that request may only be made within 48 hours of the date and time that the bidder first obtains the bid documents or three (3) business days prior to the scheduled bid opening date, whichever occurs first. If the city receives a modification request, it will consider any information submitted in the request and will respond before the bid submittal deadline. If the city's evaluation results in changed criteria, the city will issue an addendum establishing the new or modified criteria. If the city determines that, based on the criteria established in this statement, a bidder is not responsible to perform the contract work, the city will provide written notice of its determination that will include the city's reason for its decision. The bidder has 24 hours from the time the city delivers written notice to the bidder that the bidder is not responsible to perform the contract work to appeal the city's determination. No appeals will be received after the expiration of this 24 hour appeal period. The city may deliverthis notice by hand delivery, email, facsimile, or regular mail. In the event the city uses regular mail, the delivery will be deemed complete three days after being placed in the U.S. Mail. The bidder's right to appeal is limited to the single remedy of providing the city with additional information to be considered before the city issues a final determination. Bidder acknowledges and understands that, as provided by RCW 39.04.350, no other appeal is allowed and no other remedy of any kind or nature is available to the bidding contractor if the City determines that the bidder is not responsible to perform the contract work. Provided to Builders Exchange of WA. Inc, For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa,com - Always Verify Scal If the bidder fails to request a modification within the time allowed, or fails to appeal a determination that the bidder is not responsible within the time allowed, the city will make its determination of bidder responsibility based on the information submitted. COMPLETE AND STG'Y THIS FORM AS PART OF YOUR BID. FATLURE TO PROPERLY CO/I,IPLETE THTS FORþT ìIAY ALSO RESULT TN A DETERMINATTON THAT YOUR BTD TS 'YOAI-RESPONSIVE AND THEREFORE VOTD, THIS DOCUMENT HAs IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENGES: CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPTETION OR MODIFICATION. The undersigned certifies under oath that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading. SUBMffTED BY:Christensen lnc. General Contractor NAME:Kevin Christensen ADDRESS:2840 Crites St SW Suite 100 Tumwater,A 9851 2 PRINCIPAL OFFICE: ADDRESS: Tumwater, WA 2840 Crites SW Suite 100 Tumwater, WA 98512 PHONE: FAX: (360) 709-0330 (360) 709-0220 STATUTORY REQUIREI,IENTS - Per state law a bidder must meet the followi ng respons¡bility criteria 1.Requ ired Responsib¡l¡ty Criteria 1.1 Provide a copy of your Department of Labor and Industries certificate of registration in compliance with chapter L8.27 RCW. - Attached !.2 Provide your current state unified business identifier number. 601-546-7651.3 Provide proof of applicable industrial insurance coverage for your employees working in Washington as required in Title 51 RCW, together with an employment security department number as required in Title 50 RCW, and a state excise tax registration number as required in Title 82 RCW. Providing a copy of a state of Washington "Master License Service Registration and Licenses" form is typically sufficient evidence of the requirements of this subsection. 1,4 Provide a statement, signed by a person with authority to act and speak for your company, that your company' including any subsidiary companies or affiliated companies under majority ownership or under control by the owners of the bidder's company, are not and have not provided to Buílders Exchange of t"û4, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify ScaI been in the past three (3) years, disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065 (3). 1.5 Provide a signed statement, signed under penalty of perjury by a person with authority to act and speak for your company, that within the three- year period immediately preceding the bid solicitation date, your company is not a "willful" violator as defined in RCW 49.48.082, of any provisions of chapters 49.46,49.48, or 49.52 RCW, as determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction. 1.6 Provide proof that a designated person or persons with your company has either received training from the department of labor and industries or an approved training provider on the requirements related to public works and prevailing wages under chapter 39.04 RCW and 39.L2 RCW or provide proof that your company has completed three or more public works projects and have had a valid business license in Washington for three or more years and are exempt from this training requirement. SUPPLEMENTAL CRITERIA - Established by the City to determine bidder responsibility 2.ORGANIZATION 2,1 How many years has your organization been in business as a Contractor? 26 2.2 How many years has your organization been in business under its present business name? 262.2.1 Under what other or former names has your organization operated? N/A2.3 If your organization is a corporation, answer the following: 2.4 If your organization is a partnership, answer the following: 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.4.t 2.4.2 2.4.3 Date of incorPoration: 61211994 State of incorporation : Washington President's name: Kevin Christensen Vice-president's name(s): Reid Christensen & Colin Christensen Secretary's name: Barbara Christensen Treasurer's name: Date of organization: Type of partnership (if applicable): Name(s) of general partner(s): 2.5 If your organization is individually owned, answer the following 2.5.1 Date of organization: 2.5.2 Name of owner: provided t.o Builders Exchange of IdA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scal 2.6 If the form of your organization is other than those listed above, describe it and name the principals: 3. LICENSING 3.1 List jurisdictions and trade categories in which your organization is legally qualified to do business, and indicate license numbers, if applicable. Construction License # CHRlSlG066LB 3.2 List jurisdictions in which your organization's partnership or trade name is filed. Construction 4. EXPERIENCE 4.t List the categories of work that your organization normally performs with its own forces. Demo, concrete, framing, finish, some roofing, siding, and metal building erection 4.2 Claims and Suits. (If the answer to any of the questions below is yes, please attach details.) 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2,3 Has your organization ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? No Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your organization or its officers? No Has your organization filed any law suits or requested arbitration with regard to construction contracts within the last five years? No 4.3 Within the last five years, has any officer or principal of your organization ever been an officer or principal of another organization when it failed to complete a construction contract? (If the answer is yes, please attach details.) No 4.4 On a separate sheet, list major construction projects your organization has in progress, giving the name of project, owner, architect or design engineer, contract amount, percent complete and scheduled completion date. 4.4.! State total worth of work in progress and under contract: $21.9 Million4.5 On a separate sheet, list the major projects your organization has completed in the past five years, giving the name of project, owner, architect or design engineer, contract amount, date of completion and percentage of the cost of the work performed with your own forces. 4.5.1 State average annual amount of construction work performed during the past five years: $17.1 Mittion 4.6 On a separate sheet, list the construction experience and present commitments of the key individuals of your organization. 4.7 On a separate sheet, list your major equipment. Manlifts and forklifts REFERENCES5 provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc, For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - A1ways Verify Scal Trade References: Ketolaffargus Painting (360) 456-1224 Bank Referencesi Alexis Alverson TwinStar CU (360) 923-4450 Surety: 5.3.1 Name of bonding company: Travelers Casualty and Surety Co. of America 5.3.2 Name and address of agent:Tiffany Karpavicius 1802 Black Lake Blvd. SW Suite 301, Olympia, WA 98512 6. FINANCING 6.1 Financial Statement. After bid opening, the City may requ¡re the following financial information from any of the three apparent low bidders. If so required, the selected bidder(s) must respond with this financial information within 24 hours of the City's request for that information. The City's request for this information shall not be construed as an award or as an intent to award the contract. A bidder's failure or refusal to provide this information may result in rejection of that bidder's bid. 6.1.1 Attach a financial statement, preferably audited, including your organization's latest balance sheet and income statement showing the following items: Current Assets (e.9., cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable, notes receivable, accrued income, deposits, materials inventory and prepaid expenses); Net Fixed Assets; Other Assets; Current Liabilities (e.9., accounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, provision for income taxes, advances, accrued salaries and accrued payroll taxes); Other Liabilities (e.9., capital, capital stock, authorized and outstanding shares par values, earned surplus and retained earnings). 6,!..2 Name and address of firm preparing attached financial statement, and date thereof: 5.1 5.2 5.3 6.1.3 6.L.4 Is the attached financial statement for the identical organization named on page one? If not, explain the relationship and financial responsibility of the organization whose financial statement is provided (e.9., parent- subsidiary). 6.2 Will the organization whose financial statement is attached act as guarantor of the contract for construction? provided to Buil-ders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - ALways Verífy Scal 7. SIGNATURE 7.L Dated at this 11 day of December Name of Organization : Christensen lnc. Ge ral Contractor 2020. By: Title:President Kevin Christensen 7,2 kelrn th(\ten \€vì being duly sworn, deposes and says that the information provided herein is true and sufficie ntly complete so as not to be misleading. Subscribed and sworn be this day of 2020. Notary Public:!ilt H My Commission Expires: 9 lt -L ily Conrn. beins Juns 5,2023 t$¿ü4æ provided to Builders Exchange of WA, lnc. For usage Conditions AgreemenÈ see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify ScaI BIDDER,S CHECKLIST The following checklist is a guideline to help the Contractor make sure all forms are complete. The bidder's attention is especially called to the following forms. Failure to execute these forms as required may result in rejection of any bid. Bidder's Package should include the following: Bid Document Cover Sheet filled out with Bidder's Name,r¡¡....r¡¡¡¡r¡¡¡¡¡¡ Order of Contents .......... fnvitation to Bid Information for Bidders .¡¡¡r¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡ ¡.rr¡r¡rrrrr.¡¡.¡¡...¡r¡¡¡¡¡¡ Contractor's Q ualificat ion Statement .........,,. Complete and notarized Bidder's Checklist r.....¡r¡r.r¡. ¡¡.¡¡r.rr¡ Proposal First line of proposal - filled in.......... Unit pfiCeS afe COlfeGt.......... .¡¡¡¡...r¡.rr.¡.¡r¡.rr¡¡¡r¡¡.¡r¡!¡.¡.¡.¡ Subcontractor List (contracts over $100K) Subcontractors listed properly.rr¡¡rr¡.¡¡¡¡¡rrr¡rrr.trr..¡¡.¡¡¡¡..¡r..¡¡¡¡¡rr¡.r¡. Signature Contractor Compliance Statement Have/have not participated acknowledgment Signature and address ........ Declaration - City of Kent Equal Employment Opportunity Policy .,....,. E Date and signature ....... Administrative Policy.....r¡¡.¡¡¡.¡¡¡.r. r¡!...¡¡.¡¡¡¡r ¡¡.rr¡r.r¡¡r¡. Statement that Bidder Has Not Been Disqualified Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes Proposal Signature Page,..... .r¡¡.¡¡¡.¡¡¡¡¡ ¡¡¡...i.r.r.¡. All Addenda acknowledged Date, signature and address....,... .r.¡¡¡¡¡..,¡¡¡ Bid Bond Form ¡r.rr¡r...rrr¡.¡..¡.¡..r¡¡.¡ r¡¡.¡.¡¡..¡.... Signature, sealed and dated ........... Power of Attorney ......... (Amount of bid bond shall equal 5olo of the total bid amount) Combined Declaration Form ......... tr Signature ¡¡¡rr...¡..r¡. .rrrrr¡¡¡¡r.¡¡"............ E Change Order Form (Example)tr The following forms are to be executed after the Contract is awarded:A) CONTRACT This agreement ls to be executed by the successful bidder.B) PAYMENTAND PERFORMANCE BOND To be executed by the successful bidder and its surety company. The following form is to be executed after the Contract ls completed:A) CJII_QI'_KENT EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPP9RTUNTTY COMPLIANCE STATEMENT To be executed by the successful bidder AFTER COMPLETIOI{ of this contract. To be executed by the successful bidder AFTER COMPLETION of this contract. tr tr n tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr E tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr Provided to Builders Exchãnge of ¡lA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify ScaI BID PROPOSAL Riverbend Driving Range - Phase III Re-Bid Proposal of (hereinafter called the "Bidder"), organized and existing under the of the State of Washington and doing business as x Christensen lnc. General Contractor( or "an individual") due Wr.¿rr tre U"-W f"øJ ne Waø "rrï,fffi laws To the OWNER (City of Kent): In compliance with your Invitation to Bid, the Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all labor and materials specified herein necessary for and incidental 1O the completion of the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, within the time set forth herein, and at the lump sum price stated below (not including WSST). LUMP SUM BASE BID: Provide all labor and materials required for the CITY OF KEND RIVERBEND DRIVING RANGE ADDITION, as shown on the drawings and as specified in the project manual for the lump sum price (which does not include Washington State Sales Taxes (WSST)). Provide an accompanying Schedule of Values broken down by CSI Division. A ADD ALTERNATE #L: - Provide built-in benches and half-round tables to be fabricated and installed in the Driving Range Addition per the Construction Drawings. .uÊ Dollan S 2/, ¿a é ^ë t (Amounlñ numbers) B WITHDRAWAL OF BID: No bidder may withdraw his/her bid for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the day of bid opening. C. STATE SALES TAX: The undersigned agrees that the above named Lump Sum and Bid Alternate do not include Washington State and local sales taxes (WSST). WSST will be paid to the Contractor with each pay application. OVERHEAD AND PROFIT: The undersigned agrees that the above Bids do include overhead, profit, and all other expenses involved. COMMENCEMENT OF WORK: The bidder hereby agrees to commence work under this contract within five (5) calendar days after the Notice to Proceed D E provided to BuiLders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scal and to fully complete the work within the time established in paragraph C of this proposal. BID SECURITY: Bid security is required for this project. A Performance and Payment bond will be required of the successful bidder. G, ADDRESS: Notice of acceptance of this bid or request for additional information shall be addressed to the undersigned at the address stated below. SELECTION CRIÏERIA: This bid is being made in accordance with the Owner's procedures and shall be evaluated as follows: t. Responsiveness. The Owner will consider all material submitted by the contractor to determine whether the Contractor's proposal is in compliance with the invitation to bid. 2. Responsibility. The Owner will consider all material submitted by the contractor, and other evidence it may obtain otherwise, to determine whether the contractor is capable of and has a history of successfully completing contracts of this type. The following elements may be given consideration by the Owner in determining whether a contractor is a responsible contractor: a) The ability, capacity and skill of the contractorto perform the contract and/or provide the service required; b) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience and efficiency of the bidder; c) Whether the contractor can perform the contract and do so within the time specified; d) the quality of performance by the contractor on previous and similar contracts; e) The previous and existing compliance by the bidder with laws relating to the contract or services; and f) such other information as may be secured having bearing on the decision to award the contracts. When requested by the Owner, contractors shall furnish acceptable evidence of the contractor's ability to perform, such as firm commitments by subcontractors, equipment, supplies and facilities, and the contractor's ability to obtain the necessary personnel. Refusal to provide such information upon request may cause the bid to be rejected. 3. Lowest Bid: The lowest bid F H provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditíons Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scal K SIGNATURE: By signing this Bid Proposal, the undersigned bidder agrees to submit all insurance documents, performance bonds, and signed contracts within ten (10) calendar days after City awards the Contract and be bound by all terms, requirements and representations listed in the bid documents whether set forth by the City or by the Bidder. The Bidder acknowledges the receipt of Addenda to the contract documents as follows: Addendum No. 1 Received 121712020 \L q 1211112020 Christensen lnc. General Contractor Date Compan Name 2840 Crites St SW Suite 100 Address 1 bm By (Signature Tumwater, WA 98512 Kevin Christensen Address 2 Submitted By (Printed Name) (360) 709-0330 President Telephone Number Title (360) 709-0220 infotOcincoc.com E-mail addressFax Number END OF BID PROPOSAL 2 provided to Builders Exchange of WA, lnc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Al-ways Verify ScaI CITY OF KENT SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (Contracts over $100,000) List each subcontractor, from any tier of subcontractors, that shall perform subcontract work amounting to more than 10% of the total bid contract price. List each bid item to be performed by each designated subcontractor in numerical sequence. If no subcontractors will be performing 10o/o or mote of the work, indicate this by writing "None" and signing this form at the bottom of the page. Failure to submit a fully completed and signed subcontractor list after the time set for bid opening may disqualify your bid. Project Name:Riverbend D rivinrl Ranae - Phase III Pe-Bid Project Number:rHc -sl Subcontractor Name ^)fnBl ru Item Nu bers ñ Subcontractor Name D,B.Çou.rTtaFùS Item Numbers Hr/nc Subcontractor Name flrt , R. .ÉuçrrR;ù Item Numbers T--uçæetcrît- Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers CO NTRACTO R'S SIGNATU RE provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa'com - Always Verify Scal CONTRACTOR COM PLIANCE STATEM ENT (President's Executive Order #LL246) Dat 1211112020 This statement relates to a proposed contract with the City of Kent named Riverbend Driving Range - Phase III Re-Bid Project Number: 2O-O4 I am the undersigned bidder or prospective contractor. I represent that - 1. I xx have,have not, participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to the President's Executive Order #tt246 (regarding equal employment opportunity) or a preceding similar Executive Order. Christensen lnc. General Contractor NAME OF BIDDER BY President SIG RErrlTLE 2840 Crites St SW Suite 100 Tumwater wA 98512 ADDRESS (Note to Bidders: The information required in this Compliance Statement is informational only) provided to BuÍlders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scal DECLARATION CITY OF KENT EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY POLICY The City of Kent is committed to conform to Federal and State laws regarding equal opportunity. As such, all contractors, subcontractors and suppliers who perform work with relation to this contract shall comply with the regulations of the City's equal employment opportunity policies. The following questions specifically identify the requirements the City deems necessary for any contractor, subcontractor or supplier on this specific contract to adhere to. An affirmative response is required on all of the following questions for this contract to be valid and binding. If any contractor, subcontractor or supplier willfully misrepresents themselves with regard to the directives outlined, it will be considered a breach of contract and it will be at the City's sole determination regarding suspension or termination for all or part of the contract; The questions are as follows: 1. I have read the attached City of Kent administrative policy number 1.2. 2. During the time of this contract, I will not discriminate in employment on the basis of sex, race, color, national origin, age, or the presence of all sensory, mental or physical disability. 3. During the time of this contract, the prime contractor will provide a written statement to all new employees and subcontractors indicating commitment as an equal opportunity employer. 4. During the time of the contract I, the prime contractor, will actively consider hiring and promotion of women and minorities. 5. Before acceptance of this contract, an adherence statement will be signed by me, the Prime Contractor, that the Prime Contractor complied with the requirements as set forth above. By signing below, I agree to fulfill the five requirements referenced above. By: For Kevin Christensen - Christensen lnc. GeneralContractor Title:President Date:12t11t2020 provided to Builders Exchange of !'lA, Inc. f'or usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa'com - Always Verify ScaI CITY OF KENT ADMINISTRATIVE POLICY NUMBER: L.2 EFFECIIVE DATE: January 1, 1998 SUBJECT: POLICY: Equal employment opportunity requirements for the City of Kent will conform to federal and state laws. All contractors, subcontractors, consultants and suppliers of the City must guarantee equal employment opportunity within their organization and, if holding contracts with the City amounting to $10,000 or more within any given year, must take the following affirmative steps: 1. Provide a written statement to all new employees and subcontractors indicating commitment as an equal opportunity employer. 2. Actively consider for promotion and advancement available minorities and women. Any contractor, subcontractor, consultant or supplier who willfully disregards the City's nondiscrimination and equal opportunity requirements shall be considered in breach of contract and subject to suspension or termination for all or part of the contract. Contract Compliance Officers will be appointed by the Directors of Planning, Parks, and Public Works Departments to assume the following duties for their respective departments. 1. Ensuring that contractors, subcontractors, consultants, and suppliers subject to these regulations are familiar with the regulations and the City's equal employment opportunity policy. 2. Monitoring to assure adherence to federal, state and local laws, policies and guidelines. MINORITY AND WOMEN CONTRACTORS SUPERSEDES: April 1, 1996 APPROVED BY Jim White, MaYor provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage CondiLions Agreement see www.bxr4ia.com - Always Verify ScaI BIDDER RESPONSIBILITY CRITERIA Statement that Bidder Has Not Been Disqualified This statement is required by state law (RCW 39.04.350(1)(f)) to be submitted to the City before the contract can be awarded. The bidder hereby certifies that, within the three-year period immediately preceding the bid solicitation date (November L9, 2O2O), the bidder has not been disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065(3). Christensen lnc. General Contractor Bidder's Bu S re orized Official* Kevin Christensen Printed Name President Title 12t11t2020 tumwater WA Date City State * If a corporatiory proposal must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice-president (or any other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign). If a co-partnership, proposal must be executed by a partner. provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify ScaI BIDDER RESPO NSIBILITY CRITERIA Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes This certification is required by state law (RCW 39.04.350(2)) to be submitted to the City before the contract can be awarded. The bidder hereby certifies that, within the three-year period immediately preceding the bid solicitation date November L9, 2A2O), the bidder is not a "willful" violator, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, of any provision of chapters 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW, as determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries or through a civil judgment entered by a couft of limited or general jurisdiction. I certiff under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of Washington that the foregoing is true and correct. Christensen lnc. General Contractor Bidder's Busi ature Authorized Official* Kevin Christensen Printed Name President Title 12t1112020 Tumwater Date City State * If a corporatiory proposal must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice-president (or any other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign). If a co-partnership, proposal must be executed by a partner. provided to Builders Exchange of WAf Inc, For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scal PROPOSAL SIGNATURE PAGE The undersigned bidder hereby proposes and agrees to start construction work on the Contract, if awarded to him/her, on or before ten (10) calendar days from the date of the Notice to Proceed, and agrees to complete the Contract within (90) working days after issuance of the City's Notice to Proceed. The undersigned bidder hereby agrees to submit all insurance documents, performance bonds and signed contracts within ten (10) calendar days after City awards the Contract. The City anticipates issuance of the Notice to Proceed on the day of the preconstruction meeting. No bidder may withdraw his/her bid for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the day of bid opening. The required bid security consisting of a bid bond, cashier's check or cash in an amount equal to 5olo of the total amount is hereto attached. Notice of acceptance of this bid or request for additional information shall be addressed to the undersigned at the address stated below. Receipt of Addendum No.'s L , -, to the plans and/or specifications is hereby acknowledged. Failure to acknowledge receipt of the addenda may be considered an irregularity in this proposal. By signing this Proposal Signature Page, the undersigned bidder agrees to accept all contract forms and documents included within the bid packet and to be bound by all terms, requirements and representations listed in the bid documents whether set forth by the City or by the Bidder. DATE: 1211112020 Christensen lnc. General Contractor NAME nat zed Representative Kevin Christensen President (Print Name and Title) 2840 Crites St SW Suite 100 Address Tumwater wA 98512 provided to Builders Exchange of WA, lnc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify ScaI BID BOND FORM KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, christensen. Inc.. General contractor , as principal, and Travelers Casualtv and Suretv Compan)¡ of Americq, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF KENT, as Obligee, in the penal ss¡ s¡ FivqP.ercentofthe TotalAmountBid(5%of Dollars, for the payment of which the Principal and the Surety bòñã themselves, their heirs, executors, admlnistrators, successors and assigns, Jolntly and severally, by these presents. The condition of thls obligation ls such that if the Obllgee shall make any award to the Principalfor Rivcrbcnd Driving Rangc Re-Birl /proiæt ilumbcr¡ 2o- 04 According to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal thereof, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of said proposal or bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance thereof, with surety or sureties åpproved by the obligee; or if the Principal shall, in case of failure so to do, pay and forfeit to the Obligee the penal amount of the deposit specified in the invitation to bi{, then this obllgation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in fullforce and effect and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfelt to the Obllgee, as penalty and llquidated damaged, the amount of this bond. SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED THIS 3rd DAY oF Þecember 2020. ,rtüthlù 20_. Received return of deposit in the sum of P¡ovlded to BulÌders Exchange of 9lA, Inc. For usagê conditlonê Àgreenent oee www.bxwa.corn - Alwâys verlfy scal TRAYELERSl Travelerc Casualty and Sutcùy Company of Amerlca Travele¡s Casualty and Surcty Company Sù Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL ttEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine lnsurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the Stats of Connecticut (herein colleclively called the 'Companies"), and that the Companies do'hereby make, constitute and appoint Tlfany Karpavlclue of Olympia, Washlngûon' theh true and lawful Attomey-in-Fact to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undenakings and other writings obligatory ¡n the nature ihereot on behãff of the Companies in their business òf guaranteeing the f¡del¡ty of psrsons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and exEcuting or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted ¡n any actions or proceedings allowed by law. lN WITNESS WHEREOF. the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed, and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this 3rd day of February, 2017 State ot Connecticut City of Hartford ss. By: L. Raney,Vice Pres¡dênt On this the 3rd day of February, 2017, before me personally appeared Robeñ L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Travelers Casuald and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine lnsurance Company,.and that he, as such, lieing authorized so to ilo, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. ln Wltnegc Wheþof, I hereunto sot my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 30th day of Juno, 202f @ fnq^¡r- c tintalúÌ -Mãrib e. Tetr€ault, Notary Public This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of Arirericã, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine lnsurance Company, which resolulions are now in full force and €ffect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chaiman, the President, any Vice Chdman, any Executivo Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice Presi.lgnt, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, th€ Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may apPolnt Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Gompany's ssal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizanco, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may rêmove any such appointee and revoke the pow€r g¡ven him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chalrman, any Executive V¡ce President, any Senior Vice Presldent or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing author¡ty to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in wrlting and a copy thereof is tiled in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of lndemnity, or witing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any,Execulive_Vice Presklent, any Senior Vice President or any Vlce President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Coryorate Secretary or any AssisJant Secretary and duly aitested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Ass¡stant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attoràeys-in-Fact and Agents pursuanl to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their ceñificates of authority or by one or more Gompany ofi¡cers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, lhat the slgnalure of each of the following officers: President, any Executlve Vice Prêsident, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Ass¡stant Vice President, any Secrelary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Aüorney oito any certificate relating thereto appolnllng Resldent Vlce Presidents, Resident Asslstant Secretaries or Attomeys-in-Fact for purposes only of executiñg and atiesting bonds and undertakings and oiher writings obligatory in the nature thEreof, and any such Power ol Atlorney or certif¡cate bearing such facsimile signaturebr facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Gompany and any such power so executed and certilied by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. l, Kevln E. Hughes, the undersþned, Assistant Secr€tary of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surely Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine lnsurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which remains in full torce and effect' Dated this 3rd day of .@, gy. /* f /4-".*---z Kevin E: Hughes, Assl5tant Secretary To vetfi tha autfiøtddty ú tùls þwq of Alþnq, p@* ail ,rs et t&O421-W0. Plg¡¡* rcfcr þ tún above-naned Atbttæyln-Faot and lhc Mlþ of üp bttd þ whár llte powr b atdnd' CITY OF KENT COMBINED DECLARATTON FORMI NON-COLLUSTON, MTNTMUM WAGE NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION I, by signing the proposal, hereby declare, under penalty of perjury under the laws of the United States that the following statements are true and correct: That the undersigned person(s), firm, association or corporation has (have) not, either dirætly or indirectly, entered into any agreementt participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with the proiect for which this proposal is submitted. 2 That by signing the signature page of this proposal, I am deemed to have signed and to have agreed to the provisions of this declaration. AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT FORM I, the undersigned, having duly sworn, deposed, say and certify that in connection with the performance of the work of this project, I will pay each classification of laborer, workman, or mechanic employed in the performance of such work not less than the prevailing rate of wage or not less than the minimum rate of wage as specified in the principal contract; that I have read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief. Riverbend Driving Range - Phase III Re-Bid Project Numben 2O-O4 1. NAME OF PRO¡ECT Christensen lnc. General Contractor NAME OF BIDDER'S FIR,M AUTHORIZED REPRESENTA TN'E OF BIDDER provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc, For usage Conditions Àgreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify ScaI This change order form is for example purposes only. BU submitting a bid, the bidder agrees to be bound by the terms of this chanqe order form for any chanoe orders. CHANGE ORDER NO. [Enter # L, 2, 3, etc.] NAME OF CONTRACTOR:[Insert Companv Name] ("Contractor") CONTRACT NAME & PROJECT NUMBER:flnsert Name of Oriqinal Contract & Proiect #, if applicablel ORIGINAL CONTRACT DATE :llnsert Date Oriqinal Contract was Sionedl This Change Order amends the above-referenced contract; all other provisions of the contract that are not inconsistent with this Change Order shall remain in effect. For valuable consideration and by mutual consent of the parties, the project contract is modified as follows: 1. Section I of the Agreement, entitled "Description of Work," is hereby modified to add additional work or revise existing work as follows: In addition to work required under the original Agreement and any prior Amendments, Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessarY to: flnsert detailed description of additional materials, services, etc., that are needed which necessitate this change order - Be as detailed as possible. You may also refer to an attached exhibit, but clearly identify the exhibit by title and datel 2. The contract amount and time for performance provisions of Section II "Time of Completion," and Section III, "Compensation," are hereby modified as follows: Original Contract Sum, (including applicable alternates and wssr) $ Net Change by Previous Change Orders (incl. applicable WSST) $ Current Contract Amount (incl. Previous Change Orders) $ Current Change Order $ Applicable WSST Tax on this Change Order $ Revised Contract Sum $ provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scal- Original Time for Completion (insert date) Revised Time for Completion under prior Change Orders (insert date) Days Required (*) for this Change Order working days Revised Time for Completion (insert date) In accordance with Sections 1-04.4 and 1-04.5 of the Kent Special Provisions and WSDOT Standard Specifications, and Section VII of the Agreement, the Contractor accepts all requirements of this Change Order by signing below. Also, pursuant to the above-referenced contract, Contractor agrees to waive any protest it may have regarding this Change Order and acknowledges and accepts that this Change Order constitutes final settlement of all claims of any kind or nature arising from or connected with any work either covered or affected by this Change Order, including, without limitation, claims related to contract time, contract acceleration, onsite or home office overhead, or lost profits. This Change Order, unless otherwise provided, does not relieve the Contractor from strict compliance with the guarantee and warranty provisions of the original contract, particularly those pertaining to substantial completion date. All acts consistent with the authority of the Agreement, previous Change Orders (if any), and this Change Order, prior to the effective date of this Change Order, are hereby ratified and affirmed, and the terms of the Agreement, previous Change Orders (if any), and this Change Order shall be deemed to have applied. The parties whose names appear below swear under penalty of perjury that they are authorized to enter into this contract modification, which is binding on the parties of this contract. 3. The Contractor will adjust the amount of its performance bond (if any) for this project to be consistent with the revised contract sum shown in section 2, above. IN WITNESS, the parties below have executed this Agreement, which will become effective on the last date written below. CONTRACTOR: By (signature) Print Name:Its- DATE: CITY OF KENT: By (signature) Print Name: Alex Ackley I ts Facilities Suoerintendent (title) DATE: APPROVED AS TO FORM: (applicable if Mayor's signature required) Kent Law Department Provided t.o Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditj-ons Agreenent see www.bxwa,com - Always Verify Scal STAIE Ot rV sfiÍ{GtON Department of Labor & lndustries Certificate of Workers' Compensat¡on Coverage December 7, 2020 WA UBI No. L&lAccount lD Legal Business Name Doing Business As Workers' Comp Premium Status Estimated Workers Reported (See Description Below) Account Representative Licensed Contractor? License No. License Expiration 601 546 765 867,973-00 CHRISTENSEN INC GENERAL CONTRACTOR CHRISTENSEN INC GENERAL CON Account is current. Quarter 3 of Year 2020 "31 to 50 Workers" Employer Services Help Line, (360)902-4817 Yes CHRISIGO66LB 06t11t2022 What does "Estimated Workers Reported" mean? Estimated workers reported represents the number of full time position requiring at least 480 hours of work per calendar quarter. A single 480 hour position may be filled by one person, or several part time workers. lndustrial lnsurance lnformation Employers report and pay premiums each quarter based on hours of employee work already performed, and are liable for premiums found later to be due. lndustrial insurance accounts have no policy periods, cancellation dates, limitations of coverage or waiver of subrogation (See RCW 5.l.12.050 and sr.16.r90). 12t712020 CHRISTENSEN INC GENERAL CONTRACTOR https://secure.lni.wa.gov/verify/Details/liabilityCertificate.aspx?UBl=601 546765&LlC=CHRlSlG066LB&VlO=&SAW=false&ACCT=86797300 1t1 Local offìces are closed to the public. Please callyour nearest L&l offrce for local assistance (h$pr/d.wassy/ssencylssltscg.t@@) between B-5 Pacific Time weekdays, or dial360-902-5800. .A.umsmma\.1 u¡ór a rndustries_1¡11p51¿þ!.w¿gw) CHRISTENSEN INC GENERAL CONTR Owner or tradosperson Principals CHRISTENSEN, KEVIN PHILLIP, PRESIDENT PRESTO, JOSEPH III, VICE PRESIDENT CHRISTENSEN, BARBARA ANN, SECRETARY Doing bus¡ness as CHRISTENSEN INC GENERAL CONTR WA UBI No. 601 546 765 2840 CR|TES ST SW #100 OLYMPIA, WA 98512 360-7094330 THURSTON County Business type Gorporation Governing persons KEVIN P CHRISTENSEN COLIN CHRISTENSEN; REID CHRISTENSEN; {icense Verify the contractor's active registration / license / cert¡fication (depending on trade) and any past violations. Constructlon Contractor Active Meets current requ¡remsnts. License specialties GENERAL License no. CHRISIG066LB Effective - expiration 06/02/1 99¡l- 06 I 1'l 12022 .-e-snd Developers Surety & lndem Co $12,000.00 Bond account no. 673409C Received by L&l 0310812017 Bond hlstory lnsurance West Amorlcan lns Co Policy no. 8KW57232670 Received by L&l 06t0412020 lnsurance history Effective date 06102120'17 Expirat¡on date Until Cancoled $1,000,000.00 Effective date 06/t 6/201 I Expiration date 0611612021 9sYins-9 No savings accounts during tho prevlous 6 year period. lnspection results date 01t09t2020 lnspection no. 317557372 Location 221 Gollege ST NE Olympla, WA 98516 No violations lnspection results date 0812712019 lnspection no. 317954832 Locatlon 3505 Paclflc Ave Olympla, WA 98501 Violations lnspection results dato 03/01/201 6 lnspection no. 31 79391 66 Location 408 Cleveland St. SW Tumwater, WA 98501 Vlolations crffien I nc. GENERAL CONTRACTOR 2840 Crites Street SW Suite #10Q Tumwater, WA 98512 360-709-0330 FAX 360-709-0220 E-mail info@cincgc.com Project Name: Lilly MedicalPlaza 418 LillyRdNE Olympia, WA 98502 Architect: Glenn C Wells, A.I.A 324 West Bay Dr. Suite 102 Olympia, WA 98502 Percent Completed: 95o/o Project Name: Kenyan Community Church 26820 Pacific Hwy S Kent, WA 98032 Architect: Osborn Architects Inc. 1011 SW Klickitat Way #208 Seattle, WA 98134 Percent Completed: 20% Project Name: Vashon Island SD Maint. Bldg 20414 Vashon Hwy SW Vashon, WA 98070 Architect: Miller Hayashi Architects PLLC 118 N 35th St Suite 200 Seattle, V/A 98103 Percent Completed: 95% Current Jobs in Progress Owner: Lilly MedialPlazaLLC 927 Suney Trace Dr. SE Tumwater, WA 98501 Contract Amount: $2.9 Million Estimated completion date: August 15,2020 Owner: Kenyan Community Church 9656 V/aters Ave S Seattle, WA 98118 Contract Amount: Approx. $8 Million Estimated completion date: Fehruary 2021 Owner: Vashon Island School District No. 402 PO Box 547 Vashon, WA 98070 Contract Amount: $1.6 Million Estimated completion date: December 4,2020 I I nc. GENERAL CONTRACTOR 2840 Crites Street SW Suite #100 Tumwater, WA 98512 360-709-0330 FAX 360-709-0220 E-mail info@cincgc.com Project Name: MeridianElem. MP Room 25621140th Ave SE Kent, V/A 98042 Architect: SCR Architects 1916 Pike Place Suite 12 Seattle, WA 98101 Percent Completed: 5% Project Name: WSSDA 225 College StNE Olympia, WA 98516 Architect: MSGS Architects 510 Capitol Way S Olympia, WA Percent Completed: 95% Owner: Kent School District No. 415 12033 SE 256ü Street Kent, WA 98030 Contract Amount: $3,463,000 Estimated completion date: TBD Owner: Dept. of Enterprises PO Box 4t476 Olympia, WA Contract Amount: $3,195,000 Estimated completion date: End of December2020 2 Christensen Inc.(; r:: rv r1 fi l\ 1- c ()N T R A C T() Ïì 2840 Crites Street SW Suite #100 Tumwater, WA 98512 360-709-0330 FAX 360-709-0220 E-mail info@cincgc.com References The Cedars (KJS Multi-Use Building) $1,700,000.00 810 Jefferson Street SE Olympia, WA 98502 Contact: Brandy Fox 360-753-2999 Project Manager: Joe Presto *New construction of a one store maintenance building - 2,800 sq ft - Completed in Novembet 2020. The Cedars (KJS Multi-Use Building) $4,000,000.00 810 Jefferson Street SE Olympia, WA 98502 Contact: Ali Raad 360-753-2999 Project Manager: Kevin Christensen *New construction of a five story multi-purpose office building44,250 sq ft - completed October 2013; 10% of the cost of work performed by Christensen forces. Challenger HS 18020 B St E Spanaway, WA 98387 s4,107,744.00 Contact: Marlene Anglemyer 253-683-6046 Project Manager: Joe Presto *New construction of 8,119 sq ft HS consisting of classrooms, admin office and student commons. Steel type II - completed 2019:25% of the cost of work was performed by Christensen forces. Cedar Valley Elem. MP Room 26500 Timberlane Way SE Covington, WA 98042 s2,862,993.00 Contact: Fred Long 253-373-7526 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Addition of new MP room to existing school - completed 2019;24% of the cost of the work was performed by Christensen forces. Park Orchard Elementary 11010 SE 232'd St Kent, WA 98031 $2,187,795.00 Contact: David Bussard 253-373-7277 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Addition of new 5,900 sq ft MP room to existing school - completed 2018;24% of the cost of the work performed by Christensen forces. I Crr Inc. GENERAL CONTRACTOR 2840 Crites Street SW Suite #100 Tumwater, WA 98512 360-709-0330 FAX 360-709-0220 E-mail info@cincgc.com ESC Bldg 1 TI 516 176th St E Spanaway, WA 98387 $1,627,008.00 Contact: Marlene Anglemyer 253-683-6046 Project Manager: Joe Presto tTenant improvements to existing building - completed 2019: 15% of the cost of the work was performed by Christensen forces. Hood Canal Ace Hardware 24171N Hwy 101 Hoodsport, \ilA s1,275,076.00 Contact: Mike and Geri Purvis Project Manager: Reid Christensen *New construction of HC Ace Hardware store - completed 2019:27% of the cost of work was performed by Christensen forces. usDA $1,200,000.00 1835 Black Lake Blvd Olympiao \ryA 98512 Contact: Shep Salusþ 206-281-8905 Project Manager: Kevin Christensen *Remodel of 38,000 sq ft office building - completed 2014 20% of the cost of the work performed by Christensen forces. Lucky Seven 4047 1 4061 Pacific Ave SE Laceyo WA 98503 $1,130,845.00 Contact: Mike Chor 360-556-6333 Project Manager: Kevin Christensen *Demo of existing buildings and new construction of buildings- completed 2019;28% of the cost of the work performed by Christensen forces. North Thurston Public Schools South Sound High School Phase I 411 College Street NE Lacey, WA 98516 $975,000.00 Contact: Jeff Goheen 360-412-4500 ProjectManager: ReidChristensen *New Construction of 18,000 sq ft school - completed March 2008;47% of the cost of the work was performed with Christensen forces. 2 -.+çffi.Christensen Inc. GENERAL CONTRACTOR 2840 Crites Street SW Suite #100 Tumwater, WA 98512 360-709-0330 FAX 360-709-0220 E-mail info@cincgc.com Evergreen Sustainable Agriculturat Lab $907,000.00 2700 Evergreen Parkway Northwest Olympia, WA 98505 Contact: Azeem Hoosein 360-867-6041 Project Manager: Kevin Christensen *Construct new 2,000 sq ft building to be used as a science lab/class room. 100% complete. Intelco Pla;za 4508 Intelco Loop SE Lacey, WA 98503 Contact: SteveLewandowski 360-701-8934 ProjectManager: *Construction of new professional building and tenant improvements' $800,000.00 Kevin Christensen Percival Landing $800,000.00 05 Columbia Street NW Olympia, WA 98501 Contact: Jim Hannah 360-589-1549 Project Manager: Kevin Christensen *New construction of pavilion and harbor house - completed September 2011 Capitot Campus Child Care Center $800,000.00 232Perry Street NW Olympia, WA 98501 Contact: Stephen Masini 360-951-1697 Project Manager: Kevin Christensen *New construction of 2,000 sq ft childcare facility - completed July 2008: 35%o of the cost of the work was performed with Christensen forces. Nguyen Residence $752,406.00 2323Peach Ave NW Olympia, WA 98502 Owner: Hoai and Kinh Thi Nguyen Project Manager: Colin Christensen *Construction of new, single family home - completed September 2019: l0% of the cost of work was performed by Christensen forces. J Cnå.Îff8friien Inc. GENERAL CONTRACTOR 2840 Crites Street SW Suite #100 Tumwater, WA 98512 360-709-0330 FAX 360-709-0220 E-mail info@cincgc.com Olympia School District $532,000.00 1113 Legion Way SE Olympia, WA 98501 Contact: Tim Byme 360-596-8560 Project Manager: Reid Christensen *Various interior and exterior improvements for multiple school sites within the district. Valley Communications Center 27519108th Ave SE Kent, WA 98030 $504,593.00 Contact: Davis Clark 253-351,-8877 Project Manager: Joe Presto *lnterior tenant improvements to existing office and admin aÍea- completed 20L9: 13% of the cost of work was performed by Christensen forces. Skokomish Indian Tribe $500,000.00 80 N Tribal Center Road Skokomish, WA 98584 Contact: Larry Winders 360-877-6748 Project Manager: Kevin Christensen *Clinic remodel, lab remodel, misc. residential repair and new construction. Skokomish Indian Tribe - Support Houses 80 N Tribal Center Road Skokomish, \ryA 98584 $193,256.00 Contact: Larry Winders 360-877-6748 Project Manager: Kevin Christensen *Construction of 4 new support houses - completed 2019: 4l% of the cost of the work was performed by Christensen forces. Belfair State Park- Comfort Station & Kitchen Shelter Washington State Parks and Recreation Commission 3151 NE State Route 300 Belfair, WA 98528 $498,000.00 Contact: Dale Broyles 360-725-9754 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Demolishing existing comfort station and building a new comfort station and kitchen shelter. 4 ' ¡jl.:a¡{.¡¿ " Christensen Inc. CìËNIERAL CONTRAC]T()R 2840 Crites Street SW Suite #100 Tumwater, WA 98512 360-709-0330 FAX 360-709-0220 E-mail info@cincgc.com Clover Park Technical College Building 14 Facade Tacomao WA 98499 $480,000.00 Contact: Andrea Faust 360-902-7223 Prqect Manager: Joe Presto *New construction of concrete parapet and roof - completed September 2010:'20% of the cost of work performed by Christensen forces. Buckley Readiness Center Washington Military Department 455 N River Avenue Buckley, WA 98321 $380,000.00 Contact: Jim Castino 253-851-7648 PrqectManager: ReidChristensen *Construction of a 3,600 sqft pre-engineered metal storage building. Everett Community College 2000 Tower Street Everett, WA 98201 $240,000.00 Contact: Laura Haima 360-407-9362 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Remodel of two large restrooms. Woodinville Water District 17 238 Woodinville-Duvall Road Woodinville, WA 98072 $196,000.00 Contact: Lee Driftmier 425-881-7506 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Office tenant improvements, approx 1,500 sq ft. Kola Kole Schoolhouse Kitsap County 11128 NE Maine Street Kingston, WA 98346 $181,000.00 Contact: Colby Wattling 360-337-7036 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Exterior work consisting of replacing windows, shingles, lights and painting on a two-story building. 5 Christensen Inc. C; E N E I{ A L CON TII, ACTÇ)R 2840 Crites Street SW Suite #100 Tumwater, WA 98512 360-709-0330 FAX 360-709-0220 E-mail info@cincgc.com Highline Community College Building 19 ADA Ramp/Stairs 2400 S 240th Street Des Moines, WA 98198 $179,500.00 Contact: Julie Nakahara 360-239-7706 Project Manager: Joe Presto *ADA upgrades to walkways, ramps and railings - anticipated completion of July 2013; 50% of the cost of the work was performed with Christensen forces. Lacey Construction Shop Roof Replacement Department of Fish and Wildlife 600 Capitol Way N Olympia, WA 98501 $117,000.00 Contact: Casey Davidson 360-902-8370 Project Manager: Joe Presto * Complete tear off and replacement of a metal standing seam roof system on one multilevel commercial construction shop and office building. Bremerton Housing Authority Firs ASA Ramp Conversion 183 Russell Road Bremerton, WA 98312 $109,000.00 Contact: Andi Reed 360-616-7111 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Installation of an ADA compliant ramp to the back entrance of The Firs Apartments Department of Natural Resources Construction Shop Roof 6240 Carpenter Road Lacey, WA 98503 $107,500.00 Contact: Casey Davidson 360-902-8370 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Re-roof multi-level commercial construction shop and office building. Advance Equipment 295026th Avenue SW Tumwater, WA 98512 $100,000.00 Contact: Dick Hoverter 360-866-4741 Project Manager: Kevin Christensen *Various plant remodels. 6 Christensen Inc. CJ Ë, N E Tt A L C] ()N T I{ A C T() I{ 2840 Crites Street SW Suite #100 Tumwater, WA 98512 360-709-0330 FAX 360-709-0220 E-mail info@cincgc.com City of Everett Everett Senior Center 3025 Lombard Avenue Everett, WA 98201 $98,000.00 Contact: Ruben Sanchez 425-257-8896 Project Manager: Joe Presto *lnterior and exterior repairs at the Everett Senior Center. Lacey Police Impound Storage Building 6245 Martin Way E Laceyo WA 98516 $93,500.00 Contact: Justin Knox 360-438-2628 Project Manager: Kevin Christensen *Erection of a new wood framed storage building, approx 2,400 sq ft. Lacey Fire District #3 Station #33 6500 Mutlen Road SB Olympia, WA 98503 Station #35 8407 Steilacoom Road SE Lacey, WA 98513 $79,000.00 Contact: Gary Pearson 360-528-2333 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Perform saw cutting and removal of asphalt, sub-grade prep, irrigation piping repair and installation of new reinforced concrete aprons. Vestibule Entrance Building 4 Pierce Transit 370196th Street SW Lakewood, WA 98499 s69,000.00 Contact: Lee Knawa 360-407-9208 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Installation of new curtain wall system vestibule and storefront doors. HQ Siding Restoration Department of Fish & Wildlife 600 Capitol Way N Olympiao WA 98501 s38,000.00 Contact: Casey Davidson 360-902-8370 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Replace siding and install battens on a two-story office building. 7 cr$ü&en Inc. GENERAL CONTRACTOR 2840 Crites Street SW Suite #100 Tumwater, WA 98512 360-709-0330 FAX 360-709-0220 E-mail info@cincgc.com Bingham CreekHatchery $35,000.00 Department of Fish & Wildlife 3914 W Fish Hatchery Road Elma, WA 98541 Contact: Casey Davidson 360-902-8370 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Construct energy effïciency improvements to the hatchery office, crew room and public restrooms. Kitsap County Parks & Recreation 1195 N\ry Fairgrounds Road Bremerton, WA 98366 $36,700.00 Contact: Terri Lyman 360-337-5350 Project Manager: Joe Presto *Tenant improvements office space - completed June 2013; 65% of the cost of the work was performed with Christensen forces. 8 Cnristensen Inc. CENERAL CONTRACTOR 2840 Crites Street SW Suite #100 Tumwater, WA 98512 360-709-0330 E-mail info@cincgc.com FAX 360-709-0220 Officer and Key Personnel Qualifïcation Kevin Christensen, President Kevin has been involved in the construction industry his entire life; his father was a project manager for many large commercial projects in the area. Kevin has been working in the industry since the age of 15; he worked in the field doing carpentry, roofing and surveying to save money for college. Kevin earned a Bachelor of Art degree in Communications from Washington State University. Over the past 31 years Kevin has been a principle in a general contracting company, where he is involved in all types of construction, including: design build, civil engineering, concrete, wood framing, steel erection, log construction and finish work for large and small jobs within the industrial and commercial fields. His knowledge and experience have made him into a great project manager, communicator, and president. Reid Christensen, Vice President Reid has been involved in the construction industry his entire life, his father, Kevin is the President for a general contracting company. Reid remembers going onto job sites with his father and sitting in on meetings. Reid began working for Christensen Inc. in June of 1999 as a laborer, and has been working his way up the chain since. Reid graduated from Central Washington University in2004 with a Bachelor's Degree in Construction Management. He has completed courses to computer generate pre-engineered building drawings. Over the last three years, Reid has been involved in all phases of commercial construction with a strong emphasis on pre- engineered metal design and erection. Reid's other strong points include, but are not limited to, wood structures, steel structures, log construction, project coordination/management, plan reading and onsite problem solving. Colin Christensen, Vice President Colin has grown up visiting job sites frequently as a kid and has been working in the construction field since 2002. After graduating from the University of Washington with a degree in economics, he decided he would continue developing his skills as a carpenter and builder. Since then, Colin has worked on a wide range of projects and continues to master skills while leaming new ones along the way. He has experience with all phases of construction and many different types of construction from residential to industrial and everything in between. Colin enjoys working with his hands and bringing his creativity to life within his projects. He particularly enjoys projects that involve creative designs, energy effìcient/green building, and value engineering. I n I nc. GENERAL CONTRACTOR 2840 Crites Street SW Suite #100 Tumwater, WA 98512 360-709-0330 E-mail info@ci ncAc.com FAX 360-709-0220 Joe Presto III' General Manager Joe has been in the construction industry for most of his life. He has worked for a local contractor through his teenage years. lnl975, Joe started his own construction company that specialized in building spec and custom homes. He gradually worked his way into the commercial industry by building restaurants, apartments, office complexes, and other multi-story construction. In 1999, Joe went looking for a change and a different type of construction and went to work for a company in Femdale, TVA as a project manager. The new position was building sewer and water treatment facilities and back-up generator systems for City Municipalities. In 2002,Joe was then offered the opportunity to join Kevin at Christensen Inc. as a superintendentþroject manager and estimator. In November 2006, Joe was promoted to General Manager and currently shares the responsibility of estimating, managing current projects, and the day to day operations within the company. 2 Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 1000 - 1 SUMMARY SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT: A. Project Name: Riverbend Driving Range - Phase III - Re-Bid B. Project Location: 2020 W. Meeker Street, Kent, Washington 98032 C. Owner's Name: City of Kent. D. Architect's Name: Broderick Architects. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Project Scope: 1. Construct in a single complete contract the CITY OF KENT - RIVERBEND DRIVING RANGE - PHASE III RE-BID, in accordance with the plans and project manual prepared by Broderick Architects. 1.03 COORDINATOR: A. It shall be the General Contractor's responsibility to coordinate the work of all trades (including electrical) taking part in the execution of this contract. 1.04 INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTORS: A. All instructions will be given by the Architect or his authorized agents (e.g., field observers). No other instructions shall be recognized. Instructions from the Architect will be made to the Contractor or his authorized agents (e.g., Job Superintendent) for distribution to subcontractors and/or trades people on the job. Subcontractors and Material men shall not contact the Owner or Architect to discuss the Project. 1.05 PERMITS AND FEES: A. The Owner will pay the plan check fee and the building permit fee to the City of Kent. The Contractor shall include in his Bid all additional cost of permits and fees as required (electrical, street use, etc.). 1.06 PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS: A. Pursuant to Washington State Law, this project will be subject to payment of prevailing wages to all contractors and subcontractors. 1.07 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Construction activities are limited to the building side and the parking lot to the north. 1. Contractor will be required to repair / replace damaged concrete or asphalt in the parking lot, sidewalks and street. B. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. C. Coordinate with the Meet Me on Meeker Street improvement construction work being performed adjacent to the site. 1.08 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING: A. Shall be as required by code and in specific sections of these specifications. Include any cost of said inspections and test in the Bid. The cost of any outside testing laboratories tests and/or inspections required by the City of Kent Building Department will be paid by the Owner unless the need for such additional tests and/or inspections was caused by the Contractor's errors, omission and/or neglect, as determined by the Architect, in which case the Contractor shall pay the cost of such additional tests and/of inspections. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 1000 - 2 SUMMARY 1.09 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DEFINED: A. The earliest date on which, in the opinion of the Architect, the Owner may fully occupy and use the Project for the purpose for which it is intended, without undue inconvenience to either Contractor or Owner. 1.10 PRIOR USE OR OCCUPANCY: A. The Owner shall have the right to occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the work prior to completion. B. City of Kent intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the existing building during the entire construction period. C. Occupancy or use prior to completion shall not be deemed an acceptance of any part of the Work, unless mutually agreed to by Owner and Contractor, and any claim which Owner may have against Contractor shall not be deemed to have been waived by such occupancy of use. 1.11 INCLEMENT WEATHER A. In the event that inclement weather becomes a factor during the golf course construction phase, preventing the Contractor from reasonable pursuit of the project, the Contractor shall notify in writing with 48 hours of determination of the Owner's Representative and if justified, the Architect will add such time to the contract time, and to the seeding deadline. No additional general conditions will be allotted for this time. 1.12 ACT OF GOD A. "Act of God" means an earthquake, flood, cyclone, or other cataclysmic phenomenon of nature. A rain, windstorm, high water or other locality of the work, which might reasonable have been anticipated from historical records of general locality of the work, shall not be construed as an "Act of God". The Contractor shall take precautions to protect his work from inclement weather and make any repairs caused by it. 1.13 TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE A. The Contractor is hereby advised that time is of the essence. Initiation of the work and completion are to occur as rapidly as possible upon acceptance of Bid and authorization to proceed. Uncertain climatic conditions may cause disruption. Completion of project could be postponed until the next spring if work is not successfully completed due to inclement weather. Bid prices submitted will be for proper completion regardless of onset of cold weather. 1.14 CONCEALED CONDITIONS - ADDITIONAL COST: A. Should concealed conditions be encountered, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect of such conditions before they are disturbed. The Architect will promptly investigate, upon finding material deviating from the conditions indicated or inferred in the plans and project manual, he will prepare Change Order documents. Non-compliance with this requirement will result in no reimbursement to the Contractor for doing the Work except in an emergency endangering life or property. The notice for any work requiring additive cost shall be given within five (5) days of the event giving rise to the additional cost. 1.15 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION: A. The Contractor, as the Work process, shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish and, at the completion of the Work shall remove from building and surrounding area all rubbish and any remaining equipment including; scaffolding, tools and surplus materials. B. Apply protective covering on installed Work and existing adjacent areas to remain where it is required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Clean and perform maintenance on installed Work as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 1000 - 3 SUMMARY D. Work connecting to any adjacent property shall be kept unencumbered and available to the Owner's daily operations. Coordinate with the Owner time and duration of any and all down times with a minimum of 24 hours notice. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 2300 - 4 ALTERNATES SECTION 01 2300 ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Description of Alternates. 1.02 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at City of Kent's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Add Alternate No. 1 - Provide built-in benches and half-round tables to be fabricated and installed in the Driving Range Addition per the Construction Drawings.: PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 2500 - 5 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES SECTION 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. A Substitution Request for products, assemblies, materials, and equipment constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product, equipment, assembly, or system. 2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the work to be complete, with no additional cost to City of Kent. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer. C. Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request, and information necessary to provide an actionable response. D. Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item. 3.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Submittal Form (after award of contract): 1. Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 13.1A - Substitution Request. See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable. B. Broderick Architects will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date of Agreement. C. Submit request for Substitution for Convenience immediately upon discovery of its potential advantage to the project, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Broderick Architects, in order to stay on approved project schedule. 1. In addition to meeting general documentation requirements, document how the requested substitution benefits the City of Kent through cost savings, time savings, greater energy conservation, or in other specific ways. 2. Document means of coordinating of substitution item with other portions of the work, including work by affected subcontractors. 3. Bear the costs engendered by proposed substitution of: a. City of Kent's compensation to Broderick Architects for any required redesign, time spent processing and evaluating the request. 3.03 RESOLUTION A. Broderick Architects will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.04 ACCEPTANCE A. Accepted substitutions change the work of the Project. They will be documented and incorporated into work of the project by Change Order, Construction Change Directive, Architectural Supplementary Instructions, or similar instruments provided for in the Conditions of the Contract. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 2500 - 6 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 3000 - 7 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General administrative requirements. B. Preconstruction meeting. C. Site mobilization meeting. D. Progress meetings. E. Construction progress schedule. F. Progress photographs. G. Coordination drawings. H. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. I. Number of copies of submittals. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: General product requirements. B. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. C. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents; operation and maintenance data; warranties and bonds. 1.03 GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements for coordination of execution of administrative tasks with timing of construction activities. B. Make the following types of submittals to Broderick Architects: 1. Requests for Interpretation (RFI). 2. Requests for substitution. 3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples. 4. Test and inspection reports. 5. Design data. 6. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 7. Applications for payment and change order requests. 8. Progress schedules. 9. Coordination drawings. 10. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. 11. Closeout submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. City of Kent. 2. Broderick Architects. 3. Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of City of Kent-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 3000 - 8 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 4. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Broderick Architects. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. D. General Contractor to record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Broderick Architects, City of Kent, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.02 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING A. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor. 2. City of Kent. 3. Broderick Architects. 4. Contractor's superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors. B. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by City of Kent and Contractor. 2. City of Kent's requirements. 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by City of Kent. 4. Temporary utilities provided by City of Kent. 5. Survey and building layout. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7. Schedules. 8. Application for payment procedures. 9. Procedures for testing. 10. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 11. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 12. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. C. General Contractor to record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Broderick Architects, City of Kent, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor. 2. City of Kent. 3. Broderick Architects. 4. Contractor's superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors. B. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 8. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 9. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 11. Other business relating to work. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 3000 - 9 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS C. General Contractor to record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Broderick Architects, City of Kent, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. B. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. C. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. D. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.05 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. Maintain one set of all photographs at project site for reference; same copies as submitted, identified as such. B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files. C. Take photographs as evidence of existing project conditions as follows: 1. Exterior views: Grading activity and utility installation. 3.06 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Provide information required by Project Coordinator for preparation of coordination drawings. 3.07 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) A. Whenever possible, request clarifications at the next appropriate project progress meeting, with response entered into meeting minutes, rendering unnecessary the issuance of a formal RFI. B. Preparation: Prepare an RFI immediately upon discovery of a need for interpretation of Contract Documents. Failure to submit a RFI in a timely manner is not a legitimate cause for claiming additional costs or delays in execution of the work. 1. Prepare a separate RFI for each specific item. 2. Prepare using an electronic version of the form appended to this section. 3. Prepare using software provided by the Electronic Document Submittal Service. 4. Combine RFI and its attachments into a single electronic file. PDF format is preferred. C. RFI Log: Prepare and maintain a tabular log of RFIs for the duration of the project. 1. Indicate current status of every RFI. Update log promptly and on a regular basis. 2. Note dates of when each request is made, and when a response is received. 3. Highlight items requiring priority or expedited response. 4. Highlight items for which a timely response has not been received to date. 3.08 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit to Broderick Architects for review a schedule for submittals in tabular format. 1. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule and schedule of values. 2. Format schedule to allow tracking of status of submittals throughout duration of construction. 3. Arrange information to include scheduled date for initial submittal, specification number and title, submittal category (for review or for information), description of item of work covered, and role and name of subcontractor. 3.09 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 3000 - 10 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS B. Submit to Broderick Architects for review for the limited purpose of checking for compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in Contract Documents. C. Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals. 3.10 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Broderick Architect’s knowledge as contract administrator or for City of Kent. 3.11 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. D. Submit for City of Kent's benefit during and after project completion. 3.12 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected. B. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Broderick Architects. 1. After review, produce duplicates. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 4000 - 11 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals. B. Testing and inspection agencies and services. C. Control of installation. D. Mock-ups. E. Defect Assessment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 4216 - Definitions. B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 1.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES A. City of Kent will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Broderick Architects before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 2.02 MOCK-UPS A. Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required, construct mock-ups in location and size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. The purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. B. Integrated Exterior Mock-ups: Construct integrated exterior mock-up as directed. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products as required in individual Specification Sections. Provide adequate supporting structure for mock-up materials as necessary. C. Notify Broderick Architects seven (7) working days in advance of dates and times when mock- ups will be constructed. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 4000 - 12 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS D. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. E. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. F. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. G. Where mock-up has been accepted by Broderick Architects and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock- up and clear area when directed to do so by Broderick Architects. 2.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Broderick Architects, Owner and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with City of Kent's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. B. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Broderick Architects. C. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 2.04 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 4216 - 13 DEFINITIONS SECTION 01 4216 DEFINITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section supplements the definitions contained in the General Conditions. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Character And Intent Of Drawings And Specifications: 1. Items of Work, shown and not specified, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the Drawings, shall be considered required as if it had been both specified and shown on the Drawings. 2. The General Conditions, Drawings and Specifications contemplate a finished piece of Work of such character and quality as described in and reasonably inferred from them, and the Contractor shall include sufficient allowance to make his Work complete and operable, fitting with the Work of other Contractors and the Owner, and in compliance with good practice and ordinances, codes and regulations of all bodies or persons having governmental authority over the Project. He agrees that the failure to show details or repeat on any drawings the figures or notes given on another shall not be cause for additional charges or claims. 3. The Drawings are intended to show the general arrangement, design and extent of the work and extent of the Work are partly diagrammatic. They are not intended to be scaled for rough-in dimensions, or to serve as shop drawings or portions thereof. B. Verification Of Dimensions: 1. Before layout of the Work, the Contractor and all Subcontractors shall verify all grades, lines, levels, existing conditions and dimensions at the job site and as shown on the Drawings. They shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the above to the Architect before commencing Work. C. Errors And Omissions: 1. If any errors or omissions appear in the Drawings, Specifications or other documents the Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing of such omissions or errors prior to proceeding with any Work which appears in question. 2. In the event of the Contractor's failing to give such notice, he shall be held responsible for the results of any such errors or omissions and the cost of rectifying the same. 3. The Contractor shall have all items or details clarified with the Architect prior to submitting a bid; otherwise the Architect's interpretation shall be final. D. Language: 1. These specifications are written in the abbreviated form and frequently include incomplete sentences. 2. Omission of words such as: “shall be,” “the Contractor shall,” “as noted on the Drawings” is intentional. Omitted words and phrases shall be included by inference in the same manner as they are in a note on the Drawings. 3. For the purpose of brevity, such words as: “install,” “erect ,””connect,” and “apply” will not be repeated hereinafter with reference to some materials, items or equipment. However, unless specifically excepted, every item and all materials shall be installed, erected, connected and/or applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and/or recommendations and made ready for use. a. “Contractor” 1) Refers, as applicable, to the General Contractor, thus differentiated from a subcontractor, even though “Contractor” may be used with respect to subcontractor's Work. Likewise, the subcontractor's work assumes the Work of the “Contractor”, if so subcontracted. b. “Contractor” Referenced in Imperative Mode Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 4216 - 14 DEFINITIONS 1) Where imperative mode is used, General Contractor is the one who is required to perform or is responsible for the Work of others. c. Subcontractor 1) The entity (person or firm) who has a direct contract with the General Contractor to perform a particular part of the Work at the project site. Article 5 of the General Conditions obligates each subcontractor to assume the duties and obligations stated in the Contract between the Contractor and Owner. d. Installer 1) The entity (person or firm) who has a direct contract with the General Contractor to perform a particular part of the Work at the project site. Article 5 of the General Conditions obligates each installer to assume the duties and obligations stated in the Contract between the Contractor and Owner. e. Equal, Approved, Approved Equal Similar Usage 1) Where the terms “or equal”, “or approved”, “or approved equal”, or similar expressions are used, the Architect and the Owner are the sole judge of quality and suitability of proposed substitution. Do not construe terminology in any as giving the Contractor the Option to use materials other than those specified, without written permission of the Architect. f. Miscellaneous Terms 1) "Provide” shall mean “furnish and install” or “furnish labor and materials required for installation, ready for use, and under the term of the Contract Documents.” 2) "As shown”, “as indicated”, “as detailed”, “as noted”, or words of similar import refer to the Contract Documents. 3) "The Work”, means “ the work to be Accomplished under this Contract.” 4) "Approved” means “approved by the Architect.” 5) "For approval” means “for the Architect's approval.” E. Number Of Specified Items Required: 1. Whenever an article, device or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular number, such references shall include as many items as shown on the Drawings or as are required to complete the installation. 2. The Contractor shall provide all items listed, and perform all operations called for, in accordance with Article 3 of the “General Conditions.” F. Organization Of Specifications: 1. Division of these specifications into trades conforms roughly to customary practice. They are used for convenience only. The Architect is not bound to define the limits of any subcontract, and will not enter into disputes between the Contractor and his employees, including subcontractors and suppliers. 2. All sections of DIVISION 0, Bidding Requirements and Contract Documents, and DIVISION 1, General Requirements, of this Project Manual shall be a part of all technical divisions and sections the same as if they were specifically called for in each section. G. Format Explanation: 1. The format of the principal portions of technical specifications is described as follow (although certain portions may not fully comply and no particular significance will be attached to such compliance or non-compliance): 2. Titles a. The specifications are divided into divisions and sections for the convenience of writing and using. The titles of these are not intended to imply a particular meaning or to fully describe the work in each division, subdivision or section, and are not an integral part of the text which specifies the requirements. 3. 3-Part Section a. Each section of specifications has been subdivided into 3 “parts for uniformity and convenience (Part 1 - General, Part 2 - Products, and Part 3 - Execution). These do not imply a particular meaning and are not an integral part of the text which specifies Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 4216 - 15 DEFINITIONS the requirements. Where text for one of the parts is lacking due to project requirements, the title is included followed by the words “Not Used.” PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 5000 - 16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dewatering B. Temporary utilities. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. H. Field offices. 1.02 DEWATERING A. Provide temporary means and methods for dewatering all temporary facilities and controls. 1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. City of Kent will provide the following: 1. Electrical power, consisting of connection to existing facilities. 2. Water supply, consisting of connection to existing facilities. B. Existing facilities may be used. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.05 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants. C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.06 FENCING A. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.07 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate work areas from City of Kent- occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into City of Kent-occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces: 1.08 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and City of Kent's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.09 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 5000 - 17 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and City of Kent. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. E. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. F. Existing parking areas located at north of the construction site may be used for construction parking. 1. Contractor will be required to repair / replace damages concrete and asphalt. 1.10 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. D. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.11 FIELD OFFICES A. Office: With lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table. B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons. 1.12 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 5713 - 18 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL SECTION 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities. B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities. C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures. D. Performance bond. E. Compensation of City of Kent for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non- compliance by Contractor. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Temporary and permanent grade changes for erosion control. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4355/D4355M - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2014. B. ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity; 1999a (Reapproved 2014). C. ASTM D4533/D4533M - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles; 2015. D. ASTM D4632/D4632M - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles; 2015a. E. ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile; 2016. F. ASTM D4873/D4873M - Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples; 2017. G. EPA (NPDES) - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Construction General Permit; Current Edition. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of EPA (NPDES) for erosion and sedimentation control, as specified by the NPDES, for Phases I and II, and in compliance with requirements of Construction General Permit (CGP), whether the project is required by law to comply or not. B. Comply with all requirements of State of Washington and the City of Kent for erosion and sedimentation control, even though this project is not required by law to comply. C. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic inspection reports. D. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until applicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable permits. E. Provide to City of Kent a Performance Bond covering erosion and sedimentation preventive measures only, in an amount equal to 100 percent of the cost of erosion and sedimentation control work. F. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover and before precipitation occurs. G. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to construction activities for this project. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 5713 - 19 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less. 2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that might occur in 25 years. H. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil. 2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic. 3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to City of Kent. I. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site. 2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site. 3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements. 4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to City of Kent. J. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways adjacent the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to City of Kent; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove deposited sediment after each storm. K. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to City of Kent; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. L. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant. M. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been established. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan: 1. Include: a. Site plan identifying soils and vegetation, existing erosion problems, and areas vulnerable to erosion due to topography, soils, vegetation, or drainage. b. Site plan showing grading; new improvements; temporary roads, traffic accesses, and other temporary construction; and proposed preventive measures. c. Where extensive areas of soil will be disturbed, include storm water flow and volume calculations, soil loss predictions, and proposed preventive measures. d. Schedule of temporary preventive measures, in relation to ground disturbing activities. e. Other information required by law. f. Format required by law is acceptable, provided any additional information specified is also included. 2. Obtain the approval of the Plan by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Obtain the approval of the Plan by City of Kent. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 5713 - 20 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL C. Certificate: Mill certificate for silt fence fabric attesting that fabric and factory seams comply with specified requirements, signed by legally authorized official of manufacturer; indicate actual minimum average roll values; identify fabric by roll identification numbers. D. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, indicate condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mulch: Use one of the following: 1. Straw or hay. B. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with the following minimum average roll lengths: 1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4751. 2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec^-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491. 3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4355/D4355M after 500 hours exposure. 4. Tensile Strength: 100 pounds-force, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124 pounds- force, minimum, in machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632/D4632M. 5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632/D4632M. 6. Tear Strength: 55 pounds-force, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4533/D4533M. 7. Color: Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted. C. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long: 1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 pound per linear foot. 2. Softwood, 4 by 4 inches in cross section. 3. Hardwood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to greatest extent possible. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Silt Fences: 1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873/D4873M. 2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use nominal 16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 4 inches in ground. 3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use nominal 28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is more than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and steel posts spaced at 4 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified. 6. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping at least 18 inches, with extra post. 7. Fasten fabric to wood posts using one of the following: Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 5713 - 21 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL a. Four nails per post with 3/4 inch diameter flat or button head, 1 inch long, and 14 gage, 0.083 inch shank diameter. b. Five staples per post with at least 17 gage, 0.0453 inch wire, 3/4 inch crown width and 1/2 inch long legs. 8. Fasten fabric to steel posts using wire, nylon cord, or integral pockets. 9. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash pad or other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not more than 12 inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet. B. Mulching Over Small and Medium Areas: 1. Dry Straw and Hay: Apply 4 to 6 inches depth. 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall. B. Repair deficiencies immediately. C. Silt Fences: 1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence. 3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other causes. D. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site. E. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site. 3.05 CLEAN UP A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to remain by Broderick Architects. B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures. C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 6000 - 22 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations. E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Coordinate submittals with the progress schedule and actual progress of the Work. Provide copies required by governing authorities, in addition to copies specified for submittal to Architect. 2. Samples, Shop Drawings And Paperwork Submittals: a. All materials or items submitted to the Architect must be labeled with the Contractor's Name, Project Name, and Contractors Signature showing his approval of the product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. The Contractor shall verify all field measurements and submit with such promptness as to cause no delay to the Work, four (4) copies, checked and approved by himself, of all shop drawings required for the work. No shop drawings shall be submitted for the Architect's review until after they have been reviewed and noted for construction methods, dimensioning, and other trade requirements by the contractor and stamped with the contractor's approval seal. Architect's review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for conforming with the plans and specifications unless attention has been called to the deviation at the time of the submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors in the shop drawings. Shop drawings shall not be used as a method of submitting revisions. 2. The Contractor shall allow seven (7) working days for review of all shop drawings. The Architect shall retain two (2) copies and return two (2) to the Contractor. 3. The Architect shall review and approve such shop drawings only for conformance with the design concept of the Project and compliance with the Contract Documents. 4. The Contractor shall make corrections required by the Architect. 5. The Architect's review and/or approval of the shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for errors in the shop drawings. C. Submit complete information on the following items of Work: 1. 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 2. 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 3. 01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 4. 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 5. 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 6. 03 3511 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 7. 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 8. 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS 9. 06 1800 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 10. 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY 11. 06 4100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 12. 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION 13. 07 2501 RAINSCREEN WEATHER BARRIER WITH 2-D DRAINAGE 14. 07 4113 METAL ROOF PANELS Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 6000 - 23 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 15.07 4623 WOOD SIDING 16.07 4646 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 17.07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 18.07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS 19.08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 20.08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 21.08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS 22.08 4313 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 23.08 5659 SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS 24.08 6300 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 25.08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 26.08 8000 GLAZING 27.09 0561 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 28.09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 29.09 3000 TILING 30.09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING 31.09 6813 TILE CARPETING 32.09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 33.09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING 34.09 9300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 35.10 2113.17 PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 36.10 2600 WALL & DOOR PROTECTION 37.10 2800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 38.12 3600 COUNTERTOPS 39.22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING 40.22 3000 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 41.22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 42.23 0000 MECHANICAL DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS 43.26 0000 ELECTRICAL DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS 44.26 0001 ELECTRICAL DESIGN BUILD CRITERIA 45.26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 46.26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 47.27 1005 LOW VOLTAGE CABLING FOR VOICE, DATA, AUDIO & VIDEO 48.31 2323 FILL 49.33 4211 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING D. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. E. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. F. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1.For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents. 2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 6000 - 24 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS A. See Section 01 2500 - Substitution Procedures. B. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to City of Kent. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. E. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. Broderick Architects will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling. H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 6000 - 25 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. H. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 7000 - 26 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition. C. Cutting and patching. D. Surveying for laying out the work. E. Cleaning and protection. F. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures. G. General requirements for maintenance service. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on working on an occupied site; work sequence. B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures. C. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary interior partitions. D. Section 01 5713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control: Additional erosion and sedimentation control requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. C. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, and location and construction of barricades and fences. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures. D. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 3. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 4. Work of City of Kent or separate Contractor. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. For surveying work, employ a land surveyor registered in Washington and acceptable to Broderick Architects. Submit evidence of surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. Employ only individual(s) trained and experienced in collecting and recording accurate data relevant to ongoing construction activities, B. For design of temporary shoring and bracing, employ a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in Washington. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 7000 - 27 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. C. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. D. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. E. After City of Kent occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of City of Kent's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Broderick Architects of any discrepancies discovered. C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 7000 - 28 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS D. Promptly report to Broderick Architects the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Broderick Architects. F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. H. Periodically verify layouts by same means. I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.05 SITE CONDITIONS / ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Contractor to field verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated. 2. Report discrepancies to Broderick Architects before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. 2. Relocate items indicated on drawings. C. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. D. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible. 1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Broderick Architects. E. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish. F. Clean existing systems and equipment. G. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not burn or bury. H. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete. I. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 7000 - 29 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements. C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-complying work. D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.10 FINAL CLEANING A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. B. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, and drainage systems. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 7000 - 30 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS C. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. D. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.11 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1.Provide copies to Broderick Architects and City of Kent. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Broderick Architects when work is considered ready for Broderick Architect’s Substantial Completion inspection. D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Broderick Architects Substantial Completion inspection. E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Broderick Architect’s and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Broderick Architects. F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to City of Kent-occupied areas. G. Notify Broderick Architects when work is considered finally complete and ready for Broderick Architect’s Substantial Completion final inspection. H. Complete items of work determined by Broderick Architects listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. 3.12 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the City of Kent. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 7800 - 31 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS SECTION 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Broderick Architects with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Broderick Architects will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by City of Kent, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Broderick Architects comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with City of Kent's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Addenda. 3. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 4. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by City of Kent. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Record Drawings, Design Build Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Field changes of dimension and detail. 2. Details not on original Contract drawings. F. Design Build Drawings: Provide compact disc with dwg files and supporting information. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 01 7800 - 32 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for City of Kent's personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections. B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system. C. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. D. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. E. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. G. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Broderick Architects, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties. H. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified. I. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment. J. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. K. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 3.04 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with City of Kent's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 02 4100 - 33 DEMOLITION SECTION 02 4100 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of site elements for alterations purposes, including but not limited to the following: 1. Demolition and removal of designated wood framed partitions, windows and doors 2. Demolition and removal of designated concrete slab from the affected project area. 3. Demolition and removal of designated asphalt from the affected project area. 4. Demolition and removal of designated wood framed partitions, windows and doors associated with. 5. Removal of interior flooring materials from the affected project area. 6. Demolition and removal of lighting, electrical circuits and devices from the affected project area. 7. Demolition and removal of existing HVAC ductwork and equipment required to make provisions for the new scope of work. B. Materials to be Salvaged and Reused: 1. Salvage and reuse the following: a. Existing exterior benches. b. Relocate ball dispensing equipment. 2. Return to the Owner any of the following items (which in the opinion of the Owner of salvageable condition): a. none C. Owner Provide Demolition Items: 1. none D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Contractor to clearly understand the project area and the interface with Phase I and Phase II. E. Schedule: Submit schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Owner's and Tenant's Representative for review prior to start of work. 1. Work of all trades associated with selective demolition shall be performed during normal work hours, between 7:00 AM and 7:00 PM. 2. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work. 3. Examine existing conditions prior to demolition. Notify Architect immediately if any variations from the Contract Documents are encountered. F. Occupancy: All adjacent areas of the site / building will remain in use. G. Condition of Site / Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or elements to be demolished. H. Salvaged Materials: Items of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from site as work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from site as they are removed. 1. Storage or sale of removed items will not be permitted on site. I. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work. 1. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and building tenants as they interface with demolition work. J. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work at no cost to Owner. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 02 4100 - 34 DEMOLITION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXECUTION: A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with the Construction Documents to determine the extent of demolition required. B. Insofar as is practical, arrange operations to reveal unknown or concealed structural conditions for examination and verification before removal or demolition. C. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied. D. If unanticipated utilities, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of conflict. Submit report to Owner's representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without delay. E. Disposal of Demolished Materials: Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building site. Transport and legally dispose off site. 1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. F. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. G. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Contractor to field verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated. 2. Report discrepancies to Broderick Architects before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. H. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied. 1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction . 2. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. a. Remove items indicated on drawings. 3. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. a. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. b. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. c. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. d. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 03 3000 - 35 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Concrete footings. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Concrete reinforcement. E. Joint devices associated with concrete work. F. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Densifiers, hardeners, applied coatings, and polishing. B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs. C. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016. C. ACI 302.1R - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2015. D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). E. ACI 308R - Guide to External Curing of Concrete; 2016. F. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata 2018). G. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2018. H. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2018a. I. ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 2012. J. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016, with Editorial Revision (2016). K. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2018. L. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2015. M. ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2015. N. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2015. O. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011 (Reapproved 2017). P. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2017. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 03 3000 - 36 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Q. COE CRD-C 572 - Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; 1974. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design. 1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - Concrete Mixtures. 2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 - Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing. C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. D. Samples: Submit two, 12 inch long samples of waterstops and construction joint devices. E. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. F. Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified. G. Test Reports: Submit termite-resistant sheet manufacturer's summary of independent laboratory and field testing for effectiveness in subterranean termite exclusion. H. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. 3. #4 Slab dowels shall be Grade 40 B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR): Galvanized, plain type, ASTM A1064/A1064M. 1. WWR Style: 4 x 8-W6 x W10. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N. E. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1. F. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 03 3000 - 37 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Sheet material complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643. 2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations. 3. Manufacturers: a. W. R. Meadows, Inc; PERMINATOR Class A - 10 mils (0.25 mm): www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.05 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Epoxy Bonding System: 1. Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application: two component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suite requirements, and as follows: a. Types I & II, non-load bearing, for general bonding of freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete in accordance with Structural General Notes. b. See General Structural Notes for epoxy adhesives to be used for grouting of dowels, anchor rods, etc. where specified / permitted. B. Waterstops: PVC, complying with COE CRD-C 572. 1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings. C. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal. 2.06 REPAIR MATERIAL A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 03 3000 - 38 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 25 percent. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 2. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Slag Cement, and Silica Fume: 50 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 4. At post-tensioned slabs limit total combination of non-portland cement cementitious materials to 20 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. E. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixtures as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As specified per General Structural Notes, unless otherwise noted. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: As specified per General Structural Notes. 3. Air Content for Exterior Surfaces Exposed to Standing Water: In accordance with ACI 318 Table 4.4.1. F. Alkalinity: Concrete supplier and installer are responsible for providing a slab that meets the criteria below, including remediation if necessary. 1. Slab shall have measured pH ranging between 9 and 10 or as required by flooring manufacturer, whichever is more stringent. 2. Tests shall be performed as specified in “Field Quality Control”. 2.08 MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project-Site Mixing: Not permitted without prior approval from Architect. C. Adding Water: If concrete arrives on-site with slump less than suitable for placement, do not add water that exceeds the maximum water-cement ratio or exceeds the maximum permissible slump. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 03 3000 - 39 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. C. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, and embedded parts will not be disturbed during concrete placement. D. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. 3.05 SLAB JOINTING A. Locate joints as indicated on drawings. B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. 3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 4000, will inspect finished slabs for compliance with specified tolerances. B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 3. Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. C. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified. D. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thin floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile. 2. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 03 3000 - 40 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.08 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to flooring manufacturer's satisfaction. 2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. 3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure compliance with specified requirements. E. Slab Testing: Cooperate with manufacturer of specified moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA) to allow access for sampling and testing concrete for compliance with warranty requirements. 3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Broderick Architects and Contractor within 24 hours of test. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 03 3511 - 41 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES SECTION 03 3511 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating, troweling, and similar operations; curing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information on compatibility of different products and limitations. C. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance and renewal of applied finishes. 1.04 MOCK-UP A. For coatings, construct mock-up area under conditions similar to those that will exist during application, with coatings applied. B. Mock-Up Size: 10 feet square. C. Locate where directed. D. Mock-up may remain as part of the work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DENSIFIERS AND HARDENERS A. Liquid Densifier/Hardener: Penetrating chemical compound that reacts with concrete, filling the pores and dustproofing; for application to concrete after set. 1. Composition: Lithium silicate. 2. Products: a. L.M. Scofield Company; SCOFIELD Formula One Lithium Densifier MP: www.scofield.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COATINGS A. CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH APPLICATIONS 1. Unless otherwise indicated, all concrete floors are to be finished using liquid densifier/hardener. 2. Liquid Densifier/Hardener: a. Use at following locations: New and Driving Range slabs 3. Penetrating Clear Sealer: a. Use at following locations: Storage Rooms and Ball Machine Room and concrete floor surfaces not scheduled to receive additional finishes.. B. High Gloss Clear Coating: Transparent, non-yellowing, water- or solvent-based coating. 1. Composition: Acrylic polymer-based. 2. Products: a. PROSOCO, Inc; LSGuard: www.prosoco.com/consolideck/#sle. b. W. R. Meadows, Inc; Deck-O-Grip W/B (slip-resistant): www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 03 3511 - 42 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section. B. Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials suitable for further finishes. 3.02 GENERAL A. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation for Existing Concrete: 1. Concrete surfaces should be completely penetrable before applying the initial application of sealer. The surface of the concrete should be lightly mechanically abraded to remove weak cement paste and contaminants. The final surface preparation should approximate a Concrete Surface Profile of 1, (CSP1 as designated by the International Concrete Repair Institute, Alexandria, Virginia). Methods for mechanical abrasion include: a. Mechanically clean adhesive off of slab. b. Grind with a rotary floor machine to 800 grit. c. Light sanding of the surface. d. Surfaces should be tested to receive stain by spotting with water. Water should immediately darken the substrate and be readily absorbed. If water beads and does not penetrate or only penetrates in some areas, perform additional surface preparation and testing. On denser concrete floors, sand lightly to open up surfaces. Retest and continue surface preparation until water spots immediately darken and uniformly penetrate concrete surfaces. 2. Rinse concrete substrates until rinse water is completely clean. 3.04 SEALING APPLICATION A. Concrete substrate must be completely dry. Test surface for proper pH prior to applying sealer. A pH value of 7 or higher indicates all acid has been neutralized. If the tested pH value is less than 7, repeat neutralization step until the required pH value is achieved. B. Conduct a moisture vapor emission test prior to applying any sealer. Refer to the specific sealer’s Technical-Data Bulletin for acceptable MVER. C. Apply sealer according the sealer manufacturer’s printed instructions at a rate of 300 to 500 square feet per gallon per coat. Maintain a wet edge at all times. D. Allow sealer to completely dry before applying additional coats. E. Apply second coat of sealer at 90 degrees to the direction of the first coat using the same application method and rates. F. Seal horizontal joints in areas subject to pedestrian or vehicular traffic. 3.05 PROTECTION A. The General Contractor is responsible for using Temporary Floor Protection throughout the project to safeguard the surface quality of concrete slabs before and after application of decorative finishes or installations of other materials. B. All concrete floors that will be not be covered by other materials will be protected throughout the project. The concrete slab must be treated as a finished floor at all times during construction. C. Temporary Floor Protection will be removed only while finish work to the concrete is being performed and will be replaced after the final finish has cured sufficiently. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain chemically stained and sealed floors by sweeping. Clean spills when they occur and rinse dirt off with water. Wet-clean heavily soiled areas by mopping or by scrubbing with a rotary floor machine equipped with a scrubbing brush and a suitable, high quality commercial Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 03 3511 - 43 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES detergent. Maintain interior floors that require polishing by using a compatible, premium-grade, emulsion-type, commercial floor polish, according to manufacturer’s printed instructions and safety requirements. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 05 1200 - 44 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grouting under base plates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. B. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; 2017. B. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012. C. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; 1982, with Editorial Revision (2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Connections not detailed. 3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test analysis. D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC (MAN) "Steel Construction Manual." B. Installer Qualifications: Installer of structural steel shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in structural steel installation, including involvement in not less than three (3) projects of similar, or greater, size and complexity. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code- -Steel." In addition, all welders performing shop or field-welding of structural steel members shall be WABO certified, or equivalent, as accepted by the Structural Engineer and Building Official. D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303 "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC 360 "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings." 3. AISC 341 “Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings.” 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Existing Conditions Verification: Detailed field measurements of as-built existing conditions are required to be performed by the contractor prior to fabrication of steel. Any existing dimensions or member information shown on the Architectural or Structural Drawings are approximate and not based on any detailed field measurements and must be field verified. The contractor is responsible for any costs related to corrective work resulting from inaccurate field measurements or existing conditions verification. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 05 1200 - 45 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1.06 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. B. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, Angles, Bars, and Rods: As specified in General Structural Notes. B. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements and General Structural Notes. 2.02 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325N, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex, Grade C, carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon- steel washers (ASTM F 959, Type 325 compressible washers if direct-tension indicators are used). 1. Finish at interior locations: Plain, uncoated. 2. Finish at exterior locations: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153 B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolts: Shall be approved self load indicating types (Bethlehem Indicator Bolts, LeJeune Tension Control Bolts, etc.) and shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. See General Structural Notes for required preparation of faying surfaces at slip-critical connections. C. Anchor Rods or Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, unless otherwise noted. ASTM F 1554 Grade 55 (weldable) or Grade 105 shall be used where specifically indicated on drawings. 1. Configuration: Hooked, except use straight rods where specified on drawings with double nuts at embedded ends. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex, Grade A, carbon steel nuts for Grade 36 rods up to 1-1/2 inches in diameter, unless otherwise noted. In accordance with ASTM F 1554 recommendations for other rod sizes and grades, unless otherwise noted. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel, minimum size in accordance with Table 14-2 of AISC Steel Construction Manual (14h Edition), unless otherwise noted. 4. Finish at interior locations: Plain, uncoated. 5. Finish at exterior locations: Hot-dip zinc coating D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A, unless otherwise noted. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex, Grade A, carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened or ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish at interior locations: Plain, uncoated. 4. Finish at exterior locations: Hot-dip zinc coating E. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. F. Threaded Studs (Denoted as “CPL's or CFL’s” on Drawings): ASTM A 108, type CPL or CFL Threaded Studs by Nelson Stud Welding Division, TRW Assemblies and Fasteners Group, or equivalent. G. Deformed Bar Anchors (Denoted as “D2L's” on Drawings): ASTM A 496, type D2L Deformed Bar Anchors by Nelson Stud Welding Division, TRW Assemblies and Fasteners Group, or equivalent. H. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A 108, Grade 1035, cold-finished carbon steel. I. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 05 1200 - 46 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING J. Couplers: ASTM A 194 or ASTM A 563, size and grade as required to develop full tensile strength of connected materials. Couplers shall only be used at locations where specified on drawings or where approved by the Structural Engineer. 2.03 PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. 2.04 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Minimum compressive strength shall be 6,000 psi. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design or Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings." 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop- priming operations. B. AESS: Comply with the following fabrication requirements of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel identified as AESS. 1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, permanently exposed piece identification marks, and roughness. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and shop priming. 2. Minimize distortion of rolled members. C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. D. Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not thermally cut holes or enlarge holes by burning without prior approval from Structural Engineer. 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members as indicated on drawings. 2. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 3. At pieces connected by threaded studs (CPL's), install ¼”x2”x2” plate washers with oversized holes (holes shall be greater than diameter of weld flash at base of studs) between connected plies at each stud, unless hole sizes in members are specified to be oversized. E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC- SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." G. Shear Connectors, Threaded Studs, and Deformed Bar Anchors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of connectors, studs, or anchors. Use automatic end welding according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions to develop full capacities of connectors, studs, or anchors. 2.06 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 05 1200 - 47 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth where indicated or where connections will be exposed to view. 3. AESS: Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for AESS will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Minimize weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind exposed butt welds flush. b. Dress exposed welds. Do not grind fillet welds without prior approval from the Structural Engineer. c. Fill weld access holes at full penetration welds. 2.07 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Members not exposed to view in their entirety upon completion of the project. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 and the Statement of Special Inspections in the General Structural Notes. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. 2. At the Owner’s discretion, structural steel inspections may be waived if approved by the Building Official for work performed on the premises of a fabricator registered and approved to perform such work without special inspection in accordance with IBC Section 1704.2. B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 05 1200 - 48 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. At the Owner’s option, the cost of additional testing performed to determine compliance of corrected work may be at the Contractor’s expense. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. 1. Complete as-built verification prior to fabrication to the greatest extent possible to allow minor corrections, where approved by the Architect and Structural Engineer, to be made prior to field installation. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Erection stability procedures shall comply with OSHA Regulation 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart R - Steel Erection, published January 18, 2001. Miscellaneous plates for guying cable attachments, temporary joist bracing, etc. shall be added as required. Contractor shall evaluate columns and provide adequate base plate shims, guys, or temporary bracing as required per OSHA section 1926.755. 2. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction, if required, until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.03 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". Remove exposed piece identification marks on AESS. B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. Do not use wood wedges or wood shims. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed and base or bearing plates solidly grouted. C. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Level and plumb individual members of structure. D. Splice members only where indicated. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 05 1200 - 49 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING E. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect and Structural Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1. F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.04 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for types of bolts and joints specified on the Drawings. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” and “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design or Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings” for adequacy of temporary connections, and alignment. 2. Remove paint or galvanizing completely at surfaces to be field welded prior to welding. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 4. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth where indicated or where connections will be exposed to view. 5. AESS: Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for AESS will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Minimize weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind exposed butt welds flush. b. Dress exposed welds. Fill exposed welds to a smooth profile where directed by the Architect. Do not grind fillet welds without prior approval from the Structural Engineer. c. At exposed connections; where erection bolts are not specified on the Drawings they shall be removed. Fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth. d. Remove all other field welding erection aids at exposed connections. e. Fill weld access holes at full penetration welds. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds, high-strength bolted connections, and erection procedures and prepare test reports in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 and the Statement of Special Inspections in the General Structural Notes. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel work is being erected to perform tests and inspections. B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections shall be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, field-welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 05 1200 - 50 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. At the Owner’s option, the cost of additional testing performed to determine compliance of corrected work may be at the Contractor’s expense. 3.06 COATING REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded or damaged surfaces of galvanized items and apply galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted members and accessories. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. 3.07 FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 3. B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. 3.08 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC 303. B. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 05 5000 - 51 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Structural steel column anchor bolts. C. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. B. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2018. C. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. D. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2014, with Editorial Revision (2017). E. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012. F. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International Accreditation Service, Inc; 2011. G. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004). H. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. D. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Bollard Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, Grade A, plain. D. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 05 5000 - 52 METAL FABRICATIONS B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Bollards: 4" Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; galvanized finish. B. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; prime paint finish. C. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings and Wall Openings: Channel sections; prime paint finish. 2.04 FINISHES - STEEL A. Prime paint steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete. B. Prime Painting: One coat. C. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. D. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 05 7313 - 53 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS SECTION 05 7313 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-engineered, component-based, glass infill panel aluminum railing system. 1.02 REFERENCE A. American Architectural and Manufacturers Association 1. AAMA 2604-05 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings and Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 2. AAMA 603.8-92 Pigmented Organic Coating on Extruded Aluminum B. American Standards and Test Methods 1. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 2. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes 3. ASTM F1135 - Standard Specification for Cadmium or Zinc Chromate Organic Corrosion Protective Coating for Fasteners C. Quality Testing, Inc. 1. QTI-M2007-112 Deck Post to Base Mount Summary Report 9005 Railing Post 2. QTI-M2008-350 Deck Post to Base Mount Summary Report 9060 Railing Post 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. International Building Code 1. Handrail and guard assemblies and attachments shall withstand a minimum concentrated load of 200 pounds applied horizontally or vertically down at any point on the top rail. Infill area of guard rail system shall be capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 pounds applied to one square foot at any point in the system. Load not to act concurrently with loads on top rail of system in determining stress on guardrail. Handrail assemblies and guards shall be designed to resist a load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied in any direction at the top and to transfer this load through the supports to the structure. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit full scale shop drawings indicating methods of construction, location and spacing of anchorage, joinery, finishes, size, shape and thickness of framing members, relationship to adjoining work and glazing materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Drawings and specifications are based on products manufactured by: 1. CrystaLite, Inc. / Deck Mount 2.5" post - 9006 glass infill aluminum railing system 2. www.crystaliteinc.com B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum extruded components shall be alloy 6063-T6, of sufficient thickness for this application, and as required per structural calculations; ASTM B 221. B. Aluminum sheet and plate shall be alloy 5052-H32 per ASTM B 209. C. All welding shall be by the TIG process. All exposed welds to be finished to match frame color where practical. D. Glass infill panels shall be a minimum nominal thickness of ¼” safety glass. E. Glazing pockets shall be rigid PVC with soft PVC glazing ribs co-extruded into pockets. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 05 7313 - 54 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 2.03 FINISHES A. All standard colors are applied with high-solids polyester resin coating. Thickness of coating shall be 1.0 mil nominal +/- 0.2 mil to meet AAMA 603.8-92 standard. 2.04 FASTENERS A. Fasteners shall be cadmium-plated steel per ASTM F 1135 or stainless steel. B. Base plate fasteners into the mounting surface shall be determined per site specific criteria. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Railing system(s) shall be shop or field fabricated to match field conditions of job. All joints shall be tight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Railings system(s) shall be installed and glazed by experienced workman in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, shop drawings and glazing standards. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Subsequent to installation of railing system(s) the General Contractor shall be responsible for the cleaning and protection of all materials provided per this section, including, but not limited to glazing materials and framing members. No abrasive materials of any kind shall be used in cleaning of guardrail surfaces. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 06 1000 - 55 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural dimension lumber framing. B. Non-structural dimension lumber framing. C. Rough opening framing for doors and windows. D. Sheathing. E. Roof-mounted curbs. F. Roofing nailers. G. Roofing cant strips. H. Preservative treated wood materials. I. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. J. Wall sheathing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Prefabricated beams and columns for support of wood framing. B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for wood framing. C. Section 06 1800 - Glued-Laminated Construction. D. Section 07 2501 - Rain Screen: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing. E. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. B. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012. C. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2010. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 06 1000 - 56 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ): 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch. 2. Grade: No. 2 or better D. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 by 6 through 4 by 16 ): 1. Species and Grades: As indicated on the Structural General Notes for various locations. E. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 EXPOSED DIMENSION LUMBER A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings. B. Surfacing: S4S. C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. D. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 by 6 through 4 by 16 ): 1. Species: Douglas Fir. 2. Grade: Select. 2.04 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER A. At Contractor's option, structural composite lumber may be substituted for concealed dimension lumber and timbers. B. Structural Composite Lumber: Factory fabricated beams, headers, and columns, of sizes and types indicated on drawings; structural capacity as published by manufacturer. 2.05 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Roof and Wall Sheathing: Wood construction panel laminated. 1. Construction Panel: 1/2" nominal APA Rated Sheathing 24/0, Exposure 1, sized for spacing. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. B. Sill Gasket on Top of Concrete Slab: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from continuous rolls. 2.07 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber exposed to weather. c. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. d. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 06 1000 - 57 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on concrete slabs; puncture gasket cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts. B. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AWC (WFCM) Wood Frame Construction Manual. E. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed. F. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs. 3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. 3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered and over firm bearing. 1. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails or screws. 3.07 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 06 1500 - 58 WOOD DECKING SECTION 06 1500 WOOD DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Softwood lumber structural wood decking. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Bearing support. B. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field finishing. C. Section 09 9300 - Staining and Transparent Finishing: Field finishing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AITC 112 - Standard for Tongue-and-Groove Heavy Timber Roof Decking; 1993, with Errata (2003). B. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; 2014. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Lumber Decking: Fabricated to AITC 112. 1. Species: Doug Fir, graded under SPIB (GR) rules as AITC Select quality. 2. Size: 2 by 6 inches, nominal. 3. Pattern: AITC standard beveled V-joint with single tongue and groove. 4. Moisture Content: 19 percent, maximum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support framing is ready to receive decking. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 INSTALLATION - BOARD DECKING A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered over firm bearing. On sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward. B. Engage decking tongue and groove edges. C. Secure with fasteners. Side spike planks together, through pre-drilled holes. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 06 1800 - 59 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION SECTION 06 1800 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glue laminated wood beams. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field finishing. B. Section 09 9300 - Staining and Transparent Finishing: Field finishing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing, framed openings. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect members to AITC requirements for individually wrapped. B. Leave individual wrapping in place until finishing occurs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glued-Laminated Structural Units: 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 GLUED-LAMINATED UNITS A. Glued-Laminated Units: Fabricate in accordance with AITC 117 Architectural grade. 1. Refer to the Structural General Notes for design values. 2. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication. 3. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit. 4. Fabricate member with camber built in. 5. Do not splice or join members in locations other than those indicated without permission. 6. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC requirements. 2.03 WOOD TREATMENT A. Factory-Treated Lumber: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for pressure impregnated wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with AITC Architectural grade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that supports are ready to receive units. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 06 2000 - 60 FINISH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Wood casings and moldings. C. Bench Seating. D. Hardware and attachment accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work. C. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors. D. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Painting of finish carpentry items. E. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Painting of finish carpentry items. F. Section 09 9300 - Staining and Transparent Finishing: Staining and transparent finishing of finish carpentry items. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. B. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2010. C. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; 2009. D. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. 1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS: A. Field Measurements: Verify casework dimensions by field measurements. Verify countertops and casework can be installed in compliance with the original design and referenced standards. Verify countertop size and shape prior to fabrication or field adjustment by field measurements taken after steel frame elements have been erected. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Submittals: In addition to product data for each casework and for each hardware type indicated, submit the following: 1. Shop drawings for built-in benches showing locations and sizes, accessories, materials, finishes, and anchorage details to walls. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated for Premium grade. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as required by applicable code. C. Exterior Woodwork Items: 1. Window Casings and Moldings: Hardi-Trim; prepare for paint finish. 2. Bench Seats: Cedar slatts for stained finish with "PT" preservative treated trim as detailed. D. Interior Woodwork Items: Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 06 2000 - 61 FINISH CARPENTRY 1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Clear birch; prepare for paint finish. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. Fit exposed sheet material edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for full length only. C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation for a minimum of 24 hours. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. D. Install finish carpentry work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Scribe and cut finish carpentry items to fit adjoining work. Anchor finish carpentry work securely to supports and substrates, using concealed fasteners and blind nailing where possible. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing except as indicated, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim and rails. Cope at returns and, miter at corners. F. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces, using concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face. G. Install casework without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. H. Fasten plastic laminate countertops and cabinets by securing to solid blocking located in wall framing and to side/front edge support, and to metal guardrail system as detailed in the drawings screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of countertop. Spline and glue joints in countertops and provide concealed mechanical clamping of joint. I. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 06 4100 - 62 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK SECTION 06 4100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Hardware. C. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 12 3600 - Countertops. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2016). B. AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program; current edition at www.awiqcp.org. C. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1; 2016, with Errata (2017). D. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2010. E. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish. E. Sample: Solid surface and laminate material samples 4" x 2". 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. B. Quality Certification: 1. Comply with AWI (QCP) woodwork association quality certification service/program in accordance with requirements for work specified in this section: www.awiqcp.org/#sle. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise. B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade. C. Plastic laminate faced, Custom grade. D. Cabinets at POS Transaction and Service Bar Cabinets: Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 06 4100 - 63 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Decorative laminate. 2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Decorative laminate. 3. Door and Drawer Front Edge Profiles: Square edge with thin applied band. 4. Cabinet Design: As indicated on drawings. 5. Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 lbs. per sq. ft. 6. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay. 7. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style. 2.02 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Colors: 1. Bar Casework: Formica Weathered Ash / #8842 2. Transaction Counter Casework: Formica Prestige Walnut / #6209 2.03 COUNTERTOPS A. Countertops are specified in Section 12 3600. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness. 1. Color: As selected by Broderick Architects from manufacturer's standard range. B. Grommets: Standard plastic or rubber grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface. 2.05 HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified. B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. C. Fixed Countertop Brackets: 1. Material: Steel. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied powder coat. 3. Color: Black. D. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers. E. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with satin finish. F. Drawer Slides: 1. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade. 2. Mounting: Side mounted. 3. Stops: Integral type. 4. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type. G. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with polished finish. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 06 4100 - 64 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. E. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at 16 inches on center. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 2100 - 65 THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation and integral vapor retarder at cavity wall construction, perimeter foundation wall, and underside of floor slabs. B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction. C. Board and Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation. B. Section 07 2501 Rainscreen Weather Barrier C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2018. B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2017. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. D. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2016a. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board. B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board. C. Insulation Inside Face of Door and Window Headers: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board. D. Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. E. Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. 2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578 with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces. 1. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Type and Thermal Resistance, R-value: Type IV, 5.0 (0.88) per 1 inch thickness at 75 degrees F mean temperature. a. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 10 at Perimeter Walls and Under Slabs. 4. Board Edges: Square. B. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Cavity Wall Insulation Board: Complies with ASTM C578, and manufactured using carbon black technology. 1. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 2100 - 66 THERMAL INSULATION 3. Type and Thermal Resistance, R-value: Type IV, 5.0 (0.88), minimum, per 1 inch thickness at 75 degrees F mean temperature. 4. Board Size: 15-3/4 inch by 96 inch. 5. Board Thickness: 1-3/4 inch. 6. Board Edges: Square. 2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used, at Contractor's option. B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit. 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any. 3. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 21 at Walls and 49 at Ceilings. 4. Facing: Asphalt treated mesh reinforced Kraft paper, one side. C. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Thermal Resistance: R-value of [21 at Walls and 49 at Ceilings]. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Clear polyethylene film for above grade application, 10 mil, 0.010 inch thick. B. Tape joints of rigid insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions. C. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS A. Adhere a 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over expansion joints with double beads of adhesive each side of joint. B. Install boards horizontally on walls. C. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS A. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties. B. Install boards horizontally on walls. C. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 2100 - 67 THERMAL INSULATION B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing slab. 3.06 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. E. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. F. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. G. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 2501 - 68 RAINSCREEN WEATHER BARRIER WITH 2-D DRAINAGE SECTION 07 2501 RAINSCREEN WEATHER BARRIER WITH 2-D DRAINAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Above-grade wall weather-resistive barrier. B. Above-Grade Water-Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing or other substrate; not air-tight or vapor retardant. C. Vapor Retarders: Materials to make exterior walls water vapor-resistant and air-tight. D. Air Barriers: Materials to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints between exterior walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood-type exterior above-grade wall sheathing. B. Section 07 4646 - Fiber Cement Siding: Exterior Panels 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 882 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. B. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. C. ASTM E 2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials. D. ASTM E 2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Provide 1 1/2: scale drawings showing the relationship of membrane to: 1. Framing or blocking members 2. Thermal Insulation 3. Sheathing 4. All exterior cladding and corner conditions 5. Door and window frames 6. Sill pans 7. Through-wall Metal Flashings 8. Bench penetrations 9. Rain Screen Battens / Cavity Design D. Samples: 12 by 12 inch piece of each type of sheet; minimum 12 inch long piece of each type of strip; each type of fastener. E. Installer Qualifications: Include minimum of 5 project references. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this type and approved by the membrane manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site in original packaging with labels intact. B. Store products in manner acceptable to membrane manufacturer. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 2501 - 69 RAINSCREEN WEATHER BARRIER WITH 2-D DRAINAGE C. Provide temporary cover for products while stored on site before installation, protected from direct sunlight and UV exposure. D. When products must be stored for extended periods, store at temperatures above minus 24 degrees F. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of specified water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier materials. B. Where directed by architect , construct typical exterior wall panel, 6 foot long by 6 foot wide incorporating the sheathing board or substrate, sill pan protection system, window frame and attachment method, clips, strapping or masonry ties, attachment of insulation and detailing of water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier membrane application and lap seams. 1. Perform water spray test of mockup to demonstrate performance. C. Allow 48 hours for inspection of mock-up by Owner, architect and consultant before proceeding with water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier work. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. All Products of This Section: 1. VaproShield: www.VaproShield.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Walls Above-Grade: Install weather-resistive barrier on all above grade exterior walls, to be covered with finish indicated on drawings by others. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Primary self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier membrane components and accessories must be obtained as a single-source to ensure total system compatibility and integrity. 1. Self-Adhered water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier membrane by VaproShield LLC., Gig Harbor, WA, Ph (866) 731-7663, Email: info@VaproShield.com <mailto:info@VaproShield.com>, Website: www.vaproshield.com <http://www.vaproshield.com>. B. WATER-RESISTIVE VAPOR PERMEABLE AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (Basis of Design) 1. Primary self-adhered air barrier sheet membrane shall be WrapShield SA® Self-Adhered Water-Resistive Vapor Permeable Air Barrier Sheet by VaproShield, a zero VOC self- adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheet membrane consisting of multiple layers of UV stabilized spun-bonded polypropylene having the following properties: a. Color: Orange with allowable UV exposure for 180 days b. Air Leakage: <0.01 cfm/ft. sq. when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2357 and < 0.0000263 cfm/sq. ft. @ 75 Pa (0.000134 L/s/m sq @ 75 Pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178 c. Water Vapor Permeance tested to ASTM E 96 Method B: 50 perms (2875ng/Pa.s.m2) d. Water Resistance tested to AATCC 127, 550 mm hydrostatic head for 5 hours: No leakage e. Tensile Strength tested to ASTM D 882: 44.8 lbf/inch (78 N/mm), machine direction; 25 lbf/inch (43.8 N/mm), cross-machine direction f. Application Temperature: Ambient temperature must be above 20 degrees F g. Surface Burning Characteristics tested to ASTM E 84: Class A, Flame-spread index of less than 10, Smoke-development index of less than 15 h. Physical Dimensions: 0.026 inches (0.65 mm) thick and 59 inches (1.5 m) wide and 8.26 oz per sq. yd. C. WATER-RESISTIVE VAPOR PERMEABLE TRANSITION AND FLASHING MEMBRANE Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 2501 - 70 RAINSCREEN WEATHER BARRIER WITH 2-D DRAINAGE 1. Self-adhered air barrier transition and flashing membrane shall be VaproFlashing SA™ by VaproShield, a zero VOC self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable membrane having the following properties: a. VaproFlashing SA™ Orange: 11-3/4 inches or 19 2/3 inches wide x 164 feet long b. Air Leakage: < 0.0000263 cfm/sq. ft. @ 75 Pa (0.000134 L/s/m sq @ 75 Pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178 c. Water Vapor Permeance tested to ASTM E 96 Method B: 50 perms (2875ng/Pa.s.m2) d. Water Resistance tested to AATCC 127, 550 mm hydrostatic head for 5 hours: No leakage D. VAPROLIQUI-FLASH™ VAPOR PERMEABLE WATER RESISTIVE FLASHING FOR ROUGH OPENINGS 1. Window and door flashing shall be VaproLiqui-Flash by VaproShield, a liquid-applied vapor permeable air barrier flashing material with vapor permeance and resistance to air leakage properties compatible with the primary air barrier membrane. E. Flashing: 1. Membrane Flashing: Vapro Flashing 2. Vapro Sill Savor Pan / Corners / Spacers 3. Vapro Batten / Fiber Cement furring strips. F. Metal Siding Rainscreen Mat: 1. 3mil Vapromat Drainage Matrix G. Insect Barrier for Open Edges at Ventilation Gaps: Cor-a-Vent fiberglass strip vent, as required for the application detailed on the drawings, continuous across opening H. Accessories: Products specified by sheet manufacturer and of type and size appropriate to particular purpose. I. Fasteners: Large head roofing nails. J. Tape: Type as recommended by sheet manufacturer. K. Vapor Retarder Sheet : ASTM D 4397 polyethylene film , clear. 1. Thickness: 10 mil. L. Vapor Retarder Tape: Bright aluminum self adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inches wide, compatible with sheet material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section. Notify [engineer] [architect] [consultant] in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the Work or any parts thereof shall mean acceptance of the prepared substrates. B. All surfaces must be dry, sound, clean and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants detrimental to the adhesion of the water resistive air barrier membrane and flashings. Fill voids and gaps in substrate greater than ¼ inch in width to provide an even surface. Strike masonry joints full-flush. C. Minimum application temperature self-adhered membrane and flashings to be above 20 degrees F (minus 6.0 degrees C). D. Ensure all preparatory Work is complete prior to applying primary self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheet membrane. E. Mechanical fasteners used to secure sheathing boards or penetrate sheathing boards shall be set flush with sheathing and fastened into solid backing. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 2501 - 71 RAINSCREEN WEATHER BARRIER WITH 2-D DRAINAGE 3.02 COORDINATION OF SELF-ADHERED VAPOR PERMEABLE AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheets may be installed vertically or horizontally over the outside face of exterior sheathing board or substrate. B. Complete detail Work around corners, wall openings, building transitions and penetrations prior to field applications. C. Install self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheet over the outside face of exterior sheathing board or substrate, measure and pre-cut into manageable sized sheets to suit the application conditions. D. Install self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheet complete and continuous to substrate in a sequential overlapping weatherboard method starting at bottom or base of wall and working up. E. Stagger all end lap seams. F. Roll installed membrane with roller to ensure positive contact and adhesion with substrate. 3.03 BUILDING TRANSITION CONDITIONS A. Tie-in to structural beams, columns, floor slabs and intermittent floors, parapet curbs, foundation walls, roofing systems and at the interface of dissimilar materials with self-adhering air barrier transition and flashing membrane. B. Align and position self-adhered air barrier transition and flashing membrane, remove protective film and press firmly into place. Provide minimum 3 inch lap on to substrates. C. Ensure minimum 3 inch overlap at side and end laps of membrane. D. Roll membrane and lap seams with roller to ensure positive contact and adhesion. 3.04 WINDOW, DOOR AND OTHER WALL OPENINGS A. To avoid waste, predetermine best method and sequence to the install self-adhered air barrier transition and flashing membrane around window or wall openings subject to the opening size and installation of window, door or louver type. B. Wrap self-adhered air barrier transition and flashing membrane into wall openings to cover sill, jambs and head. It is not required to install continuous sheets through corners. C. Remove release film, align flashing membrane and apply pressure to ensure positive contact. Roll Lap seams to ensure adhesion. Provide lap seams to shed water. D. Install preformed self-adhered corner flashing membrane into corners over flashing membrane. E. Subject to window installation requirements, install preformed sill pan system and seal to installed self-adhered air barrier window flashing membrane with sealant. F. Install windows in accordance with window manufacturer’s details and cover nail flange with flashing tape. Install flashing tape along jamb and across head flanges of window and seal to installed self-adhered air barrier transition membrane. Roll tape to ensure positive contact to substrate. Seal exposed leading edge of tape. G. For windows without nail flange, install specified aluminized tape around perimeter of opening to accommodate placement of backer rod and sealant between window frame and self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier membrane. 3.05 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PENETRATIONS A. Mechanical pipe, electrical conduit and/or duct work must be secured solid into position prior to installation of self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier membrane. B. Electrical services penetrating the wall assembly and self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier membrane must be placed in appropriate conduit and secured solid into position. C. Install manufactured flanged penetration sleeves as recommended by sleeve manufacturer. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 2501 - 72 RAINSCREEN WEATHER BARRIER WITH 2-D DRAINAGE D. For straight sided penetrations, cut and fit self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier to accommodate sleeve, install specified single sided flashing tape to seal the air barrier membrane to ductwork or preformed flange sleeve. E. For pipe penetrations, refer to manufacturer’s standard details. 3.06 VERTICAL APPLICATIONS A. For vertical applications, align sheets with an ‘inside’ or ‘outside’ corner to avoid wrinkles and miss-alignment of subsequent applications. B. Measure and pre-cut into manageable sized self-adhered sheets to suit the application conditions. C. Hang self-adhered sheets over wall and extend down to lowest point of wall. Allow for excess material at bottom of wall to accommodate tie-ins and connections to adjacent surfaces. D. Align and position self-adhered membrane, remove release film and press firmly into place. Provide minimum 3 inch overlap at side and end laps of membrane. Roll membrane and lap seams with roller to ensure contact and adhesion. E. Continue to remove release film and apply pressure to ensure positive contact onto wall substrate. F. Install subsequent sheets of self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheets in overlapping weatherboard format. Ensure sheets lay smooth and flat to surfaces. Roll membrane and lap seams with roller to ensure contact and adhesion. 3.07 HORIZONTAL APPLICATIONS A. For horizontal applications, align sheets and begin installation of water-resistive weather barrier at bottom or lowest point of wall. B. To avoid wrinkles and miss-alignment of subsequent applications it is recommended to pre- mark or "Snap" a level line to work from. Measure and pre-cut into manageable sized sheets to suit the application conditions. C. Allow for excess material at bottom of wall to accommodate tie-ins and connections to adjacent surfaces. D. Align and position self-adhered membrane, remove release film and press firmly into place. Provide minimum 3 inch overlap at all side and end laps of membrane. Roll membrane and lap seams with roller to ensure contact and adhesion. E. Continue to remove release film and apply pressure to ensure positive contact onto wall substrate. F. Install subsequent sheets of self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheets in overlapping weatherboard format. Ensure sheets lay smooth and flat to surfaces. Roll membrane and lap seams with roller to ensure contact and adhesion. 3.08 BATTENS AND VENTILATION STRIPS FOR RAIN SCREEN CLADDING SYSTEMS A. Provide and install specified battens and ventilation strips under cladding systems. 1. Install horizontal starter strip or vent strip at base of wall, vertical battens and top vent strip, secure into solid backing ready for installation of cladding system. 2. Coordinate spacing of battens and vent strips to accommodate cladding system. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Make notification when sections of work are complete to allow review prior to covering self- adhered water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier system. B. Owner to engage independent consultant to observe substrate and membrane installation prior to placement of cladding systems and provide written documentation of observations. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 2501 - 73 RAINSCREEN WEATHER BARRIER WITH 2-D DRAINAGE 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect wall areas covered with self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier from damage due to construction activities, high wind conditions, and extended exposure to inclement weather. B. Review condition of self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier prior to installation of cladding. Repair, or remove and replace damaged sections with new membrane. C. Recommend to cap and protect exposed back-up walls against wet weather conditions during and after application of membrane, including wall openings and construction activity above completed self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier installations. D. Remove and replace water-resistive weather barrier membrane affected by chemical spills or surfactants 3.11 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates are sound enough to retain fasteners and suitable for bonding of self- adhesive flashing. B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared, including primers when required. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Broderick Architects of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.12 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces and remove sharp or abrasive protrusions prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Provide protection of absorptive substrates during construction to facilitate ease of primer applications and adhesive flashings. 3.13 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use self-adhesive flashing to seal around openings, install flashing under sheet at head and over sheet jambs and sill. Ensure that absorptive substrates are surface dry prior to application; use sealants as required and recommended by flashing manufacturer. C. Do not seal dimpled sheet at top or bottom of installation; leave air gap open for ventilation; at each open edge of dimpled sheet, fold insect screen over edge before securing edge, to screen each ventilation gap. D. Repairs: Apply patch made of same material interlocked, with continuous application of approved tape or self-sealing flashing around tear or service penetration to make a positive seal against water intrusion. E. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior: 1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal. 2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches. 4. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings. 5. Install head flashings under weather barrier. 6. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing. F. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - Vapor Retarder On Interior: 1. When insulation is to be installed in assembly, install vapor retarder over insulation. 2. Anchor to wood framing using large-headed nails or staples at 12 to 18 inches on center along each framing member covered; cover fasteners with seam tape. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 2501 - 74 RAINSCREEN WEATHER BARRIER WITH 2-D DRAINAGE 3. Seal seams, laps, perimeter edges, penetrations, tears, and cuts with self-adhesive tape, making air-tight seal. 4. Locate laps at a framing member; at laps fasten one sheet to framing member then tape overlapping sheet to first sheet. 5. Seal entire perimeter to structure, window and door frames, and other penetrations. 6. Where conduit, pipes, wires, ducts, outlet boxes, and other items are installed in insulation cavity, pass vapor retarder sheet behind item but over insulation and maintain air-tight seal. G. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers: 1. Install self-adhesive flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges. 2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with self- adhesive flashing at least 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange. 3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of opening framing, using self-adhesive flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing. 4. At head of openings, install self-adhesive flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing. 5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant over backer rod. 6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form self-adhesive flashing around penetrating item and seal to weather barrier surface. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 4113 - 75 METAL ROOF PANELS SECTION 07 4113 METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Architectural roofing system of preformed steel panels to match existing standing seam roofing panels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2017a. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2018. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 2. Installation methods. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions, spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions. 1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled. D. Selection Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City of Kent's name and are registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's special warranty covering failure of factory-applied exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified warranty period of twenty years from Date of Substantial Completion. C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for weathertightness of roofing system, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within specified warranty period of five years from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Roof Panels: 1. Pacific Metal Roofing: Zip-Rib Panel a. Verify profile, match existing metal roof profile as closely as possible. 2. Merchant & Evans Inc: Zip-Rib Panel a. Verify profile, match existing metal roof profile as closely as possible. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 4113 - 76 METAL ROOF PANELS 2.02 ARCHITECTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS A. Architectural Metal Roofing: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movement of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system. B. Metal Panels: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish to match the existing metal roof profile and color. 1. Steel Panels: a. Zinc-coated steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M; minimum G60 galvanizing. b. Steel Thickness: Minimum 24 gage (0.024 inch). 2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 1.0 inch seam height; concealed fastener system for field seaming with special tool. 3. Texture: Smooth. 4. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 24 inches. 2.03 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel or nylon-coated aluminum concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement. 2.04 FINISHES A. Fluoropolymer Coil Coating System: Manufacturer's standard multi-coat aluminum coil coating system complying with AAMA 2605, including at least 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin, and at least 80 percent of coil coated aluminum surfaces having minimum total dry film thickness (DFT) of 0.9 mil, 0.0009 inch; color and gloss to match sample. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, and equipment curbs of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless steel. B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with corrosion resistant finish or combination steel and closed-cell foam. C. Sealants: 1. Exposed Sealant: Elastomeric; silicone, polyurethane, or silyl-terminated polyether/polyurethane. 2. Concealed Sealant: Non-curing butyl sealant or tape sealant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Broderick Architects of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks. B. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer. C. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 4113 - 77 METAL ROOF PANELS Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and structural movement. 1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances. 2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited. B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, equipment curbs, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items. C. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimizing transverse joints except at junction with penetrations. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 4623 - 78 WOOD SIDING SECTION 07 4623 WOOD SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Panel siding for walls. B. Trim, flashings, accessories, and fastenings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate. B. Section 07 2501 - Rainscreen Weather Barriers: Weather barrier under siding. C. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Product requirements for metal flashings and trim associated with wood siding for placement by this section. D. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between siding and adjacent construction and fixtures. E. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Prime and finish painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, sizes, surface texture, finishes, and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Siding: 1. Roseburg Forest Products: Duratemp Exterior Siding: TI-11 8" O.C. a. Panel Size: 48 inch by 96 inch size sheet, 19/32 inch thick. b. Texture: APA B840 Texture 1-11, Hardboard c. Pattern: Vertically channel cut at 8 inches on center. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Preservative Treatment: Dip- or brush-type, non-discoloring. B. Nails: Corrosion resistant type; non-staining, of size and strength to securely and rigidly retain the work; prefinished to match siding finish. C. Flashing: Galvanized steel as specified in Section 07 6200. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates are ready to receive work. B. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Broderick Architects of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Fasten siding in place, level and plumb. 1. Arrange for orderly nailing pattern, blind nail except over trim. 2. Install siding for natural shed of water. 3. Position cut ends over bearing surfaces, and sand cut edges smooth and clean. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 4623 - 79 WOOD SIDING B. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 4646 - 80 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING SECTION 07 4646 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiber-cement siding. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate. B. Section 07 2501 - Rainscreen Weather Barriers: Weather barrier under siding. C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between siding and adjacent construction and fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber Cement Sheets; 2008 (Reapproved 2016). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods, including nail patterns. C. Warranty Documentation for Installation of Building Rainscreen Assembly: Submit installer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City of Kent's name and registered with installer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Installation Warranty for Building Rainscreen Assembly: Installer of exterior rainscreen assembly (including air/vapor barrier and attachments, framing, and exterior panels) to provide 10-year warranty that includes coverage for defective materials and/or workmanship. This warranty will also clearly include materials, labor, necessary activity to access these areas, and removal of any materials to effect repairs and restore to watertight conditions. www.edacontractors.com/#sle PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING A. Panel Siding: Vertically oriented panels made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure with integral surface texture, complying to ASTM C1186, Type A, Grade II; with machined edges, for nail attachment. 1. Texture: Simulated cedar grain. 2. Length (Height): 96 inches, nominal. 3. Width: 48 inches. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal. 5. Finish: Factory applied primer. 6. Warranty: 50 year limited; original owner and first transferee only. 7. Manufacturers: a. James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com/#sle. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 4646 - 81 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING b. Hardie Panel Series Cedarmill Fiber Cement Siding c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Furring Strips: Vapro Batten or fiber cement furring strips. B. Trim: Same material and texture as siding. C. Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4 inch. D. Exterior Soffit Vents: Cor-a-Vent fiberglass strip vent, provide ventilation area indicated on drawings. E. Sealant: Elastomeric, polyurethane or silyl-terminated polyether/polyurethane, and capable of being painted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install Sheet Metal Flashing: 1. Above door and window trim and casings. 2. Above horizontal trim in field of siding. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1. Read warranty and comply with terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage. 2. Use trim details indicated on drawings. 3. Touch up field cut edges before installing. 4. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage. B. Over Wood and Wood-Composite Sheathing: Fasten siding through sheathing into studs. C. Allow space for thermal movement between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim; seal joint between panel and trim with specified sealant. D. Joints in Vertical Siding: Install Z-flashing in horizontal joints between successive courses of vertical siding. E. Do not install siding less than 6 inches from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch to roofs, patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect. F. Exterior Soffit Vents: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated on drawings, and provide vent area specified. G. After installation, seal joints, seal around penetrations, and paint exposed cut edges. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 6200 - 82 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, and parapet wall vents. B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers for sheet metal work. B. Section 07 4113 - Metal Roof Panels C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing non-lap joints between sheet metal fabrications and adjacent construction. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2017a. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2018. C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014. D. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007, with Editorial Revision (2012). E. CDA A4050 - Copper in Architecture - Handbook; current edition. F. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples __6__by__6__ inch in size illustrating metal finish color. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) and CDA A4050 requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 5 years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gage, (0.0239) inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. 2. Color: As selected by Broderick Architects from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 6200 - 83 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated; at moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. 2.03 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Gutters: SMACNA (ASMM), Rectangular profile. B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile. C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size indicated. D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets. E. Downspout Boots: Cast iron. F. Seal metal joints. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Concealed Sealants: Non-curing butyl sealant. D. Exposed Sealants: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, with minimum movement capability as recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; color to match adjacent material. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I. F. Parapet Wall Vent: FlashCo Manufacturing Co 1. Sized per the ventilation calculations found on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners, and use exposed fasteners only where permitted.. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Secure gutters and downspouts in place with concealed fasteners. E. Connect downspouts to downspout boots, and grout connection watertight. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 9200 - 84 JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants. B. Self-leveling pourable joint sealants. C. Joint backings and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 2501 - Rainscreen Weather Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers and vapor retarders. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing acoustical and sound-rated walls and ceilings. C. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Sealant between tile and plumbing fixtures and at junctions with other materials and changes in plane. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014. B. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013. C. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants; 2008 (Reapproved 2012). D. ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid- Applied Sealants; 2018. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be used, that includes the following. 1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time, and color availability. 2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product. 3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible. 4. Substrates the product should not be used on. C. Field Quality Control Plan: Submit at least two weeks prior to start of installation. D. Field Quality Control Log: Submit filled out log for each length or instance of sealant installed, within 10 days after completion of inspections/tests; include bagged test samples and photographic records, if any. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. B. Field Quality Control Plan: 1. Visual inspection of entire length of sealant joints. 2. Field testing agency's qualifications. 3. Field Quality Control Log Form: Show same data fields as on Preinstallation Field Adhesion Test Log, with known information filled out and lines for multiple tests per sealant/substrate combinations; include visual inspection and specified field testing; allow for possibility that more tests than minimum specified may be necessary. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 9200 - 85 JOINT SEALANTS B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve watertight seal , exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Non-Sag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging or slumping. 1. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com/#sle. 2. Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. 3. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Self-Leveling Sealants: Pourable or self-leveling sealant that has sufficient flow to form a smooth, level surface when applied in a horizontal joint. 1. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com/#sle. 2. Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. 3. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS A. Scope: 1. Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on drawings, unless specifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a. Wall expansion and control joints. b. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. c. Joints between different exposed materials. d. Other joints indicated below. 2. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. b. Other joints indicated below. 3. Do not seal the following types of joints. a. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be sealed. b. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section. B. Exterior Joints: Use non-sag non-staining silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Lap Joints in Sheet Metal Fabrications: Butyl rubber, non-curing. 2. Control and Expansion Joints in Concrete Paving: Self-leveling polyurethane "traffic- grade" sealant. C. Interior Joints: Use non-sag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Non-Wet Areas: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant. 2. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Wet Areas: Non-sag polyurethane sealant for continuous liquid immersion. 3. Floor Joints in Wet Areas: Non-sag polyurethane "non-traffic-grade" sealant suitable for continuous liquid immersion. 4. Joints between Fixtures in Wet Areas and Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant; white. D. Interior Wet Areas: restrooms, food service areas, and food processing areas; fixtures in wet areas include plumbing fixtures, food service equipment, countertops, cabinets, other similar items, and ball washing and ball dispensing equipment. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 9200 - 86 JOINT SEALANTS 2.03 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS A. Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent, minimum. 2. Non-Staining To Porous Stone: Non-staining to light-colored natural stone when tested in accordance with ASTM C1248. 3. Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants. 4. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces. 5. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 890 NST (Non-Staining Technology): www.pecora.com/#sle. b. Sika Corporation; Sikasil WS-290: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Color: White. 2. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 NST (Non-Staining Technology): www.pecora.com/#sle. b. Sika Corporation; Sikasil GP: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. C. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent, minimum. 2. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation; DynaFlex: www.pecora.com/#sle. b. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-15 LM: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.04 SELF-LEVELING SEALANTS A. Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade P, Uses M and A; single or multi- component; explicitly approved by manufacturer for traffic exposure; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion . 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. 2. Manufacturers: a. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-1c SL: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to, compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant manufacturers for specific application. 1. Type for Joints Not Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330; Type O - Open Cell Polyurethane. 2. Type for Joints Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330; Type B - Bi- Cellular Polyethylene. 3. Open Cell: 40 to 50 percent larger in diameter than joint width. 4. Closed Cell and Bi-Cellular: 25 to 33 percent larger in diameter than joint width. 5. Manufacturers: a. Nomaco, Inc; HBR: www.nomaco.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to and recommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 07 9200 - 87 JOINT SEALANTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work. B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants. C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used. D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without getting sealant on adjacent surfaces. E. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed. F. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape immediately after tooling sealant surface. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field quality control inspection/testing as specified in PART 1 under QUALITY ASSURANCE article. B. Remove and replace failed portions of sealants using same materials and procedures as indicated for original installation. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 1113 - 88 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames. B. Hollow metal frames for wood doors. C. Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. B. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field painting. C. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011. C. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2017. D. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011. E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2018. F. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2018. G. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2018a. H. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2016. I. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017. J. NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2002. K. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011. L. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced standards/guidelines. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and any indicated finish requirements. D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products specified. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 1113 - 89 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion and adverse effects on factory applied painted finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 2. Curries, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Steel Sheet: Comply with one or more of the following requirements; galvannealed steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M, commercial steel (CS) Type B, for each. 2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards. 3. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements. 4. Zinc Coating for Typical Interior and/or Exterior Locations: Provide metal components zinc-coated (galvanized) and/or zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness, unless noted otherwise for specific hollow metal doors and frames. a. Based on SDI Standards: Provide at least A40/ZF120 (galvannealed) when necessary, coating not required for typical interior door applications, and at least A60/ZF180 (galvannealed) for corrosive locations. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished. B. Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated. 1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100). a. Level 3 - Extra Heavy-duty. b. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 1 - Full Flush. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum. e. Zinc Coating: A60/ZF180 galvannealed coating; ASTM A653/A653M. 2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal. 2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance with applicable door frame requirements. B. Exterior Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 1113 - 90 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating. 2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum. 3. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished. 4. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type. 1. Frame Metal Thickness: 18 gage, 0.042 inch, minimum. 2. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished. D. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with corresponding door. 2.05 FINISHES A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout with maximum 4 inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. B. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door, three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions. C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Grout frames using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. D. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7100. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 1416 - 91 FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non-rated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. D. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting E. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2016). B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1; 2016, with Errata (2017). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details. D. Warranty, executed in City of Kent's name. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. VT Industries: www.vtindustries.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS A. Doors: Refer to drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 1416 - 92 FLUSH WOOD DOORS B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at each location. 2. Wood veneer facing for field opaque finish as indicated on drawings. 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated. 2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Veneer Facing for Opaque Finish: Medium density overlay (MDO), in compliance with indicated quality standard. 2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors to be field finished. E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Hollow Metal Door Frames: As specified in Section 08 1113. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels. Modify and machine doors for hardware as required. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to evaluate the condition of existing doors and doors provided by the Owner for swing, operation, hardware configuration. Provide a complete, smooth operating installation. C. Clean all doors and provide touch up sanding and paint to integrate existing / relocated doors to match building standard. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 3613 - 93 SECTIONAL DOORS SECTION 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead sectional doors, manually operated. B. Operating hardware and supports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel channel opening frame. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Rough wood framing for door opening. C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Lock cylinders. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. DASMA 102 - American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Show component construction, anchorage method, and hardware. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include any special procedures required by project conditions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years documented experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Aluminum Glass Doors Model 521 manufactured by Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation. 2.02 ALUMINUM DOORS A. Aluminum Doors: Flush aluminum, insulated; standard lift operating style with track and hardware; complying with DASMA 102, Commercial application. 1. Door Nominal Thickness: 1-3/4 inches thick. 2. Top and Bottom Rail: 3 3/4" wide. 3. Finish: Factory anodized; clear anodized. 4. Glazed Lights: Two glazed lights per panel, 3 & 4 rows high; set in place with resilient glazing channel. 5. Manual Operation: Chain hoist. B. Glazing: Laminated safety glass; single pane; clear; 1/8 inch overall thickness. C. Solid Panels: 3/8: EPS solid panels: powder coated. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 3613 - 94 SECTIONAL DOORS 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Lift Mechanism: Torsion spring on cross head shaft, with braided galvanized steel lifting cables. 1. For Manual Operation: Requiring maximum exertion of 25 lbs force to open. B. Springs: 50,000 cycles. C. Weatherstripping: 1. Flexible bulb-type strip at bottom section. 2. Flexible Jamb seals. 3. Flexible Header seal. D. Track: Provide track as recommended by manufacturer to suit loading required and clearances available. E. Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. Ball bearing rollers with hardened steel races. F. Panel Joint Weatherstripping: Neoprene foam seal, one piece full length. G. Lock: Inside center mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to retain in locked or retracted position; interior handle. H. Lock Cylinders: See Section 08 7100. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only. D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. C. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge. D. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean doors and frames and glazing. B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 4313 - 95 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS SECTION 08 4313 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Aluminum doors and frames. C. Weatherstripping. D. Door hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 2501 - Rainscreen Weather Barriers: Sealing framing to weather barrier installed on adjacent construction. B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction. C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015. B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata). C. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014. D. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013. E. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012). F. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014. G. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2016). 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. C. Samples: Submit two samples 4 by 4 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface, glass, infill panels, glazing materials. D. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 4313 - 96 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN -- FRAMING FOR INSULATING GLAZING A. Center-Set Style, Thermally-Broken: 1. Basis of Design: [D8 Aluminum T700 Series]. 2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep. B. Other Manufacturers: Provide either the product identified as "Basis of Design" or an equivalent product of one of the manufacturers listed below: C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 1. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified for substitutions. 2.02 BASIS OF DESIGN -- SWINGING DOORS A. Medium Stile, Insulating Glazing, Thermally-Broken: 1. Basis of Design: [D8 Aluminum 400 Series Medium Stile with Large Bottom Rail]. 2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 1. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified for substitutions. 2.03 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Finish: Class I natural anodized. a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 2. Finish Color: Clear Anodized. 3. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads. 4. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces. 5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 6. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 7. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 4313 - 97 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 8. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement. 9. Preparation for Window Treatments: Provide reinforced interior horizontal head rail. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 2. Water Penetration Resistance on Manufactured Assembly: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8 psf. 3. Air Leakage Laboratory Test: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.27 psf pressure differential across assembly. 4. Overall U-value Including Glazing: 0.38 Btu/(hr sq ft deg F), maximum. 2.04 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Glazing Stops: Flush. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000. C. Swing Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Top Rail: 4 inches wide. 3. Vertical Stiles: 4-1/2 inches wide. 4. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide. 5. Finish: Same as storefront. 2.05 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 2.06 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. 2.07 HARDWARE A. For each door, include weatherstripping, sill sweep strip, and threshold. B. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors. C. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors. D. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; provide on all doors. E. Pivots: Offset type; top and bottom. F. Exit Devices: Panic type. G. Door Closers: Concealed overhead. H. Locks: Dead latch with thumbturn inside; keyed cylinder outside. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 4313 - 98 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. I. Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure. J. Install hardware using templates provided. K. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inch per 3 feet non-cumulative or 0.06 inch per 10 feet, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 5659 - 99 SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS SECTION 08 5659 SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Service and teller window units with fire rated glass. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 2501 - Rainscreen Weather Barriers: Sealing frames to weather barrier installed on adjacent construction. B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014. B. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013. C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. D. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for specified products indicating materials, operation, glazing, finishes, and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, sizes, rough-in, mounting, anchors and fasteners, and installation clearances. D. Samples for Selection of Finishes: 1. Color Anodized Finishes: Submit two samples, 4 inch by 4 inch in size illustrating metal finishes for each finish specified. E. Manufacturer Qualification Statement. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City of Kent's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Service and Teller Window Units: 1. Easi-Serv Products: www.easi-serv.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS A. Location: Built within exterior wall, as indicated on drawings. B. Window Type: Sliding, single horizontal. 1. Operation: Self-closing. 2. Mounting: Flush with wall surface. 3. Window Size: 48 inch wide by 48 inch high. 4. Size of Counter Space: As indicated on drawings. 5. Material: Aluminum. a. Finish: Clear anodized. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 5659 - 100 SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS 6. Header: Manufacturer's standard type. 7. Sill: As indicated on drawings. C. Glazing: Insulating glass, clear. 1. W-120 fire rated, tempered safety glazing. D. Products: 1. Easi-Serv Products; SS Series Side Sliding Window, Model IFSC-4040: www.easi- serv.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS A. Windows: Factory-fabricated, finished, and glazed, with extruded aluminum frame and glazing stops; complete with hardware and anchors. 1. Provide window units that are re-glazable from the secure side without dismantling the non-secure side of framing. 2. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with internal reinforcement. Make joints and connections flush, hairline, and weatherproof. Fully weld corners. 3. Apply factory finish to exposed surfaces. 4. Wind Design: Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by pressure and negative wind loads acting normal to plane of window as calculated in accordance with applicable code. 5. Self-Closing Operation: Manual open and self-closing with auto-locking handles and magnetic hold-open device. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), or testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Minimum 1/8 inch thick frame and sash material complying with ASTM B221 and ASTM B221M. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Security Devices for Sliding Windows: 1. Night Security Lock Bar: Sliding aluminum lock bar. 2. Hook-Lock: Maximum security hook lock on each slider. 3. Weatherstripping and Glazing Sealant: Factory applied. 4. Bottom Sills: Stainless steel construction, no bottom tracks and no pop rivets. 5. Handles: Stainless steel, manufacturer's standard profile and finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that window openings are ready for installation of windows. B. Verify that correct embedded anchors are in place and in proper location; repair or replace anchors as required to achieve satisfactory installation. C. Notify Broderick Architects if conditions are not suitable for installation of units; do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install units in correct orientation (inside/outside or secure/non-secure). C. Anchor units securely in manner so as to achieve performance specified. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating components for smooth operation while also maintaining a secure, weather- tight enclosure and a tight fit at the contact points; lubricate operating hardware. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 5659 - 101 SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces. B. Clean exposed surfaces promptly after installation without damaging finishes. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Provide temporary protection to ensure that service and teller windows are without damage upon Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 7100 - 102 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work under this section includes the complete finish hardware requirements for the project. Quantities listed are for the contractor’s convenience only and are not guaranteed. Items not specifically mentioned, but necessary to complete the work shall be furnished, matching the items specified in quality and finish. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood door frames. B. Section 08 0671 - Door Hardware Schedule: Schedule of door hardware sets. C. Section 08 1213 - Hollow Metal Frames. D. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors. E. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Door hardware, except cylinders. F. Section 08 3613 - Sectional Doors: Manufactured supplied hardware. G. Section 28 1000 - Access Control: Electronic access control devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. BHMA (CPD) - Certified Products Directory; Current Edition. C. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2016. D. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches; 2017. E. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; 2014. F. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; 2013. G. BHMA A156.5 - American National Standard for Cylinders and Input Devices for Locks; 2014. H. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders; 2015. I. BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000; 2017. J. DHI (H&S) - Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule; 1996. K. DHI (KSN) - Keying Systems and Nomenclature; 1989. L. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2004. M. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016. N. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. O. NFPA 105 - Standard for Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives; 2016. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products that door hardware is installed on. B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. C. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this section; attendance is required by affected installers and the following: 1. Broderick Architects. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 7100 - 103 DOOR HARDWARE 2. Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 3. Hardware Installer. 4. Owner's Security Consultant. D. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware. E. Keying Requirements Meeting: 1. Schedule meeting at project site prior to Contractor occupancy. 2. Attendance Required: a. Contractor. b. City of Kent. c. Broderick Architects. d. Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). e. Hardware Installer. 3. Agenda: a. Establish keying requirements. b. Verify locksets and locking hardware are functionally correct for project requirements. c. Verify that keying and programming complies with project requirements. d. Establish keying submittal schedule and update requirements. 4. Incorporate "Keying Requirements Meeting" decisions into keying submittal upon review of door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: a. Key control system requirements. b. Schematic diagram of preliminary key system. 5. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Broderick Architects, City of Kent, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 6. Deliver established keying requirements to manufacturers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Hardware schedule: Submit digital copies of schedule. Organize vertically formatted schedule into Hardware Sets with index of doors and headings, indicate complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following: 1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items. 2. Name, part number and manufacture of each item. 3. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 4. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule. 5. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing. C. Product Data: Submit digital copies for each product indicated. D. Templates: Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other works specified to be prepared for installing door hardware. E. Wiring/Riser diagrams: As required for electric hardware indicated. F. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. G. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, after receipt of the approved finish hardware schedule, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks. H. Samples: Upon request submit material samples. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Qualification: 1. To assure a uniform high quality of materials for the project, it is intended that only specified items be furnished. Comparable products may be accepted upon prior approval of architect. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 7100 - 104 DOOR HARDWARE 2. Hardware to be new, free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware (Mechanical latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer except where specified. 3. Fire-Rated opening in compliance with NFPA80. Hardware UL10C/UBC-7-2 (positive pressure) compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved bearing hinges and smoke seal. Furnish openings complete. B. Supplier Qualifications: 1. Hardware supplier will be a direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available at all reasonable times during the course of the work for project hardware consultation to owner, architect and contractor. 2. Supplier will be responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. 3. Conduct pre-installation conference at jobsite. Initiate and conduct with supplier, installer and related trades. Coordinate materials and techniques and sequence complex hardware items and systems installation. 4. Key Conference shall be initiated and conducted with owner to determine system, keyway(s) and structure. C. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer to have not less than 3 years’ experience specializing in installation of work in this section. Company must maintain qualified personnel trained and experienced in installing hardware. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to project site under provisions of Division 1 and as specified herein. B. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Years from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated. 1. Closers: 30 years 2. Exit Devices: 10 years mechanical, 1 year electrical 3. Locksets: ND series 10 years, L series 3 years 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance tools: 1. Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Provide specified door hardware as required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to extent indicated. B. Provide individual items of single type, of same model, and by same manufacturer. C. Provide door hardware products that comply with the following requirements: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2.02 MATERIAL AND FABRICATION A. Provide all door hardware for complete work, in accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 7100 - 105 DOOR HARDWARE B. Provide items and quantities not specifically mentioned to ensure a proper and complete operational installation. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS A. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated as “Acceptable Manufacturer” is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product. ITEM SCHEDULED MANUFACTURER ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER Hinges Ives (IVE) Hager, Bommer Flush Bolts & Coordinators Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Locksets & Deadlocks Schlage (SCH) Best, Sargent Exit Devices & Mullions Falcon (FAL) Precision, Yale Electric Strikes Von Duprin (VON) Trine, SDC Power Supplies Von Duprin (VON) Precision, Sargent Cylinders & Keying Best (BES) No Substitute Door Closers LCN (LCN) No Substitute Door Trim Ives (IVE) Trimco, Burns Protection Plates Ives (IVE) Trimco, Burns Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson (GLY) Rixson, Sargent Thresholds & Weatherstrip Zero (ZER) NGP, Reese, Pemko 2.04 HANGING A. Conventional Hinges: Hinge open width minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing. Steel or stainless steel pins: 1. Three hinges per leaf to 7 feet, 6-inch height. Add one for each additional 30 inches in height or any fraction thereof. 2. Provide standard-weight 4 ½ x 4 ½ for 1 ¾” thick doors up to 3’5”. Provide heavy-weight 5 x 4 ½ on doors 36” and over. 3. Exterior outswing doors to have non removable (NRP) pins. 4. Pin tips, flat button, finish to match leaves. 5. Interior doors over 36” – Heavy weight. 6. Interior doors up to 36” – Standard weight. 2.05 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS A. Heavy Duty Mortise Locks and Latches: Schlage L9000 Series 1. Provide mortise locks certified as ANSI A156.13, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security. 2. Provide lock case that is multi-function and field reversible for handing without opening case, and manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. 3. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel. 4. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 5. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. 6. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece spindles. a. Lever Design: Schlage 03A B. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: Schlage ND Series 1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. 2. UL listed for A label and lesser class single doors up to 4ft x 8ft. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 7100 - 106 DOOR HARDWARE 3.Meets A117.1 Accessibility Codes. 4.Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, unless noted otherwise, with 1/2 inch latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs. 5.Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws. 6.Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag. 7.Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 8.Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both sides. a.Lever Design: Schlage Tubular 2.06 EXIT DEVICES A. Panic and Fire Rated Exit Devices: Von Duprin 98/99 Series 1.Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware. 2.Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware. 3.Touchpad: Extend minimum of one half of door width. Provide compression springs in devices, latches, and outside trims or controls; tension springs also acceptable. 4.Provide exit devices with deadlatching feature for security and for future addition of alarm kits and/or other electrified requirements. 5.Provide exit devices with manufacturer’s approved strikes. 6.Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Locate exit devices at height recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect. 7.Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits. 8.Removable Mullions: 2 inches (51 mm) x 3 inches (76 mm) steel tube. Where scheduled as keyed removable mullion that is removed by use of a keyed cylinder, which is self- locking when re-installed. 9.Provide UL labeled fire exit hardware for fire rated openings. 10.Provide factory drilled weep holes for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets. 11.Provide electrified options as scheduled. 12.Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-duty lever trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant levers that will travel to 90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which can easily be re-set. a.Lever Style: Match lever style of locksets. 2.07 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Manufacturers and Products: Von Duprin 6000 Series 1.Provide electric strikes designed for use with type of locks shown at each opening. 2.Provide electric strikes UL Listed as burglary-resistant. 3.Where required, provide electric strikes UL Listed for fire doors and frames. 4.Provide fail-secure type electric strikes, unless specified otherwise. 5.Coordinate voltage and provide transformers and rectifiers for each strike as required. 2.08 KEYS, KEYING, AND KEY CONTROL A. See Keying Requirements in this section 2.09 CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: LCN 4040XP Series 1.Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date of manufacture code. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 7100 - 107 DOOR HARDWARE 2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with high strength cast iron cylinder, and full complement bearings at shaft. 3. Cylinder Body: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter with 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter double heat- treated pinion journal. 4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. 5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. 6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. 7. Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-duty forged forearms for parallel arm closers. 8. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. 9. Finish for Closer Cylinders, Arms, Adapter Plates, and Metal Covers: Powder coating finish which has been certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as described in ANSI Standard A156.4 and ASTM B117, or has special rust inhibitor (SRI). 10. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 2.10 OTHER HARDWARE A. Door stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide stops (wall, floor or overhead) at each leaf of every swinging door leaf. 2. Where wall or floor stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. B. Weatherstrip and Gasket 1. Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. 2. Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer for application indicated. C. Thresholds 1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and profile as detailed or scheduled. D. Silencers 1. Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors. E. Kickplates 1. Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as scheduled. Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware. 2.11 HARDWARE FINISH A. Provide the following finishes unless noted differently in hardware groups: Hinges 630 Stainless Steel Exterior, 652 Dull Chrome Interior Locksets 626 Dull Chrome Exit Devices 626 Dull Chrome Closers 689 Aluminum Kickplates 630 Stainless Steel Other Hardware 626 Dull Chrome Thresholds Aluminum Weatherstrip/Sweeps Aluminum Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 7100 - 108 DOOR HARDWARE 2.12 KEYING REQUIREMENTS A. All keyed cylinders shall be subject to a existing BEST Master Keying System. Coordinate with Owner for compatibility with existing keying system. B. Furnish cylinders with construction cores. Supply Owner with matching new cores for re-keying. C. Cylinders to be furnished with visual key control with key code. Stamped on the face of the keys and marked on the back or side of the cylinders. D. Key Quantities 4 EA Master Keys 2 EA Control Keys 2 EA Construction Control Keys 5 EA Construction Keys 2.13 FINISHES A. Finishes: Identified in Section 08 0671 - Door Hardware Schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation. B. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and security codes. Notify Architect of any code conflicts before ordering materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and operation. B. Locate floor stops not more than 4 inches from the wall. C. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames. D. Set exterior door thresholds with full-width bead of elastomeric sealant at each point of contact with floor providing a continuous weather seal; anchor thresholds with stainless steel countersunk screws. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three to six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant must examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors and door hardware. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate electrical, electronic and pneumatic hardware system including adjustment and maintenance procedures. 3.05 PROTECTION/CLEANING A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows, etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation/reinstallation process. 3.06 DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS HW SET: 01 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 HARDWARE BY DOOR / FRAME MANUFACTURER Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 7100 - 109 DOOR HARDWARE HW SET: 02 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4" X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA PULL PLATE 8302 8" 4" X 16" G 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG 689 LCN 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 4" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER HW SET: 03 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70HD TLR 626 SCH 1 EA SFIC CORE IC-6 626 BES 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 04 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE EA ENTRY LOCK ND54HD TLR 626 SCH EA SFIC CORE IC-6 626 BES EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER HW SET: 05 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD 03A 626 SCH 1 EA SFIC CORE IC-6 pin 626 BES 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 545A A ZER HW SET: 06 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070HD 03A 626 SCH 1 EA SFIC CORE IC-6 626 BES Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 7100 - 110 DOOR HARDWARE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SHCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A A ZER HW SET: 07 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 2 EA PIVOT SET 7226 SET 626 IVE 2 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 2 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 ~ 689 VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE MEL-24-C-C-718 24 VDC ~ 626 FAL 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE MEL-24-C-EO 24 VDC ~ 626 FAL 1 EA SFIC CORE IC-6 626 BES 1 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. 80-132 626 SCH 2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 12" 630-316 IVE 1 EA AUTO OPERATOR 8100PUSH DUAL SIM PAIR - GRY REC 2 EA HANDS FREE ACTUATOR 10MS41S 630 BEA 1 EA WEATHER STRIPPING WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MFR 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 545A A ZER 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-2RS ~ LGR SCE ACCESS CONTROL - CORDINATE WITH LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL VENDOR~ DOOR(S) NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. WHEN DOOR(S)TO BE UNLOCKED, ACCESS CONTROL WILL RETRACT AND HOLD LATCHBOLTS AND ENABLE OUTSIDE ACTUATORS. DOOR(S) WILL BE PUSH/PULL, AND PUSHING ACTUATORS WILL AUTOMATICALLY OPEN DOOR(S). LATCH RETRACTION AND AUTOMATIC OPERATOR WILL DISABLE AND DOOR(S) WILL REMAIN LOCKED ON LOSS OF POWER. HW SET: 08 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 2 EA PIVOT SET 7226 SET 626 IVE 2 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-24-C-C-718 626 FAL 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE F-24-C-EO 626 FAL 3 EA SFIC CORE IC-6 626 BES 3 EA SFIC MORTISE CYL. 80-132 626 SCH 2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 12" 630-316 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X 4040-61 X 4040-30 689 LCN 1 EA FIRE/LIFE FLOOR MAG SEM7820 AS REQ (12/24/120V AC/DC TRI VOLT) 1 EA WEATHER STRIPPING WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MFR 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 545A A ZER Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 7100 - 111 DOOR HARDWARE 3.07 DOOR HARDWARE INDEX Door # HW Set # 101 08 102 07 103 07 104 06 105 03 106 02 107 02 108 03 109 04 110 05 G01 01 G01 01 G01 01 G01 01 G01 01 G02 01 G03 01 G04 01 G04 01 G04 01 G04 01 G04 01 G04 01 G04 01 END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 8000 - 112 GLAZING SECTION 08 8000 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Insulating glass units. B. Glazing units. C. Plastic sheet glazing units. D. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 7300 - Aluminum Railing System: Glazing furnished as part of railing system. B. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished as part of storefront assembly. C. Section 08 5659 - Service and Teller Window Units: Fire rated glazing furnished as part of window unit. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010. C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011. D. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. E. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2014. F. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013. G. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass; 2015. H. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2016. I. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. J. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008. K. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2017. L. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence; 2014, with Errata (2017). M. NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and Systems; 2017. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Insulating Glass Unit Glazing Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements. C. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City of Kent's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 8000 - 113 GLAZING 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including providing products to replace failed units. C. Polycarbonate Sheet Glazing: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for breakage, coating failure, abrasion resistance, including providing products to replace failed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass Manufacturers: 1. AGC Glass North America, Inc: www.agcglass.com/#sle. 2. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com/#sle. 3. Guardian Glass, LLC: www.guardianglass.com/#sle. 4. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na/#sle. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Laminated Glass Manufacturers: 1. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com/#sle. 2. Goldray Industries, Inc: www.goldrayglass.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Plastic Sheet Glazing Manufacturers: 1. Covestro LLC; Makrolon UV: www.sheets.covestro.com/#sle. 2. SABIC Innovative Plastics US LLC: www.sabic.com/sfs/#sle. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Provide type and thickness of exterior glazing assemblies to support assembly dead loads, and to withstand live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of glass. 1. Comply with ASTM E1300 for design load resistance of glass type, thickness, dimensions, and maximum lateral deflection of supported glass. 2. Provide glass edge support system sufficiently stiff to limit the lateral deflection of supported glass edges to less than 1/175 of their lengths under specified design load. 3. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum. B. Vapor Retarder and Air Barrier Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier. 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. C. Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide exterior glazing products with performance properties as indicated. Performance properties are in accordance with manufacturer's published data as determined with the following procedures and/or test methods: 1. Center of Glass U-Value: Comply with NFRC 100 using Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 2. Center of Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Comply with NFRC 200 using Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 3. Solar Optical Properties: Comply with NFRC 300 test method. 2.03 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality - Q3. 2. Kind HS - Heat-Strengthened Type: Complies with ASTM C1048. 3. Kind FT - Fully Tempered Type: Complies with ASTM C1048. 4. Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR 1201 criteria for safety glazing used in hazardous locations. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 8000 - 114 GLAZING B. Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172. 1. Laminated Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 - Class B or 16 CFR 1201 - Category I impact test requirements. 2.04 INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-coat) or magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat) type coatings on flat glass; coated vision glass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass, Kind CS. 3. Spacer Color: Black. 4. Edge Seal: a. Color: Black. 5. Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed. B. Insulating Glass Units: Vision glass, double glazed, tempered where required by code. 1. Applications: a. Glazed lites in exterior doors. b. Glazed sidelights and panels next to doors. 2. Space between lites filled with argon. 3. Outboard Lite: Fully tempered float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. b. Coating: Self-cleaning type, on #1 surface. c. Coating: Low-E (passive type), on #2 surface. 4. Inboard Lite: Fully tempered float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. 5. Total Thickness: 1 inch. 6. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value): 0.37, nominal. 2.05 GLAZING UNITS 2.06 PLASTIC SHEET GLAZING UNITS A. Polycarbonate Flat Sheet: Ultraviolet (UV) stabilized. 1. Applications: POS work area protective screen. 2. Type: Monolithic (single layer solid) sheet. 3. Silicone abrasion resistant coating for scratch resistance. 4. Tint: Clear, transparent. 5. Thickness: 0.236 inch. 6. Width: 36 inch. 7. Manufacturers: a. Covestro, LLC; Makrolon UV: www.sheets.covestro.com/#sle. b. SABIC Innovative Plastics US LLC; LEXAN XL10: www.sabic.com/sfs/#sle. c. Plazit Polygal, the Plastic Sheets Group; Monogal 1UV: www.polygal- northamerica.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing system. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 08 8000 - 115 GLAZING 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hours before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in glazing referenced standards. B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass manufacturer. D. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. E. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated. F. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing, plastering, mortar droppings, etc. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. B. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured. D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.05 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 0561 - 116 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION SECTION 09 0561 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section applies to floors identified in Contract Documents that are receiving the following types of floor coverings: 1. Resilient sheet. 2. Carpet tile. 3. Thin-set ceramic tile. B. Removal of existing floor coverings. C. Preparation of existing concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings. D. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and alkalinity (pH). E. Patching compound. F. Remedial floor coatings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2016a. B. ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2014). C. RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; 2011. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Visual Observation Report: For existing floor coverings to be removed. B. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination of substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing: 1. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) limits and test methods. 2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure. C. Testing Agency's Report: 1. Description of areas tested; include floor plans and photographs if helpful. 2. Summary of conditions encountered. 3. Copies of specified test methods. 4. Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces. 5. Product data for recommended remedial coating. 6. Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing. D. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report. E. Copy of RFCI (RWP). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor may perform adhesive and bond test with Contractor's own personnel or hire a testing agency. B. Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing: 1. Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency. 2. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start. 3. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities. 4. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 0561 - 117 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following characteristics: 1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor, floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges. 2. Latex or polyvinyl acetate additions are permitted; gypsum content is prohibited. 3. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate. B. Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for the moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for substrate and floor covering and for conditions present. C. Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended by its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring manufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the level of alkalinity (pH) found, and suitable for adhesion of flooring without further treatment. 1. Thickness: As required for application and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Use product recommended by testing agency. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION A. Perform following operations in the order indicated: 1. Existing concrete slabs (on-grade) with existing floor coverings: a. Visual observation of existing floor covering, for adhesion, water damage, alkaline deposits, and other defects. b. Removal of existing floor covering. 2. Preliminary cleaning. 3. Moisture vapor emission tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each additional 1000 square feet, unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring manufacturer. 4. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Alkalinity (pH) tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Specified remediation, if required. 7. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required. 8. Other preparation specified. 9. Adhesive bond and compatibility test. 10. Protection. 3.02 REMOVAL OF EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS A. Comply with local, State, and federal regulations and recommendations of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings, as applicable to floor covering being removed. B. Dispose of removed materials in accordance with local, State, and federal regulations and as specified. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 0561 - 118 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 3.03 PRELIMINARY CLEANING A. Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive removers, film-forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive laitance, mold, mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond. B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning. 3.04 PREPARATION A. See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements. B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. C. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints, and other irregularities with patching compound. D. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints. 3.05 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. 3.06 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 2116 - 119 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Acoustic insulation. C. Gypsum wallboard. D. Joint treatment and accessories. E. Textured finish system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. B. Section 07 2501 - Rainscreen Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing. C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing acoustical gaps in construction other than gypsum board or plaster work. D. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Tile backing board. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2015. B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2017. C. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2018b. D. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2014a. E. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2017. F. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009. G. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010. H. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products; 2016. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. B. Interior Partitions: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. 2.02 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: 1. American Gypsum Company; ____: www.americangypsum.com/#sle. 2. CertainTeed Corporation; ____: www.certainteed.com/#sle. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ____: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. 4. USG Corporation; ____: www.usg.com/#sle. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 2116 - 120 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch. 3. Paper-Faced Products: a. American Gypsum Company; LightRoc Gypsum Wallboard. b. CertainTeed Corporation; Type C Drywall. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 4. Mold Resistant Paper Faced Products at the Restrooms above the tile, Ball Machine Room and Ball Washer Blower Room: a. American Gypsum Company; M-Bloc. b. CertainTeed Corporation; M2Tech 5/8" Type C Moisture & Mold Resistant Drywall. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Mold-Guard. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 4 inch. B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant. C. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2501. D. Beads, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, rigid plastic, galvanized steel, or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise. E. Moisture Guard Trim: ASTM C1047, rigid plastic, 48 inch length, applied to bottom edge of gypsum board. F. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. G. Finishing Compound: Surface coat and primer, takes the place of skim coating. H. Textured Finish Materials: Latex-based compound; plain. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. 3.04 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 2116 - 121 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 3.05 TEXTURE FINISH A. Texture Required: match building standard. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 3000 - 122 TILING SECTION 09 3000 TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate. D. Ceramic accessories. E. Ceramic trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between tile work and adjacent construction and fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014. B. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). C. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet- Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). D. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised). E. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). F. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). G. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). H. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). I. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). J. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016). K. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). L. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed 2010). M. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2013 (Revised). N. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016). Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 3000 - 123 TILING O. ANSI A118.15 - American National Standard Specifications for Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2012. P. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2012. Q. ASTM C373 - Standard Test Methods for Determination of Water Absorption and Associated Properties by Vacuum Method for Pressed Ceramic Tiles and Glass Tiles and Boil Method for Extruded Ceramic Tiles and Non-tile Fired Ceramic Whiteware Products; 2017. R. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2017. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. C. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain removal methods. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. Construct tile mock-up where indicated on drawings, incorporating all components specified for the location. 1. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Glazed Porcelain Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade. 1. Products: a. Crossville Retro Active 2.0. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Size: 12 by 24 inch, nominal. 3. Surface Finish: Matte glaze. 4. Colors: a. Main Field Color both Men's and Women's: Empress White PO. b. Bullnose and accent tile Men's Room: Roasted Chesnut UPS. c. Bullnose and accent tile Woman's Room: Royal Navy UPS. 5. Pattern: Stack. 6. Trim Units: Matching bead, bullnose, and surface bullnose shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. B. Porcelain Tile, Type Floor Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade. 1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373. 2. Size: 12 by 24 inch, nominal. 3. Pattern: Ashlar Pattern 4. Surface Finish: Matte glazed. 5. Color(s): To be determined by Architect. 6. Trim Units: Matching cove base shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 7. Products: a. United Tile: +One. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 3000 - 124 TILING 2.02 SETTING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. 2. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. 3. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Improved Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.15. 1. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; S 28: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. b. Custom Building Products; MegaLite Ultimate Crack Prevention Large Format Tile Mortar, with Multi-Surface Bonding Primer: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 254 Platinum: www.laticrete.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 GROUTS A. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water-cleanable epoxy grout. 1. Color(s): As selected by Broderick Architects from manufacturer's full line. 2. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX WA: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. b. Custom Building Products; CEG-IG 100% Solids Industrial Grade Epoxy Grout: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout: www.laticrete.com/#sle. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Grout Sealer: Liquid-applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cement grout. 1. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9; high density, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. 1. Products: a. Custom Building Products; WonderBoard Lite Backerboard: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 3000 - 125 TILING 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through ANSI A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. G. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive. H. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. I. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. J. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F131. 3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244, using membrane at toilet rooms. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 6500 - 126 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient base. C. Installation accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2016. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plans and floor patterns. D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City of Kent's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and the correct style, color, quantity and run numbers. B. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space. C. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. D. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET FLOORING A. Rubber Sheet Flooring: 1. Manufacturers: a. Ecore: ECOsurfaces - Classic Series Recycled Rubber Resilient Sheet Flooring and adhesives.. b. Non-laminated, single-ply, rubber surface . c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Thickness: 5/16" inch minimum. 3. Sheet Width: 48 inch minimum. 4. Color: Gulf Shores / 2605. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 6500 - 127 RESILIENT FLOORING 2.02 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove. 1. Manufacturers: a. Roppe Corp; _______: www.roppe.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Height: 4 inch. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 4. Finish: Satin. 5. Length: Roll. 6. Color: Brown #110. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive for Vinyl Flooring: 1. Manufacturers: a. ECORE's ECOsurfaces E-Grip III one-component urethane, moisture-cured, non-sag, permanently elastic adhesive. B. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Rubber to match Resilient Base. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH). 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION - SHEET FLOORING A. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns at seams. 3.05 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 6813 - 128 TILE CARPETING SECTION 09 6813 TILE CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, loose laid with edges and control grid adhered. B. Removal of existing carpet / flooring. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. C. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. D. Submit two, 4 inch long samples of edge strip. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City of Kent's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Carpet Tiles: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed of each color and pattern installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS: NOT USED 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Tile Carpeting: 1. Shaw Contract Group. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Tile Carpeting: Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot. 1. Product: Vibrant Tile / 5T001 manufactured by Shaw Contract Group. 2. Tile Size: 24 by 24 inch, nominal. 3. Color: Frequency / 01585. 4. Pattern: Ashlar. 5. Construction: Multi-Level Pattern Loop 6. Gage: 8.0 inch. 7. Stitches: 8 per inch. 8. Tufted Weight: 20.00 oz/sq yd. 9. Secondary Backing Material: ecoworx tile. 10. Extra Stock: Provide 20 extra carpet tile of the original dye lot. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Edge Strips: Roppe, Rubber, Brown #110 color. C. Adhesives: D. Carpet Tile Adhesive: Recommended by carpet tile manufacturer; releasable type. PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subfloor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 6813 - 129 TILE CARPETING B. Verify that subfloor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to subfloor surfaces. C. Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH). 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates for installation of flooring in accordance with Section 09 0561. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor conditions. B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. E. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. F. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. G. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 7200 - 130 WALL COVERINGS SECTION 09 7200 WALL COVERINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglas Reinforced Polyester Panels (FRP). 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: Submit two samples of wall covering, 4 in x 4 in size illustrating color, finish, and texture. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect roll materials at arrival on site, to verify acceptability. B. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. C. Do not store roll goods on end. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Marlite Reinforced Polyester Panels 2.02 WALL COVERINGS A. General Requirements: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Wall Covering: Boyd Rib Plus, complying with the following: 1. Color: White-Pebbled Surface / P-100. C. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate. D. Termination Trim: Marlite, white PVC trim / M370, clear. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and comply with requirements of wall covering manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond to substrate surface. C. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. D. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of resilient base. E. Install termination trim. F. Remove excess adhesive while wet from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe clean with dry cloth. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 9113 - 131 EXTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles. 2. Mechanical and Electrical: a. On the roof and outdoors, paint equipment that is exposed to weather or to view, including factory-finished materials. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory- applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Based Materials; 2016. B. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. C. Samples: Submit two paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Broderick Architects before preparing samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. E. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each product/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 9113 - 132 EXTERIOR PAINTING (MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and finished surfaces, and color samples of each color and finish used. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City of Kent's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store where directed. 3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.05 MOCK-UP A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. Provide panel, 2 feet long by 2 feet wide, illustrating paint color, texture, and finish. C. Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint color, texture, and finish. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Paints: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. B. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field-catalyzed paint. 1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected later by Broderick Architects from the manufacturer's full line. C. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 1. Selection to be made by Broderick Architects after award of contract. 2. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without additional cost to City of Kent. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 9113 - 133 EXTERIOR PAINTING 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. E - 1 -Fiber Cement Siding, Exterior Gypsum Board, Wood Decking and Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. Low Luster on walls and trim / Flat on ceiling surfaces: Two coats of latex; Sherwin Williams Emerald Exterior Acrylic Latex. 2. One coat of latex primer sealer; Sherwin Williams Multi-Purpose Latex Primer / Sealer B. E - 2 -Ferrous Metals and Primed Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic . C. E-3 -Driving Stall Marking Paint: 1. Yellow: One coat, with reflective particles. 2. Red: One coat, with reflective particles. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially effect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Fiber Cement Siding: 12 percent. 2. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 3. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. F. Fiber Cement Siding: Remove dirt, dust and other foreign matter with a stiff fiber brush. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. G. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. H. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 9113 - 134 EXTERIOR PAINTING 3.03 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks. C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual". D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 9123 - 135 INTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In finished areas, paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory- applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. B. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting. C. Section 09 9300 - Staining and Transparent Finishing: Wood substrates. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Based Materials; 2016. B. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition. C. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016). D. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. C. Samples: Submit two paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City of Kent's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 9123 - 136 INTERIOR PAINTING 2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store where directed. 3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Paints: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.. B. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint. 1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. I - 1 Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at all locations. 3. Top Coat Product: a. Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex. 4. Primer(s): As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats: a. All Substrates: Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Wall Primer. B. I -2 Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including restroom gypsum board. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5 at restrooms 3. Top Coat Product: a. Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex. 4. Primer(s): As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats: a. All Substrates: Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Wall Primer. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 9123 - 137 INTERIOR PAINTING C. I - 3 I New and Existing Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including shop primed steel, hollow metal frames. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations. 3. Top Coat Product: a. Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic.. 4. Primer(s): As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats: a. Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Prime 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially effect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. F. Ferrous Metal: 1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1. 2. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated. G. Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. H. Glue-Laminated Beams: Prior to finishing, wash surfaces with solvent, remove grease and dirt. I. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual". Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 9123 - 138 INTERIOR PAINTING C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer. E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 9300 - 139 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING SECTION 09 9300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of stains and transparent finishes to the exterior benches and tables. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category. C. Samples: Submit two samples, illustrating selected colors and sheens for each system with specified coats cascaded. Submit on actual wood substrate to be finished, 8 1/2 by 11 inch in size. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City of Kent's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Stain and Transparent Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color and type; from the same product run, store where directed. 3. Label each container with color and type in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of stain or transparent finish, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Stain and Transparent Finish Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by manufacturer of stains and transparent finishes. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Transparent Finishes: 1. Base Manufacturer: Daly's. B. Stains: 1. Base Manufacturer: Daly's. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 09 9300 - 140 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 2.02 STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES - GENERAL A. Finishes: 1. Provide finishes capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 3. Supply each finish material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. 2.03 STAIN AND TRANSPARENT FINISH SYSTEMS A. Finish on Wood: wood tables and benches: 1. Daly's Benite Sealer a. 1 coat sealer 2. Daly's Wood Stain a. 2 coats stain 3. Daly's Crystal Fin Matte Finish - Polyurethane/Acrylic Clear Finish a. 3 coats varnish 2.04 INTERIOR STAIN AND TRANSPARENT FINISH SYSTEMS 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of finished surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially effect proper application. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual". B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. C. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer. D. Reinstall items removed prior to finishing. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 10 1400 - 141 SIGNAGE SECTION 10 1400 SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Room and door signs. B. Interior directional and informational signs. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition. B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. C. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017. 1.03 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas. 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified. 2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. 3. Character Height: 1 inch. 4. Sign Height: 3 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Office Doors: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers indicated on drawings; in addition, provide "window" section for replaceable occupant name. 6. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those indicated on drawings. 7. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN" and "WOMEN", room numbers to be determined later, and braille. C. Interior Directional and Informational Signs: 1. Sign Type: Same as room and door signs. 2.02 SIGN TYPES A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame. 1. Edges: Square. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive. B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: To be determined. 4. Character Color: Contrasting color. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 10 1400 - 142 SIGNAGE 2.03 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA A. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as background color: 1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 10 2113.17 - 143 PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 2113.17 PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Phenolic toilet compartments. B. Urinal screens. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. B. Section 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 2 by 2 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Phenolic Toilet Compartments: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment: 1082 DuraLine Series: www.bobrick.com 2. ASI Global Partitions 3. Scranton Products 4. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Factory fabricated doors, pilasters, and divider panels made of solid phenolic core panels with integral melamine finish, floor-mounted headrail-braced. 1. Color: Formica: Pewter Mesh / 4878-60. B. Doors: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Width: 24 inch. 3. Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch, out-swinging. 4. Height: 58 inch. C. Panels: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Height: 58 inch. 3. Depth: As indicated on drawings. D. Pilasters: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Width: As required to fit space; minimum 3 inch. E. Urinal Screens: To match compartments; mounted to wall with two panel brackets with vertical support/bracing same as compartments. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 10 2113.17 - 144 PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch high, concealing floor fastenings. B. Head Rails: Hollow anodized aluminum, 1 inch by 1-1/2 inch size, with anti-grip profile and cast socket wall brackets. C. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. D. Hardware: Polished stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 10 2600 - 145 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION SECTION 10 2600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for wall and corner guard anchors. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Placement of supports in stud wall construction. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough-in measurements. C. Samples: Submit samples illustrating component design, configurations, joinery, color and finish. 1. Submit two sections of corner guards, 24 inches long. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Protective Wall Covering: 1. Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com/#sle. 2. Inpro: www.inprocorp.com/#sle. 3. Pawling Corp: www.pawling.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PRODUCT TYPES A. Corner Guards - Surface Mounted: Stainless Steel 1. Width of Wings: 2 inches. 2. Corner: Square. 3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 4. Length: 48". 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position to supporting construction. B. Position corner guard 4 inches above finished floor to 52 inches high. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 10 2800 - 146 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES SECTION 10 2800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Commercial toilet accessories - see Restroom Plumbing & Accessories Schedule in the Drawings, B. Accessories for utility rooms - see Restroom Plumbing & Assessors Schedule in the Drawings, C. Electric hand/hair dryers - see Restroom Plumbing & Assessors Schedule in the Drawings, D. Utility room accessories - see Restroom Plumbing & Assessors Schedule in the Drawings, E. Grab bars - see Restroom Plumbing & Assessors Schedule in the Drawings, 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wall framing and plates and above ceiling framing. B. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Ceramic washroom accessories. C. Section 10 2113.17 Phenolic Toilet Partitions 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Commercial Toilet Accessory Products listed are made by Bobrick. B. Approved Alternate Commercial Toilet and Bath Accessories: 1. ASI Global Partitions 2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Electric Hand/Hair Dryers: 1. Bobrick. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 10 2800 - 147 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 12 3600 - 148 COUNTERTOPS SECTION 12 3600 COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work. B. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework. B. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Sinks. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise. B. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous substrate. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum. 2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISFA 2-01 and NEMA LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a. Manufacturers: 1) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com/#sle. b. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20. c. Color: 1) POS Counter and Service Counter: Formica Classics: Ebony Mosaic / 650 2) Restroom Counters: Formica Signatures: Gray Galaxy / 737 d. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum. e. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high. f. Skirts: As indicated on drawings. C. Stainless Steel Countertops: ASTM A666, Type 304, stainless steel sheet; 16 gage, 0.0625 inch nominal sheet thickness. 1. POS Counter Work Station: a. Finish: 4B satin brushed finish. b. Exposed Edge Shape: Straight turndown with return; 1-1/2 inch high face, 1/2 inch return to face of case; reinforced with hardwood or steel. c. Back and End Splashes: Same material; welded 1/4 inch radius coved joint to countertop; square top edge with 1 inch wide top surface and minimum 1/2 inch turndown. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 12 3600 - 149 COUNTERTOPS 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Stainless Steel: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece including nosings and back and end splashes; accurately fitted mechanical field joints in lengths over that dimension are permitted. 1. Weld joints; grind smooth and polish to match. 2. Provide stainless steel hat channel stiffeners, welded or soldered to underside as required. 3. Provide wall clips for support of back/end splash turndowns. 4. Sound Deadening: Apply water resistant, fire resistant sound deadening mastic to entire bottom surface. D. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings, finished to match. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Broderick Architects of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required. B. Attach stainless steel countertops using stainless steel fasteners and clips. C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. 3.03 CLEANING 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 22 0553 - 150 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Stencils. D. Pipe markers. E. Ceiling tacks. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2015. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates. B. Control Panels: Nameplates. C. Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling. D. Major Control Components: Nameplates. E. Piping: Tags. F. Thermostats: Nameplates. G. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates. 2.02 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Plastic: Comply with ASTM D709. 2.03 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. 2.04 STENCILS A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch high letters. 2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 3/4 inch high letters. 3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1-1/4 inch high letters. 2.05 PIPE MARKERS A. Comply with ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. C. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 22 0553 - 151 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT D. Color code as follows: 1. Potable, Cooling, Boiler, Feed, Other Water: Green with white letters. 2. Fire Quenching Fluids: Red with white letters. 3. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Orange with black letters. 2.06 CEILING TACKS A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. E. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. 1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 22 0719 - 152 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SECTION 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013. B. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2014. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. D. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016. E. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. F. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 2.02 POLYETHYLENE A. Insulation: Flexible closed-cell polyethylene tubing, slit lengthwise for installation, complying with applicable requirements of ASTM D1056. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177; 0.25 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 200 degrees F. 3. Density: 2 lb/cu ft. 4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 1.0 percent by volume. 5. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.05 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 6. Connection: Contact adhesive. 2.03 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. - at sink P traps 1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 22 1005 - 153 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, specialties, and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary sewer. 2. Domestic water. 3. Storm water. 4. Natural gas. 5. Flanges, unions, and couplings. 6. Pipe hangers and supports. 7. Valves. 8. Flow controls. 9. Check. 10. Relief valves. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; 2015. B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2016. C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2018. D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2018. E. ASME BPVC-IV - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers; 2019. F. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2018. G. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2017. H. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2018a. I. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014). J. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2015a. K. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube; 2016. L. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2016. M. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2014. N. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved 2016). O. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2012 (Reapproved 2018). P. ASTM D2661 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2014, with Editorial Revision (2018). Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 22 1005 - 154 PLUMBING PIPING Q. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2014. R. ASTM D2846/D2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2019. S. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer & Solvent Cement) Method of Joining Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Piping Components with Tapered Sockets; 2015. T. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2016. U. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2015. V. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2017. W. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2013. X. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80; 2015. Y. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR); 2013, with Editorial Revision. Z. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe; 2014. AA. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2014. AB. ASTM F679 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2016. AC. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; 2010. AD. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; 2018. AE. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; 2010. AF. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017. AG. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. C. Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout developed for this project, with design calculations for loadings and spacings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 22 1005 - 155 PLUMBING PIPING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. ABS Pipe: ASTM D2661. 1. Fittings: ABS. 2. Joints: Solvent welded with ASTM D2235 cement. 2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. 2.04 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. CPVC Double-Containment Pipe: ASTM F441/F441M. 1. Fittings: CPVC; ASTM F439. 2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement. 3. Supports: Molded supports or disks as supplied by the double containment piping system manufacturer for the size and piping type specified or as detailed on drawings. 2.07 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.08 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, ASTM D3034, or ASTM F679. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Push-on, using ASTM F477 elastomeric gaskets. 2.09 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type, with AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded. 2.10 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 22 1005 - 156 PLUMBING PIPING 2.11 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. 2.12 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58. 1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations. 2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers. 3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure. 4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp. B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2.13 BALL VALVES A. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze or ductile iron body, 304 stainless steel or chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, threaded or grooved ends with union. 2.14 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Flow Controls: 1. Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet, blowdown/backflush drain. 2. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 3.5 psi. 2.15 RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure: 1. ANSI Z21.22, AGA certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated. B. Temperature and Pressure: 1. ANSI Z21.22, AGA certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME BPVC-IV certified and labelled. 2.16 STRAINERS A. Size 2 inch and Under: 1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2. Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. B. Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch: 1. Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 22 1005 - 157 PLUMBING PIPING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372. C. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. 3.02 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Tie into existing building services. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 22 3000 - 158 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 3000 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water Heaters: 1. Commercial electric. 2. Tankless electric. B. Pumps. 1. Circulators. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements. 3. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City of Kent's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER HEATERS A. Manufacturers: 1. A.O. Smith Water Products Co: www.hotwater.com/#sle. 2. Bock Water Heaters, Inc: www.bockwaterheaters.com/#sle. 3. Rheem Manufacturing Company: www.rheem.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Tankless Electric: 1. Manufacturers: a. Rheem Performance Plus ECO 160DVLN3-1. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Type: Automatic, gas. 3. Performance: a. Storage Capacity: 7.0 gal/min gal. 4. Electrical Characteristics: a. 120 volts, single phase. 5. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with externally adjustable temperature range from 120 to 170 degrees F, flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, enclosed controls and electrical junction box and operating light. Wire double element units so elements do not operate simultaneously. 6. Accessories: a. Water Connections: Brass. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 22 3000 - 159 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT b. Dip Tube: Brass. c. Drain valve. d. Anode: Magnesium. e. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME labeled. f. Direct vent kit required C. Commercial Electric: 1. Type: Factory-assembled and wired, electric, vertical storage. 2. Performance: a. Storage Capacity: 65 gal. b. First Hour Rating: 79 gal. c. Heating Element Size: 4.5 kW. d. Number of Heating Elements: 2. e. Minimum Recovery Rate: 25 gph with 100 degrees F temperature rise. f. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig. 3. Electrical Characteristics: a. 240 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 4. Tank: Glass lined welded steel; 4 inch diameter inspection port, thermally insulated with minimum 2 inches glass fiber encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish. 5. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature range from 60 to 180 degrees F, flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, high temperature limit thermostat. 6. Heating Elements: Flange-mounted immersion elements; individual elements sheathed with Incoloy corrosion-resistant metal alloy, rated less than 75 W/sq in. 2.02 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure, with stainless steel rotor assembly. B. Impeller: Bronze. C. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. D. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. E. Drive: Flexible coupling. F. Performance: As required for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and complying with conditions of certification, if any. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping work to achieve operating system. C. Pumps: 1. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 22 4000 - 160 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL SEE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE IN DRAWING SET FOR SPECIFIC PRODUCT INFORMATION. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Urinals. C. Sinks. D. Service sinks. E. Drinking fountains. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between fixtures and walls and floors. B. Section 12 3600 - Countertops: Preparation of counters for sinks and lavatories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ASME A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2017). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City of Kent's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 2.02 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 2.03 INSTALLATION A. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. B. Install components level and plumb. 2.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 22 4000 - 161 PLUMBING FIXTURES 2.05 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 2.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. B. Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel. C. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 23 0000 - 162 MECHANICAL DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0000 MECHANICAL DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS PART 1GENERAL 1.01 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Scope: Modify the existing HVAC equipment to service the renovated spaces and new restrooms B. General: The mechanical work will consist of evaluating the existing rooftop HVAC units, labor, materials, equipment, and supervision as necessary to provide a complete mechanical system as outlined in this specification and as indicated on the Architectural plans. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Contractor: All references in this Section shall be defined by Design-Build Mechanical Subcontractor. B. Provide: Where word appears, Contractors shall furnish, install and connect item complete unless shown otherwise. C. Architect/Engineer: Shall bear meaning of Architect and/or his consultants. 1.03 CODES AND ORDINANCES A. Comply with all applicable International Building Codes, International Mechanical Code, International Plumbing Code, National Electrical Code, Washington Administrative Code, Washington State Non-Residential Energy Code and any local authority amendments. B. All work and materials shall conform to the local and State Codes, and all other applicable State laws and regulations, including seismic zone regulations. C. Whenever indicated material, workmanship, arrangement or construction is of higher quality or capacity than that required by the above Codes, the drawings and/or specifications shall govern. D. Should there be any direct conflict between Codes and the drawings and/or specifications, the Codes, rules, and regulations shall govern. 1.04 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Unless otherwise distinctly hereinafter specified, the Contractors shall apply and pay for all necessary permits and inspections required by any Public Authority having Jurisdiction. B. All required utility connection fees shall be paid by the Contractors. 1.05 DESIGN/BUILD RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Design/Build Contractor (D/B) shall be the mechanical contractor as well as the Engineer of Record. In addition to the construction responsibilities, the D/B shall provide complete engineering by a licensed mechanical engineer. The engineering shall include: 1. Preparation of Contract Documents including drawings and mechanical specifications. 2. Coordination with utilities and other design and construction team members. 3. Testing Supervision, Coordination, Observation and Reporting. 4. Cost Estimating. 5. Completion of necessary forms and preparation of documentation for mechanical permits and energy code compliance as pertains to the electrical work. a. Other D/B responsibilities shall include: 1) Training and instruction for the Owner's representatives regarding the subject project. 2) Preparation of Record Drawings for review by Owner's representative. 3) Preparation of Operation & Maintenance Manuals for review by the Owner's representative. b. Design/Build Coordination: The Design/Build (D/B) Contractor shall work closely with the Owner's representative and the design team members to identify exact Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 23 0000 - 163 MECHANICAL DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS requirements and determine the most cost effective means of meeting the Owner's requirements. The D/B Contractor shall utilize his skills and experience to benefit the Owner through careful design, thorough coordination with other trades, and cost effective decisions concerning material cost and labor saving technologies. c. Design Build Criteria: The following documents shall be utilized in preparation of bids and developing Design Build Contract Documents: 1) Section 23 0001 - Mechanical Design Build Criteria. 2) Drawings - Architectural, Civil, Structural. d. Utility Coordination: 1) Coordinate relocation of existing gas utility, and installation of gas utility to serve the expanded facility. 2) Provide all drawings, applications, billing information and load calculations requested by Utility. 3) Coordinate with Design Team on location of gas meter and gas service piping. 4) Provide trenching, raceways, pullropes, bedding, backfill and vaults as required for complete gas service installation. e. Drawings: 1) Design Build subcontractors shall provide drawings in AutoCAD. 2) Background Drawings: (a) Background AutoCAD drawing files are available from Sean Hill at Broderick Architects. (b) Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans will be issued to Design Build (DB) contractor by the Architect on a regular basis as the project design evolves. Maintain communication with the Architect to ensure that the latest plans are being used. The objective is to share backgrounds across multiple trades to avoid a duplication of drawing efforts and facilitate coordination. (c) The DB contractors will need to manipulate colors, lineweights and freeze/thaw layers in the backgrounds as required to produce their own documents. (d) The DB contractors are required to share their internal AutoCAD guidelines to other members of the design team as needed. (e) Title Block: Utilize the Architect's Title Block. The DB Contractor shall insert their own company info for their drawings. f. Test, Adjust and Balance (TAB): Provide TAB services by third party qualified TAB agency. TAB agency shall submit a complete report to the Architect upon completion of the TAB process. TAB process shall follow AABB or NEBB standard practices. g. Record Drawings: Contractors shall maintain an up-to-date set of prints for recording “Record” conditions. At the end of the job all “Record” information shall be transferred to a clean set of prints. The drawings shall record all deviations from the Contract Documents. These changes shall be accurately dimensioned from the building lines and reflect the location and depth of concealed piping below finish grade or finished floor. h. Guarantees: Furnish written guarantee to Owner for period of one year covering all defects in material and workmanship. Should any trouble develop during this period due to defective materials or faulty workmanship, the Contractors shall furnish all necessary labor and material and correct the trouble promptly and without any additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 VISITING THE PREMISES A. The Contractors, before submitting their Bid on the work, must visit the site and familiarize themselves with all visible existing conditions. As a result of having visited the premises, the Contractors shall be responsible for the installation of the work as it relates to such visible existing conditions. Arrangement for site visit shall be made through General Contractor. B. The submission of a bid will be considered an acknowledgement on the part of the Bidder of his visitation to the site. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 23 0000 - 164 MECHANICAL DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS 1.07 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Provide Construction Document Submittals following receipt of Notice To Proceed. B. Documents shall be prepared under the supervision of a registered professional Mechanical Engineer licensed in the State of Washington and shall bear the engineer's stamp and signature. C. Construction Documents: Contractor shall provide complete set of final Mechanical plans, scale 1/8" = 1'-0" minimum. These plans shall indicate all HVAC equipment, ductwork, grilles, required airflows, louvers, economizer dampers, damper actuators, thermostats and controls. D. Load Calculation: Provide mechanical load calculations as required for permit submittal. E. Provide equipment schedules, including grille sizes for air intake and exhaust. Coordinate with design team for final approval of locations and sizes. F. Provide equipment and installation specifications data sheets for materials and equipment. Coordinate with design team placement of equipment, and structural bearing requirements. G. Obtain approval from Architect on system design, drawings, materials, and equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NOT USED. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.01 NOT USED. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 23 0001 - 165 MECHANICAL DESIGN-BUILD CRITERIA SECTION 23 0001 MECHANICAL DESIGN-BUILD CRITERIA PART 1GENERAL 1.01 THE PURPOSE OF THIS OUTLINE IS TO PROVIDE A DESCRIPTION OF THE HVAC ZONES AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS FOR THE PROJECT. 1.02 EXPANDED LOBBY, RECEPTION / CONTROL, RESTROOMS, STORAGE A. Primary Spaces: 1. Lobby, Reception / Control 2. Retail Area 3. Offices B. Associated Spaces: 1. Women's Room 2. Men's Room 3. Storage C. Systems 1. Existing forced air heating and ventilation w/ air-conditioning. 2. Exhaust fan serving Restrooms and Storage controlled by Occupancy Sensor/Timer in each space. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor. 3. Coordinate duct routing and grille placement with Architect. 4. Programmable thermostat per Energy Code. 1.03 EXPANDED EXTERIOR DRIVING RANGE A. Associated Spaces: 1. 14 new driving stations B. Systems 1. Sunstar Heating Products, Inc.: Infrared Gas Heaters SGL Series END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 26 0000 - 166 ELECTRICAL DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0000 ELECTRICAL DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS PART 1GENERAL 1.01 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: The electrical work will consist of all the engineering, labor, materials, equipment, and supervision as necessary to provide a complete electrical system as outlined in this specification and as necessary to serve mechanical and plumbing systems and as indicated on the Architectural plans. See Sheets A8.1, A9.1, E1.1 and E1.2 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Contractor: All references in this Section shall be defined by Design-Build Electrical Subcontractor. B. Provide: Where word appears, Contractors shall furnish, install and connect item complete unless shown otherwise. C. Architect/Engineer: Shall bear meaning of Architect and/or his consultants. 1.03 CODES AND ORDINANCES A. Comply with all applicable International Building Codes, National Electrical Code, Washington Administrative Code, Washington State Non-Residential Energy Code and any local authority amendments. B. All work and materials shall conform to the local and State Codes, and all other applicable State laws and regulations, including seismic zone regulations. C. Whenever indicated material, workmanship, arrangement or construction is of higher quality or capacity than that required by the above Codes, the drawings and/or specifications shall govern. D. Should there be any direct conflict between Codes and the drawings and/or specifications, the Codes, rules, and regulations shall govern. 1.04 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Unless otherwise distinctly hereinafter specified, the Contractors shall apply and pay for all necessary permits and inspections required by any Public Authority having Jurisdiction. B. All required utility connection fees shall be paid by Contractors. 1.05 DESIGN/BUILD RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Design/Build Contractor (D/B) shall be the electrical contractor as well as the Engineer of Record. In addition to the construction responsibilities, the D/B shall provide complete engineering by a licensed electrical engineer. The engineering shall include: 1. Preparation of Contract Documents including drawings and electrical specifications. 2. Coordination with utilities and other design and construction team members. 3. Testing Supervision, Coordination, Observation and Reporting. 4. Cost Estimating. 5. Completion of necessary forms and preparation of documentation for electrical permits and energy code compliance as pertains to the electrical work. a. D/B responsibilities shall include: 1) Training and instruction for the Owner's representatives regarding the subject project. 2) Preparation of Record Drawings for review by Owner's representative. 3) Preparation of Operation & Maintenance Manuals for review by the Owner's representative. b. Design/Build Coordination: The Design/Build (D/B) Contractor shall work closely with the Owner's representative and the design team members to identify exact requirements and determine the most cost effective means of meeting the Owner's requirements. The D/B Contractor shall utilize his skills and experience to benefit the Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 26 0000 - 167 ELECTRICAL DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS Owner through careful design, thorough coordination with other trades, and cost effective decisions concerning material cost and labor saving technologies. c. Electrical/Audio Video Coordination: The DB Contractor shall coordinate work with the EAV Contractor. DB shall include all raceways, floor or wall boxes, pull strings, and other infrastructure in the Electrical Design documents. An isolation transformer and separate audio/visual panel will be required on the project. d. Design Build Criteria: The following documents shall be utilized in preparation of bids and developing Design Build Contract Documents: 1) Section 26 0001 - Electrical Design Build Criteria. 2) Drawings - Architectural, Civil, Structural. e. Utility Coordination: 1) Coordinate installation of electrical power utilities to serve the existing and expanded facility. 2) Contact the utilities and submit application for electrical service within two weeks of receiving Notice to Proceed. 3) Coordinate relocation or removal of existing electrical utilities located in the construction area. 4) Coordinate installation of telephone and broadband utilities to serve the new facility. 5) Coordinate relocation or removal of existing telephone and broadband utilities located in the construction area. 6) Provide all drawings, applications, billing information and load calculations requested by Utilities. 7) Coordinate with Design Team on location of utility transformer, communication pedestals and vaults and routing of underground utility conduits. 8) Provide trenching, conduits, pullropes, bedding, backfill, vaults and conductors required for complete electrical, telephone and broadband service installations. f. Drawings: 1) Design Build subcontractors shall provide drawings in AutoCAD. 2) Background Drawings: (a) Background AutoCAD drawing files are available from Erik de los Reyes at Broderick Architects. (b) Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans will be issued to Design Build (DB) contractor by the Architect on a regular basis as the project design evolves. Maintain communication with the Architect to ensure that the latest plans are being used. The objective is to share backgrounds across multiple trades to avoid a duplication of drawing efforts and facilitate coordination. (c) The DB contractors will need to manipulate colors, lineweights and freeze/thaw layers in the backgrounds as required to produce their own documents. (d) The DB contractors are required to share their internal AutoCAD guidelines to other members of the design team as needed. (e) Reflected Ceiling Plans: The Electrical Designer shall locate lights in the ceiling grid. Ductwork, circuiting, etc. shall be on layers different from the lights and diffusers so that they can be frozen. (f) Title Block: Utilize the Architect's Title Block. The DB Contractor shall insert their own company info for their drawings. g. Record Drawings: Contractors shall maintain an up-to-date set of prints for recording “Record” conditions. At the end of the job all “Record” information shall be transferred to a clean set of prints. The drawings shall record all deviations from the Contract Documents. These changes shall be accurately dimensioned from the building lines and reflect the location and depth of concealed piping below finish grade or finished floor. h. Guarantees: Furnish written guarantee to Owner for period of one year covering all defects in material and workmanship. Should any trouble develop during this period Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 26 0000 - 168 ELECTRICAL DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS due to defective materials or faulty workmanship, the Contractors shall furnish all necessary labor and material and correct the trouble promptly and without any additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 VISITING THE PREMISES A. The Contractors, before submitting their Bid on the work, must visit the site and familiarize himself with all visible existing conditions. As a result of having visited the premises, the Contractors shall be responsible for the installation of the work as it relates to such visible existing conditions. Arrangement for site visit shall be make through General Contractor. B. The submission of a bid will be considered an acknowledgement on the part of the Bidder of his visitation to the site. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.01 NOT USED. 2.02 PART 3INSTALLATION A. Not used. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 26 0001 - 169 ELECTRICAL DESIGN BUILD CRITERIA SECTION 26 0001 ELECTRICAL DESIGN BUILD CRITERIA 1) GENERAL 1.01 THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES SHALL BE UTILIZED IN PREPARATION OF BIDS AND DEVELOPING DESIGN BUILD CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. A. Not every detail and requirement for the electrical system is addressed in this Section. B. The Scope of Work includes utilizing the existing electrical system and distributing power to locations indicated on the Bid Documents: See Sheets A8.1, A9.1, E1.1 and E1.2. 1.02 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. Refer to the one-line diagram in the Bid Documents. B. Coordinate with Utility and determine available short circuit current at transformer secondary. 1.03 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION A. Provide electrical service to facility. 1. Provide load calculations per NEC based on the Design Development plans. 2. Based on the calculations, verify the electrical service capacity. 3. Prepare a One-Line Diagram. 4. Prepare a scaled drawing of the switchgear foot-print and coordinate electrical room size, access and clearances with Architect. 5. Feeders shall be any efficient wiring method approved by Code. MC cable is acceptable. 6. Aluminum feeders allowed for feeders sizes #1/0 and larger. 1.04 INTERIOR LIGHTING A. Provide interior lighting. B. Luminaires shall comply with Washington State Energy Code requirements C. Refer to Luminaire Schedule on Architectural plans. D. Provide Energy Code Lighting Power Allowance calculations early in the design process and determine if the lighting design complies with Code. Notify the lighting designer immediately of the results of the calculations and provide recommendations for adjustments if needed to achieve a compliant design. Repeat calculations and provide feedback as required. E. Provide battery-powered emergency fixtures to meet Code-required minimum footcandle illumination on floor throughout egress pathways. Provide photometric study with calculated footcandles at floor level based on manufacturer's IES photometric files. Coordinate placement and look of emergency fixtures with Architect. F. Provide 120V green LED exit signage with 90 minute battery back-up. 1.05 INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROLS A. Provide interior lighting controls in compliance with Washington State Energy Code unless otherwise noted. 1.06 EXTERIOR LIGHTING ON BUILDING A. Provide decorative illumination of building exterior in coordination with Architect. 1. Control decorative lighting with astronomic timeclock, coordinated with overall campus system. 2. Field verify existing exterior lighting control systems and points of connection. B. Provide Driving Range flood lighting on top of the range roof as specified on the drawings. C. Emergency Lighting: At exterior exits pathways near exit door where there is more than one step up or down, provide exterior battery-powered emergency fixtures to illuminate pathway. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 26 0001 - 170 ELECTRICAL DESIGN BUILD CRITERIA 1.07 COMMUNICATIONS, AUDIO/VIDEO WIRING AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide raceway, pullstrings and boxes only. EAV will require specialty boxes - coordinate with design team for specifics. B. Equipment and wiring not included in Electrical scope. Owner's vendor will provide cable and trim out. C. Coordinate with Architect and comm./data installers on locations of outlets and routing & sizing of raceways. 1.08 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS A. The existing Silent Knight fire alarm system is to be expanded into the new and remolded spaces in accordance with local requirements. B. Fire alarm contractor shall provide design, calculations, drawings, permits, shop drawings, panels, devices, wiring, raceways, terminations, programming, testing, Owner Training and warranty coverage for a complete and operational fire alarm system. C. System shall include also: 1. Monitor critical systems as directed by Fire Marshall. 2. Monitor fire protection sprinkler system. 3. Control fire / smoke dampers. Coordinate with HVAC Contractor to verify locations. 4. Provide duct-mounted smoke detectors in HVAC equipment supplying 2000 CFM or more. Coordinate with HVAC Contractor to verify locations. 1.09 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM A. Provide raceway and boxes only. B. Coordinate requirements with Architect and security vendor. 1.10 DOOR BADGE READER AND HANDS FREE ENTRY SYSTEMS A. Provide raceway and boxes only. B. Coordinate requirements with Architect and door hardware vendor. C. Integrate new system into campus wide security/badge reader system. 1.11 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT POWER CONNECTIONS A. Provide circuits, overcurrent protection, means of disconnect and connections to mechanical equipment. B. Provide power connections and interlock control wiring for water heater and vent fans where applicable. 1.12 ELECTRICAL OUTLET GENERAL REQUIRMENTS A. Obtain a copies of Sheet E1 Power Plan and Sheet E2 Low Voltage Plan and include scope as indicated. 1.13 EGRESS PATHWAYS A. Locations: Contact Architect and determine locations of egress pathways. B. Power: 1. Provide housekeeping receptacles at 50' intervals. C. Exit Signs 1. Consult AHJ for specific requirements. 2. Locate exit signs per Code. D. Emergency Egress Lighting 1. Provide emergency lighting in all areas required by Code. 2. Provide emergency lighting in the following rooms: a. Lobby and Corridors and Public Restrooms Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 26 0001 - 171 ELECTRICAL DESIGN BUILD CRITERIA 1.14 OTHER SPACES A. Coordinate power, lighting, audio/visual and comm./data requirements with Architect. B. See Sheets A8.1, A9.1, E1.1 and E1.2 include scope as indicated. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 26 5100 - 172 INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Exit signs. D. Ballasts and drivers. E. Lamps. F. Luminaire accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0000 Electrical Design Build Requirements B. Section 26 0001 Electrical Design Build Criteria 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; 2012. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations. 2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others. 4. Notify Broderick Architects of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. 1. Lamps: Include rated life, color temperature, color rendering index (CRI), and initial and mean lumen output. C. Certificates for Dimming Ballasts: Manufacturer's documentation of compatibility with dimming controls to be installed. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City of Kent's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 26 5100 - 173 INTERIOR LIGHTING 2. Extra Lamps: Ten percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than two of each type. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any associated remote components. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide three year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers. C. Provide two year manufacturer warranty for all linear fluorescent ballasts. D. Provide five year pro-rata warranty for batteries for emergency lighting units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - LUMINAIRES A. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com. B. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; www.lutron.com. C. Beta Calco. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, except where individual luminaire types are designated with substitutions not permitted. 2.02 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, except where individual luminaire types are designated with substitutions not permitted. 2.03 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. G. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4. 2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suitable for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials. 3. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling adapters. 2.04 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. B. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. C. Battery: Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 26 5100 - 174 INTERIOR LIGHTING 1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated. D. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation. E. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. 2.05 EXIT SIGNS A. Description: Internally illuminated exit signs with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. 1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location. 2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location. 2.06 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS A. Ballasts - General Requirements: 1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). 2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards. 2.07 LAMPS A. Lamps - General Requirements: 1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire. 2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency standards. 4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Broderick Architects to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature. 2.08 ACCESSORIES END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 26 5600 - 175 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior luminaires. B. Lamps. C. Luminaire accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement parts. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City of Kent's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Lamps: Ten percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than two of each type. 1.04 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide three year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings. 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. G. HID Luminaires: 2.03 LAMPS A. Lamps - General Requirements: 1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 26 5600 - 176 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency standards. 4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Broderick Architects to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Stems for Suspended Luminaires: Steel tubing, minimum 1/2" size, factory finished to match luminaire or field-painted as directed. B. Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc-plated steel, minimum 1/4" size, field-painted as directed. C. EMT Conduit: Provide rigid EMT conduit at the rooftop mounted Driving Range flood lights. Paint to match metal roof. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 31 2200 - 177 GRADING SECTION 31 2200 GRADING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish grading. B. Tie new footing drains into the provided storm connection. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2316 - Excavation. B. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Trenching and backfilling for utilities. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Washington, Highway Department standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Fairway Grade Topdressing Sand, T.E. Walrath, Tacoma WA. B. Structural Fill: Imported borrow. 1. Graded. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 3. Complying with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Verify the absence of standing or ponding water. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. C. Locate, identify, and protect from damage above- and below-grade utilities to remain. D. Provide temporary means and methods to remove all standing or ponding water from areas prior to grading. E. Protect site features to remain, including but not limited to bench marks, survey control points, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs, from damage by grading equipment and vehicular traffic. 3.03 ROUGH GRADING A. Remove and replace soils deemed unsuitable by classification and which are excessively moist due to lack surface water control. 3.04 SOIL REMOVAL AND STOCKPILING A. Stockpile topsoil to be re-used on site. B. Stockpile subsoil to be re-used on site. C. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet; protect from erosion. 3.05 FINISH GRADING A. Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted. B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 31 2200 - 178 GRADING C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches. D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches. E. Place topsoil in areas where seeding are indicated. F. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade. G. Place topsoil to nominal depth of 6 inches. H. Place topsoil during dry weather. I. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. J. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage. K. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. L. Lightly compact placed topsoil. M. Maintain stability of topsoil during inclement weather. Replace topsoil in areas where surface water has eroded thickness below specifications. 3.06 REPAIR AND RESTORATION A. Existing Facilities, Utilities, and Site Features to Remain: If damaged due to this work, repair or replace to original condition. B. Trees to Remain: If damaged due to this work, trim broken branches and repair bark wounds; if root damage has occurred, obtain instructions from Broderick Architects as to remedy. C. Other Existing Vegetation to Remain: If damaged due to this work, replace with vegetation of equivalent species and size. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 31 2316 - 179 EXCAVATION SECTION 31 2316 EXCAVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating for footings, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, and utilities within the building. B. Trenching for utilities outside the building (Infiltration / Dispersion system by others). C. Tie new footing drains into the provided storm connection. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 5713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control: Slope protection and erosion control. B. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Grading. C. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches outside the building to utility main connections. D. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Fill materials, backfilling, and compacting. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Bedding and Fill to Correct Over-Excavation: 1. See Section 31 2323 for bedding and corrective fill materials at general excavations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the work are as indicated. B. Survey existing adjacent structures and improvements and establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. 1. Resurvey benchmarks during installation of excavation support and protection systems and notify City of Kent if any changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. C. Determine the prevailing groundwater level prior to excavation. If the proposed excavation extends less than 1 foot into the prevailing groundwater, control groundwater intrusion with perimeter drains routed to sump pumps, or as directed by Broderick Architects. If the proposed excavation extends more than 1 foot into the prevailing groundwater, control groundwater intrusion with a comprehensive dewatering procedures, or as directed by Geotechnical Engineer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. C. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. Provide temporary means and methods, as required, to maintain surface water diversion until no longer needed, or as directed by Broderick Architects. 3.03 EXCAVATING A. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations. B. Notify Broderick Architects of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. D. Provide temporary means and methods, as required, to remove all water from excavations until directed by Broderick Architects. Remove and replace soils deemed suitable by classification and which are excessively moist due to lack of dewatering or surface water control. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 31 2316 - 180 EXCAVATION 3.04 FILLING AND BACKFILLING A. Do not fill or backfill until all debris, water, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials have been removed from excavation. B. See Section 31 2323 for fill, backfill, and compaction requirements at general excavations. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. B. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Divert surface flow from rains or water discharges from the excavation. B. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. C. Protect open excavations from rainfall, runoff, freezing groundwater, or excessive drying so as to maintain foundation subgrade in satisfactory, undisturbed condition. D. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. E. Keep excavations free of standing water and completely free of water during concrete placement. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 31 2316.13 - 181 TRENCHING SECTION 31 2316.13 TRENCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trenching for utilities outside the building (Infiltration / Dispersion system by others). B. Tie new footing drains into the provided storm connection. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Site grading. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. B. Subgrade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54- kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18 in.) Drop; 2018. B. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012, with Editorial Revision (2015). C. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012, with Editorial Revision (2015). D. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2017. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill - Fill Type Common Borrow: Subsoil excavated on-site. 1. Graded. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 3. Complying with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL. B. Granular Fill - Gravel: Pit run washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GW. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the work are as indicated. 3.02 TRENCHING A. Notify Broderick Architects of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. F. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. G. Remove excess excavated material from site. H. Provide temporary means and methods, as required, to remove all water from trenching until directed by the Broderick Architects. Remove and replace soils deemed unsuitable by classification and which are excessively moist due to lack of dewatering or surface water control. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 31 2316.13 - 182 TRENCHING I. Determine the prevailing groundwater level prior to trenching. If the proposed trench extends less than 1 foot into the prevailing groundwater, control groundwater intrusion with perimeter drains routed to sump pumps, or as directed by the Broderick Architects. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT A. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. E. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. F. Correct areas that are over-excavated. 1. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97 percent of maximum dry density. G. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: H. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.05 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Utility Piping: 1. Bedding: Use general fill. 2. Cover with general fill. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density. B. At French Drains: 1. Use granular fill. 2. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), AASHTO T 180, or ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"). C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 31 2323 - 183 FILL SECTION 31 2323 FILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for footings, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, and utilities within the building. B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. C. Filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal (demolition) operations. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 5713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control: Slope protection and erosion control. B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. D. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Site grading. E. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. F. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches outside the building to utility main connections. G. Section 31 2323 - Fill H. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54- kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18 in.) Drop; 2018. B. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012, with Editorial Revision (2015). C. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012, with Editorial Revision (2015). D. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2017. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data for Manufactured Fill. C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used, including manufactured fill. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. B. Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 31 2323 - 184 FILL PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. Structural Fill: Imported borrow. 1. Graded. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. B. Granular Fill - Gravel : Pit run washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GW. C. Granular Fill - Pea Gravel: Natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter. 1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GM. D. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter. 1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol SW. E. Topsoil: See Section 31 2200. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven. B. Vapor Retarder: 10 mil thick, polyethylene. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. C. Verify areas to be filled are not compromised with surface or ground water. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Scarify and proof roll subgrade surface to a depth of 6 inches to identify soft spots. B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. C. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. D. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.03 FILLING A. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. E. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. F. Correct areas that are over-excavated. 1. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97 percent of maximum dry density. G. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: H. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. I. Maintain temporary means and methods, as required, to remove all water while fill is being placed as required, or until directed by Broderick Architects. Remove and replace soils deemed unsuitable by classification and which are excessively moist due to lack of dewatering or surface water control. 3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Under Slabs-On-Grade: Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 31 2323 - 185 FILL 1. Use granular fill. 2. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3. Cover with sand. a. Depth: 2 inches. b. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. B. At Foundation Walls and Footings: 1. Use general fill. 2. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 3. Compact each lift to 90 percent of maximum dry density. 4. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Filling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Soil Fill Materials: 1. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO T 180. 2. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. 3. Proof roll compacted fill at surfaces that will be under slabs-on-grade and paving. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 32 1123 - 186 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES SECTION 32 1123 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aggregate base course. B. Paving aggregates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of site for base course. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Compacted fill under base course. C. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving: Finish and binder asphalt courses. D. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Finish concrete surface course. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54- kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18 in.) Drop; 2018. B. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012, with Editorial Revision (2015). C. ASTM D1556/D1556M - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016). D. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012, with Editorial Revision (2015). E. ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 2015. F. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2017. G. ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil- Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2017. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate, complying with State of Washington Highway Department standard. B. Coarse Aggregate: Natural washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GW. C. Blended Aggregate: Pit run stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GW. D. Medium Aggregate: Natural stone; pea gravel, washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter. 1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GM. E. Fine Aggregate: Sand; complying with State of Washington Highway Department standard. F. Fine Aggregate: Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter. 1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol SW. G. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of aggregate materials. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 32 1123 - 187 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES B. Where aggregate materials are specified using ASTM D2487 classification, test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Under Bituminous Concrete Paving: 1.Place coarse aggregate to a total compacted thickness of 6 inches. 2.Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. B. Under Portland Cement Concrete Paving: 1.Place coarse aggregate to a total compacted thickness of 4 inches. 2.Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. C. Place aggregate in maximum 4 inch layers and roller compact to specified density. D. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated. E. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction. F. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content. G. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Compaction density testing will be performed on compacted aggregate base course in accordance with ASTM D1556/D1556M, ASTM D2167, or ASTM D6938. C. Results will be evaluated in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with AASHTO T 180, ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), or ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"). D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 32 1216 - 188 ASPHALT PAVING SECTION 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aggregate base course. B. Single course bituminous concrete paving. C. Double course bituminous concrete paving. D. Surface sealer. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Compacted subgrade for paving. C. Section 32 1123 - Aggregate Base Courses: Aggregate base course. D. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Concrete substrate. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AI MS-2 - Asphalt Mix Design Methods; 2015. B. AI MS-19 - Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual; 2008. C. ASTM D946 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction; 2009a. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Washington Highways standard. B. Mixing Plant: Complying with State of Washington Highways standard. C. Obtain materials from same source throughout. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. B. Place bitumen mixture when temperature is not more than 15 F degrees below bitumen supplier's bill of lading and not more than maximum specified temperature. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable code for paving work on public property. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D946. B. Aggregate for Base Course : Angular crushed washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GW. C. Aggregate for Binder Course : Angular crushed washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GW. D. Aggregate for Wearing Course : Angular crushed washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GW. E. Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime or other mineral dust, free of foreign matter. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 32 1216 - 189 ASPHALT PAVING 2.03 ASPHALT PAVING MIXES AND MIX DESIGN A. Base Course: 3.0 to 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with AI MS-2. B. Binder Course: 4.5 to 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with AI MS-2. C. Wearing Course: 5 to 7 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with AI MS-2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 BASE COURSE A. Place and compact base course. 3.02 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - SINGLE COURSE A. Install Work in accordance with State of Washington Highways standards. B. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat. C. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment. D. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks. 3.03 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE A. Place asphalt binder course within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat. B. Place wearing course within two hours of placing and compacting binder course. C. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment. D. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks. 3.04 SEAL COAT A. Apply seal coat to surface course in accordance with AI MS-19. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for 4 days or until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 32 1313 - 190 CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete sidewalks and integral curbs. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints. C. Section 32 1123 - Aggregate Base Course 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016. C. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2018. D. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2011. E. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2018. F. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction; 2018. G. ASTM D8139 - Standard Specification for Semi-Rigid, Closed-Cell Polypropylene Foam, Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction; 2017. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PAVING ASSEMBLIES A. Design paving for parking and light duty commercial vehicles. B. Concrete Sidewalks and Median Barrier: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, 4 inches thick, buff color Portland cement, exposed aggregate finish. 2.02 FORM MATERIALS A. Wood form material, profiled to suit conditions. B. Joint Filler: Preformed; non-extruding bituminous type (ASTM D1751) or sponge rubber or cork (ASTM D1752). 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: Types specified in Section 03 3000. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03 3000. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class A. B. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal. 1. Material: ASTM D8139, semi-rigid, closed-cell polypropylene foam. 2.06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 32 1313 - 191 CONCRETE PAVING B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Broderick Architects for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard, or as recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions. 2.07 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBBASE A. See Section 32 1123 for construction of base course for work of this Section. 3.02 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. 3.03 REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcement at top of slabs-on-grade. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. 3.05 JOINTS A. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints. B. Provide scored joints. 1. At 5 feet intervals. 2. Between sidewalks and curbs. 3. Between curbs and pavement. C. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of slab. 3.06 FINISHING A. Area Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to pavement direction. B. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. END OF SECTION Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 32 3113 - 192 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES SECTION 32 3113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Scope of Work: Provide 8' fencing and gate to match the existing installation at the east side of the project. B. Posts, rails, and frames. C. Wire fabric. D. Manual gates with related hardware. E. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete anchorage for posts. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. C. ASTM A392 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric; 2011a (Reapproved 2017). D. ASTM F567 - Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence; 2014a. E. CLFMI CLF-PM0610 - Product Manual; 2017. F. CLFMI CLF-SFR0111 - Security Fencing Recommendations; 2014. G. FS RR-F-191/1D - Fencing, Wire and Post Metal (Chain-Link Fence Fabric); 1990. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and schedule of components. See CLFMI CLF-SFR0111 for planning and design recommendations. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Line Posts: 1.9 inch diameter. B. Corner and Terminal Posts: 2.38 inch diameter. C. Gate Posts: 3-1/2 inch diameter. D. Top and Mid Brace Rail: 1.66 inch diameter, plain end, sleeve coupled. E. Bottom Rail: 1.66 inch diameter, plain end, sleeve coupled. F. Gate Frame: 1.66 inch diameter for welded fabrication. G. Fabric: 1 inch diamond mesh interwoven wire, 6 gage, 0.1920 inch thick, top selvage knuckle end closed, bottom selvage twisted tight. H. Tension Wire: 6 gage, 0.1920 inch thick steel, single strand. Riverbend Driving Range Phase III Re-Bid 32 3113 - 193 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 2.02 MATERIALS A. Posts, Rails, and Frames: 1. Line Posts: Type I round in accordance with FS RR-F-191/1D 2. Terminal, Corner, Rail, Brace, and Gate Posts: Type I round in accordance with FS RR-F- 191/1D. B. Wire Fabric: 1. ASTM A392 zinc coated steel chain link fabric. 2. Comply with CLFMI CLF-PM0610. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Line Posts: 1.9 inch diameter. B. Corner and Terminal Posts: 2.38 inch diameter. C. Fabric: 1 inch diamond mesh interwoven wire, 6 gage, 0.1920 inch thick, top selvage knuckle end closed, bottom selvage twisted tight. 2.04 MANUAL GATES AND RELATED HARDWARE A. Hardware for Double Swinging Gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60 inches high, 3 for taller gates; drop bolt on inactive leaf engaging socket stop set in concrete, active leaf latched to inactive leaf preventing raising of drop bolt, padlock hasp; keepers to hold gate in fully open position. B. Hinges: Finished to match fence components. 1. Brackets: Round. 2. Closing: Manual. C. Latches: Finished to match fence components. 1. Brackets: Round. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Caps: Cast steel galvanized; sized to post diameter, set screw retainer. B. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; steel. 2.06 FINISHES A. Components (Other than Fabric): Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M, at 1.7 ounces per square foot. B. Hardware: Hot-dip galvanized to weight required by ASTM A153/A153M. C. Accessories: Same finish as framing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 3.02 PREPARATION A. Removal: Obstructions or debris. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install framework, fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with ASTM F567. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch. C. Do not infringe on adjacent property lines. END OF SECTION AIA Document A201' - 2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or adch c.vs) Riverbend Driving Range Phase III ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: Rive be Meeker Ra The author of this document has added information needed for its Kent, WA 98032 completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and THE OWNER: Deletions Report that notes added (Name, legal status and address) information as well as revisions to City of Kent the standard form text is available 220 Fourth Avenue South from the author and should be Kent, WA 98032 reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates THE ARCHITECT: where the author has added (Name, legal status and address) necessary information and where Broderick Architects the author has added to or deleted 55 South Atlantic St., Suite 301 from the original AIA text. Seattle, WA 98134 This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an TABLE OF ARTICLES attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT Init. AIA Document A201®— 2007. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The "American Institute of Architects AIA the AIA Logo, "A201," and "AIA Contract Documentsare registered 1 trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:28:12 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 / which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (389ADA37) project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 2 INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are section headings.) Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1, 15.2 Addenda 1.1.1, 3.11 Additional Costs, Claims for 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 6.1.1, 7.3.7.5, 10.3, 15.1.4 Additional Inspections and Testing 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 Additional Insured 11.1.4 Additional Time, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.5 Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13 Allowances 3.8, 7.3.8 All-risk Insurance 11.3.1, 11.3.1.1 Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10, 11.1.3 Approvals 2.1.1, 2.2.2, 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.5.1 Arbitration 8.3.1, 11.3.10, 13.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT 4 Architect, Definition of 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.4, 3.12.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.7, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.3, 9.6.4, 15.1.3, 15.2 Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses 2.4, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 Architect’s Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5 Architect’s Approvals 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7 Architect’s Authority to Reject Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect’s Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Architect’s Decisions 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 15.2, 15.3 Architect’s Inspections 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Architect’s Instructions 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.5.2 Architect’s Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Architect’s Project Representative 4.2.10 Architect’s Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5, 15.2 Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.7 Architect’s Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architect’s Site Visits 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Asbestos 10.3.1 Attorneys’ Fees 3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.3 Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1, 6.1.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1, 5.2.1, 11.4.1 Binding Dispute Resolution 9.7, 11.3.9, 11.3.10, 13.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance 11.3.2 Bonds, Lien 7.3.7.4, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Bonds, Performance, and Payment 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 3 Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 Certificates for Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.3 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 13.5.4 Certificates of Insurance 9.10.2, 11.1.3 Change Orders 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9, 12.1.2, 15.1.3 Change Orders, Definition of 7.2.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 2.2.1, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.3.9 Claims, Definition of 15.1.1 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 15.4.1 Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 7.3.9, 10.3.2, 15.1.4 Claims for Additional Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for 3.7.4 Claims for Damages 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Claims Subject to Arbitration 15.3.1, 15.4.1 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.1, 15.1.4 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration 3.9.1, 4.2.4 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 13.7 Compliance with Laws 1.6, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 Consent, Written 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.3.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2 Consolidation or Joinder 15.4.4 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor’s 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance 15.1.3 Contract, Definition of 1.1.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 5.4.1.1, 11.3.9, 14 Contract Administration 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.2.5, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1.1 Contract Sum 3.7.4, 3.8, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4, 15.2.5 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5.1, 15.2.5 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 CONTRACTOR 3 project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 4 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, 6.1.2 Contractor’s Construction Schedules 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Contractor’s Employees 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner’s Forces 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8 Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1 Contractor’s Representations 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8 Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents 3.2 Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work 9.7 Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1, 15.1.6 Contractor’s Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.4, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.2 Contractor’s Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Contractor’s Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 Contractual Liability Insurance 11.1.1.8, 11.2 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.11 Copyrights 1.5, 3.17 Correction of Work 2.3, 2.4, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of 7.3.7 Costs 2.4, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.3, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 Cutting and Patching 3.14, 6.2.5 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3, 12.2.4 Damage to the Work 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.3.1, 12.2.4 Damages, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Damages for Delay 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2 Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8.1.3 Day, Definition of 8.1.4 Decisions of the Architect 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 15.2, 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1 Definitions 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 15.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1 Delays and Extensions of Time 3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Disputes 6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11 Drawings, Definition of 1.1.5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 3.11 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Emergencies 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.4 Employees, Contractor’s 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Equipment, Labor, Materials or 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 5 Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.3 Extensions of Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Failure of Payment 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Financial Arrangements, Owner’s 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 11.3.1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials 10.2.4, 10.3 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2.1 Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Initial Decision 15.2 Initial Decision Maker, Definition of 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker, Decisions 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 10.2.8, 10.4 Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.5.2 Instruments of Service, Definition of 1.1.7 Insurance 3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 11 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery 11.3.2 Insurance, Contractor’s Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Insurance, Loss of Use 11.3.3 Insurance, Owner’s Liability 11.2 Insurance, Property 10.2.5, 11.3 Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9.1 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4 Interest 13.6 Interpretation 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1 Interpretations, Written 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 15.1.4 Judgment on Final Award 15.4.2 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Labor Disputes 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations 1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Liens 2.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Limitations, Statutes of 12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1 Limitations of Liability 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.1.2, 11.2, 11.3.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1.5, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15 Loss of Use Insurance 11.3.3 Material Suppliers 1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10.5 Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 6 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Mechanic’s Lien 2.1.2, 15.2.8 Mediation 8.3.1, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1 Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1 Notice 2.2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.12.9, 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2, 15.2.8, 15.4.1 Notice, Written 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4.1 Notice of Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.4 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Observations, Contractor’s 3.2, 3.7.4 Occupancy 2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.3.1.5 Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2.1.1 Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Owner’s Authority 1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.10, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7 Owner’s Financial Capability 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Owner’s Liability Insurance 11.2 Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work 2.4, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work 2.3 Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9, 11.3.1.5 Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6.2.5 Patents 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Payment, Failure of 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Payment, Final 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 12.3, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4 Payments, Progress 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 PCB 10.3.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.7.4, 10.2.2 project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 7 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.1 Product Data, Definition of 3.12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Progress Payments 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3 Project, Definition of 1.1.4 Project Representatives 4.2.10 Property Insurance 10.2.5, 11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Rejection of Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens 9.10.2 Representations 3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.10.1 Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.10, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 13.2.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and Architect 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14, 15.4 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration 15.4.1 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.4 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Samples, Definition of 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Site Inspections 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Site Visits, Architect’s 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 Specifications, Definition of 1.1.6 Specifications 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14 Statute of Limitations 13.7, 15.4.1.1 Stopping the Work 2.3, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 Subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7 Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.7, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3 Submittal Schedule 3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7 Subrogation, Waivers of 6.1.1, 11.3.7 Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 13.7 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.8.1 project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 8 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of Architect 4.1.3 Substitutions of Materials 3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8 Sub-subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions 3.7.4 Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.7, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 Surety 5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 Surety, Consent of 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Surveys 2.2.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 5.4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 5.4.1.1, 14 Taxes 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.7.4 Termination by the Contractor 14.1, 15.1.6 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.6 Termination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4 Termination of the Architect 4.1.3 Termination of the Contractor 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Time Limits 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15.1.2, 15.4 Time Limits on Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 13.7, 15.1.2 Title to Work 9.3.2, 9.3.3 Transmission of Data in Digital Form 1.6 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Unit Prices 7.3.3.2, 7.3.4 Use of Documents 1.1.1, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3 Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.4.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 9.10.5, 13.4.2, 15.1.6 Waiver of Claims by the Owner 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Waiver of Liens 9.10.2, 9.10.4 Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, 11.3.7 Warranty 3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7 Weather Delays 15.1.5.2 Work, Definition of 1.1.3 Written Consent 1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2 Written Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Written Notice 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4.1 Written Orders 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.2 project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 9 ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS § 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements. § 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties. § 1.1.3 THE WORK The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. § 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors. § 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. § 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. § 1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials. § 1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section 14.2.2. § 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 10 § 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. § 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. § 1.3 CAPITALIZATION Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. § 1.4 INTERPRETATION In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and articles such as “the” and “an,” but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. § 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE § 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights. § 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect’s consultants. § 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form, they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 GENERAL § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative. § 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein. § 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. Thereafter, the Contractor may only request such evidence if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum; or (3) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due. The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 11 the portion of the Work affected by a material change. After the Owner furnishes the evidence, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. § 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. § 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. § 2.2.4 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services. § 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. § 2.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. § 2.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 GENERAL § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term “Contractor” means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative. § 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 12 § 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. § 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. § 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. § 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities. § 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. § 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 13 facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. § 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections 3.12.8 or 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. § 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. § 3.5 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. § 3.6 TAXES The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. § 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. § 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. § 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. § 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may proceed as provided in Article 15. § 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 14 the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. § 3.8 ALLOWANCES § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. § 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, .1 Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and .3 Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2. § 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. § 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. § 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) that the Architect requires additional time to review. Failure of the Architect to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. § 3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES § 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. § 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. § 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 15 § 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. § 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. § 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. § 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. § 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. § 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. § 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. § 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect’s approval thereof. § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. § 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 16 required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents. § 3.13 USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. § 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. § 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor’s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. § 3.15 CLEANING UP § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from and about the Project. § 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. § 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. § 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 17 § 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. § 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 GENERAL § 4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. § 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. § 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. § 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3.1. § 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 18 § 4.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. § 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. § 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. § 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. § 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. § 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 19 § 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 DEFINITIONS § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term “Subcontractor” does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. § 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Sub-subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub- subcontractor. § 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) that the Architect requires additional time for review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. § 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. § 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 20 be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. § 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract. § 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. § 5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the subcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS § 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article 15. § 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term “Contractor” in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. § 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. § 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. § 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. § 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 21 the Owner’s or separate contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. § 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction. § 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. § 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. § 6.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 GENERAL § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. § 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. § 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 The change in the Work; .2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and .3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. § 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. § 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. § 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 22 .4 As provided in Section 7.3.7. § 7.3.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. § 7.3.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. § 7.3.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. § 7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.7 shall be limited to the following: .1 Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance; .2 Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; .3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and .5 Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. § 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. § 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. § 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK The Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 23 ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 DEFINITIONS § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. § 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. § 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. § 8.1.4 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. § 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. § 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. § 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. § 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or by changes ordered in the Work; or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration; or by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. § 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. § 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 CONTRACT SUM The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. § 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. § 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 24 § 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. § 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. § 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. § 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. § 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. § 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on- site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. § 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 25 .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or a separate contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. § 9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such payment on the next Certificate for Payment. § 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. § 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. § 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. § 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law. § 9.6.5 Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. § 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. § 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 26 appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shut- down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. § 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. § 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section 11.3.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. § 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 27 will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. § 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees. § 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. § 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. § 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. § 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Sub- subcontractors; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 28 § 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. § 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. § 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18. § 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. § 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. § 10.2.8 INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. § 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. § 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 29 § 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity. § 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. § 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence. § 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. § 10.4 EMERGENCIES In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor’s employees; .3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor’s employees; .4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .7 Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and .8 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18. § 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 30 of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness. § 11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include (1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s completed operations. § 11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual liability insurance. § 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE § 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s risk “all-risk” or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors in the Project. § 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an “all-risk” or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. § 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. § 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. § 11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work in transit. § 11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 31 otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. § 11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. § 11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner’s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner’s property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. § 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. § 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. § 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. § 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub- subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub- subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. § 11.3.8 A loss insured under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. § 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner’s duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 32 Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as determined in accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. § 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner’s exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the directions of the arbitrators. § 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. § 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time. § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner’s expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, such costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor’s expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. § 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 33 § 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. § 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. § 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. § 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 GOVERNING LAW The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that, if the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. § 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. § 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. § 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the firm or entity, or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at, or sent by registered or certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to, the last business address known to the party giving notice. § 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES § 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. § 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach there under, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 34 § 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS § 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor. § 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense. § 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. § 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. § 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. § 13.6 INTEREST Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. § 13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 13.7. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons: .1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped; .2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be stopped; project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 35 .3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or .4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor’s request, reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1. § 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less. § 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages. § 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. § 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor .1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. § 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and .3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. § 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. § 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. § 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 36 § 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent .1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. § 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause. § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. § 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 CLAIMS § 15.1.1 DEFINITION A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term “Claim” also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. § 15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMS Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. § 15.1.3 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker. § 15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. § 15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME § 15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary. § 15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 37 § 15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 15.2 INITIAL DECISION § 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, 11.3.9, and 11.3.10, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. § 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. § 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense. § 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. § 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution. § 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. § 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within the time required, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 38 § 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy. § 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. § 15.3 MEDIATION § 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.6 shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution. § 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings. § 15.3.3 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4 ARBITRATION § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. § 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim. § 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER § 15.4.4.1 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). § 15.4.4.2 Either party, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Init. / AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 39 additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent. § 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement. project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC Additions and Deletions Report for AIA® Document A201® – 2007 This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text. Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020. Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201® – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, "A201," and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 1 PAGE 1 Kent City Hall Terrace 220 Fourth Avenue South Kent, WA 98032 ... City of Kent 220 Fourth Avenue South Kent, WA 98032 ... Broderick Architects 55 South Atlantic St., Suite 301 Seattle, WA 98134 project: #Pln ÀOHPDF Explode_01 AC23.pln printed: 9/17/20 © Broderick Architects, PLLC AIA Document D401™ – 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No.1903102180 which expires on 09/17/2021, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA31) 1 Certification of Document's Authenticity AIA® Document D401™ – 2003 I, Kevin Broderick, hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 15:23:21 ET on 09/17/2020 under Order No. 1903102180 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA® Document A201TM - 2007, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report. _____________________________________________________________ (Signed) _____________________________________________________________ (Title) _____________________________________________________________ (Dated) KENT PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BOND TO CITY OF KENT KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That We, the undersigned, Christensen, Inc., General Contractor 35 p(04(jp31, Bad Travelers Ca8ualty and Surety Company of Amer'ica a Corporation organized and existaing under the )aws of the State of Washington, as a Surety Corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become Surety upon bonds of Contractors with Municipal Corporations, as Surety, are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the CITY OF KENT in the pena) sum of One Million Seven Hundred Thousand $sixnunsoanoootiootsi,zoo,eogitOgether W1th an)/ adjustmentsi up or dOWn, in the kOtal contraCt price because of changes in the contract work, for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or personal representatives, as the case may be, This obligation is entered into in pursuance of the statutes of the State of Washington, and the Codes and Ordinances of the CITY OF KENT. Nevertheless, the conditions of the above obligation are such that: WHEREAS, under and pursuant to a motion, duly made, seconded and passed by the City Counci1 of the City of Kent, King County, Washington, the Mayor of the City of Kent has let or is about to fet to the above bounden Principal, a certain contract, the said contract provfding for construction of Riverbend Drtving Range - Phase III/Project Number: 20-04 (which contract is referred to herein and is made a part hereof as though attached hereto), and WHEREAS, the Principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the contract, and undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth: NOW, THEREFORE, for non-FHWA projects orily, if the Principal shall faithfully perform all the provisions of said contract in the manner and within the time herein set forth, or within such extensioris of time as may be granted under the said contract, and shall pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors and material men, and al( persons who shall supply the Principal or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of said work and shail indemnify and hold the CITY OF KENT harmless from any damage or expense by reason of failure of performance as specified in said contract or from defects appearing or developing in the material or workmanship provided or peformed under said contract, then and in that event this obligation shall be void; but othemise it shall be and remain in ful) force and effect. IN \/VITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounden parties have executed this instrument under their separate seals. The name and corporate seal (if required by (aw) of each corporate party is hereto affixed and duly signed by its undersigned representatives pursuant to authority of its governing body. PrOVided tO Buildets Exchange Of WA, Ina. For usage COnditiOnS Agreement 8ee WWW.bXWa.COm - AlWa3tS verify SCal TWO WITNESSES: uOniqd tf?)IA)5)M#'f ffoe Prs.h PRINT NAME DATE:il-i /'20'Z } CORPORATE SEAL: Christensen, Inc., General Contractor PRINCIPAL (enter prlnclpal's name above) DATE: l l 'l l'lOl\ CORPORATE SEAL: Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America SURETY BY: DATE: 1-6-2021 7[1[; Attorney in Fad ADDRESS: 1802BlackLakeB1vdSW#301 Olympia, WA 98512 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE SEAL I hereby certify that I am the (Assistant) Secretary of the Corporation named as Principal in the within Bond; that Who signed the said bond on behalf ofthe Principal of the said Corporation; that I know his signature thereto is genuine, and that said Bond was duly signed, sealed, and attested for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. SECRETARY OR ASSISTANT SECRETARY proVided tO Builders gxchange Of WA, InC. For usage COnditiOnS Agreement See WwW.bXwa.COm - AlWays Verif5t SCal 4!k TRAVELERS-j Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Travelers Casualty and Surety Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company are corporations duiy organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do heretiy make, constitute and appoint Tfffany Karpavfcfus of Ofyrnpia, Washington, their tnie and lawful Attorney-in-Fact to sign, execute, seal and acknowiedge any and all bonds, recogn'izances, condit'ionai undertakings and other writings obligatory 'in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in theirbus'iness of guarantemng the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or pernYitted in any actions or proceed'ings allowed by Jaw. IN WITNESS WHEREOF. the Comnanies have caused this 'instniment tobe signed, and theircorporate seals tobe hereto affixed, th'is 3rd dayofFebruary, 2017. State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. BY, M 'Robert L. Raney, SerVioe President Marre C. Tetreault, Notary PublicMarre C. Tetreault, Notary Public On this the 3rd day of February, 2017, before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Matine 1nsurance Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the forego'ing instniment forthe purposes there'in conta'ined by saigriing on behalf of Yhe corporattons by himself as a duly authortzed officer. In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and offic'ial seal. My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2021 This Power of Attomey is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Travelers Casuaity and Surety Company o(America, Traveters Casuatty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, which resolutions are now in full force and e'ffect, reading as follows: RE80LVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attomeys-in-Fact and Agents to ad for and on behalf ofthe Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescrtbe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seai bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RE80LVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Execukive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one ormore officers oremployees ofth'is Company, promded that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER' RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizanoe, contract oT indemn'ity, or writing ob1'igatory ain the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, anyVice Chairman, any Executive Vi> President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice Presaident, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, 'if required) by one or more Attomeys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the pomr prescribed 'in h'is or her certificate or the'ir certificates of authonty or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a witten delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the fol(owing officers: President, any Executive Via= President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attomey or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, ResidentAssistant Secretartes orAttomeys-in-Fact for purposes only of execuUng and attesting bonds and undertakings and otherwritings obiigatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power ofAttomey or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shaJl be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such faoimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respea to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. t, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Travelers Casuaity and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine )nsurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing 'is a tnie and corred copy of the Power of Attomey executed by said Companies, which remains in full force and effect. Dated this 6th day of January 2021 4!Ii"'-t.hu"'es<may To varffyHzeaimsenud$ofhbkimrofAhmezphbisemllusat1400-421-3880. NeammferhehaabevcnamadAthima>-us raaandllsidabiJsafghabondhowhidhhepowerisagbidied. 111112021 about:blank State of Washington Department of Labor & Industries Prevaiting Wage Section - Tetephone 360-902-5335 PO Box 44540, Otympia, WA 98504-4540 Washington State Prevailing Wage The PREVAILING WAGES tisted here include both the hourty wage rate and the hourty rate of fringe benefits. On pubtic works projects, worker's wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this totat. A brief description of overtime catculation requirements are provided on the Benefit Code Key. Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 1211112020 Count¡¿Trade King Ashestos Abatement Workers King Boitermakers King Brick Mason King Brick Mason King Building Service Empþyees King Buitding Service EmplSye5 King Building Service Emplgyees King Building Service Emp&yges King Cabinet Makers (ln Shop_) King Carpsnters King CarpSntgru King Carps¡lgrS King Carps¡ç¡g King CarpS¡_tglg King Carpsnlers King Carpen¡Eg¡g King Cement Masons King Cement Masons King Cement Masons King Cement Masons Job Classification W"gg Hotiday Overtime Note Journey l-evel Journey Level Journey Level Poi nter-Cautker-Cteaner Janitor Traveting Waxer/Shampooer Window Cleaner (Non-Scaffotd) Window Cteaner (Scaffotd) Journey Level Acousticat Worker Carpenter Carpenters on Stationary Toots Creosoted Materia[ Ftoor Finisher Ftoor Layer Scaffotd Erector Apptication of atI Composition Mastic Apptication of atI Epoxy Material Apptication of atI Ptastic MateriaI Apptication of Seating Compound Apptication of Undertayment Buitding GeneraI Composition or Katman Ftoors Concrete Paving Curb & Gutter Machine Curb & Gutter, Sidewatks Curing Concrete $s2.3e 56e.2e 560.57 560.57 526.28 s26.63 sze.33 530.33 522.74 564.94 564.94 s65.07 s65.07 564.94 s64.e4 564.94 564.84 564.34 564.84 564.34 564.84 s64.34 564.84 s64.34 564,84 564.34 564.34 *Risk Class Yielv Vicw View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View lH 1C 1N 1N 2F ZF 2F 2F L 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 5D 5N 7E 7E 5S 5S 5S 5S 7A 7A 7A 7^ 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A King King King King King King King about:blank Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons View View View View View View View View View View 1l1B 1t11t2021 King King King King Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cement Masons Cemen!_$as_o-ns Cement Masons Cement Masons Divers & Tenders Divers & Tenders Divefs & Ienders Divers & Tenders Divers & Tenders Divers & Tenders Divers & Tenders Divers & Tenders Finish cotor"o aon.rï,Tt'o'"n* Ftoor Grinding Ftoor Grinding/ Potisher Green Concrete Saw, setf- powered Grouting of atl Ptates Grouting of att Titt-up Panets Gunite Nozzleman Hand Powered Grinder Journey Level Patching Concrete Pneumatic Power Tools Power Chipping & Brushing Sand Btasting ArchitecturaI Finish Screed & Rodding Machine Spackting or Skim Coat Concrete Troweting Machine Operator Troweting Machine Operator on Colored Slabs Tunnel Workers Bett/Vehicte or Submersibte Operator (Not Under Pressure) Dive Supervisor/Master Diver Diver On Standby Diver Tender Manifotd Operator Manifold Operator Mixed Gas Remote Operated Vehicte Operator/Technician Remote Operated Vehicle Tender Assistant Engineer Assistant Mate (Deckhand) Boatmen Engineer Wetder Leverman, Hydrautic Mates Oiter Journey Level Journey Level Journey Level Cabte Splicer Cabl,e Spticer (tunnel) Certified Wetder 564.84 7A s64.84 7A s64.34 7A 564.84 7A 564.34 7A s64.34 7A s64.84 7A s64.84 7A 564.34 7A s64.34 7A 564.84 7A s64.84 7^ s64.84 7A 564.84 7A s64.34 7A 564.84 7A 5116.80 7A 581.98 7A s118.80 7A 576.98 7A 569.91 7A 569.91 7A 574.91 7A 569.91 7A 565.r9 7A s70.62 sp 570.07 sp 570.62 5p 571.97 5p 573.41 5p 570.62 5p 570.07 sp 564.94 sp 56s.31 5P 531.99 5L 589.11 7C s95.77 7C s86.08 7C 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 3F 3F 3F 3F 3F 3F 3F 1H 1E 1E 4E 4E 4E View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King 7A 7A 84 84 5o+. 5o¿. King King King King King King King 8V King Divels & Tenders King King King King King King King King King King Dredge Workers Dredge Workers Dredge Workers Dredge Workers Dredge Workers Dredge Workers Dredge Workers DryrryailAppiicalsr D¡nualllapsn EtectricaI Fixture Maintenance Workers Etectricians --lnåide Etectricians - lnside Etectricians - lnside King King King about:blank 2t't8 1t11t2021 King King King King King King about:blank Etectricians - lnsìde Certified Wetder (tunnet) Electricians - lnside Construction Stock Person Etectricians - lnside Journey Levet Etectricians - lnside Journey Level (tunnet) Etectricians - Motor Shop Journey Level Etectricians - Powertine Cabte Spticer Construction Etectricians - Powertine Certified Line Wetder Construction Etectricians - Powertine Groundperson ConstruEtion Etectricians - Powertine Heavy Line Equipment Construction Operator Etectricians - Powertine Journey Level Lineperson Construction El.ectricians - Powerting Line Equipment Operator Construction Etectricians - Powertine Meter lnstatter Construction EtectrisjE[s - Powertine Pote Sprayer Construction Etectricians - Powertine Powderperson Construction Etectronic Technicians Journey Level Elevator Constructors Mechanic Etevator Constructors Mechanic ln Charge Fabricated Precast Concrete A[[ Ctassifications ' ln-Factory Products Work Onty Fence Ele_ctors Fence Erector Fence Erectors Fence Laborer Ftaggers Journey Level Gtaziers Journey Level Heat & Frost lnsutators And Journeyman Asbestos Workers HeatinglquiEnenL-¡ûCChêliCS Journey Level Hod Carriers & Mason Tenders Journey Level lndustrial Power Vacuum Journey Level Cleaner lntand Boatnen Boat Operator lntand Boatmen Cook lnland Boatmen Deckhand lntand Boatmen Deckhand Engineer lntand Boatmen Launch Operator lntand Boatngn Mate I nspeclignlÇlganj¡g / Sea ti n g Of Cteaner Operator, Foamer Sewer & Water SÞlg¡fly Operator Remote Control lnspsç!ÍSn/Cleanjng/Seating Of Grout Truck Operator Sewer & Water Syjlems Jy Remote Control 592.44 7C s43.18 7C s83.05 7C 589.11 7C 547.53 sA 582.39 sA 575.64 5A s49.17 sA s75.64 sA 575.64 564.54 549.17 57s.64 556.49 $53.57 7E 597.31 7p s105.06 7p $18.2s sB 544.40 7A 544.40 7A 544.40 7A 569.26 7L s79.43 sJ s89.61 7F s54.01 7A sr3.50 iu.q sB 556.48 sB ss7.48 sB s58.81 58 558.89 58 5s7.31 sB s31.49 View View View View View View View View View View View 8W View View View View View View View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View View View View BY View View View View View View View View View 4E 4E 4E 4E 1B 4D 4D 4D 4D 4D 4D 4D 4D 4D 1E 4A 4A 1R 4V 4V 4V 1Y 4H 1E 4V ! 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A King King King King King King King King Ki Ki Ki Ki ng ng ng ng King King King King King King King King ! King King King King King King King King about:blank s13.s0 View 3118 111112021 King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King I nspsçli.Snlçleê.njng / Sea ti n g Of Head O pe rator Sewer & Water SËlemfgy Remote Control I nspeEü.on Æleanj.ng/ Seating Of Technician Sewer & Water Systems iy Remote Controt I nspSEliqn/Clead-ng / Sea ti n g Of Tv Truck O perator Sewer & Water Syttemf_By Remote ControI lnsutation Appjgêlqrs lronworkers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Lqborers Laborers Laborels Laborers Laborers Labol-efs Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers LaborerS Laborers Laborers Labo.fers Laborers Laborers Labor.ers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers_ Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers LabprcIs about:blank Journey Level Journeyman Air, Gas 0r Electric Vibrating Screed Airtrac Drit[ Operator Battast Regutar Machine Batch Weighman Brick Pavers Brush Cutter Brush Hog Feeder Burner Caisson Worker Carpenter Tender Cement Dumper-paving Cement Finisher Tender Change House Or Dry Shack Chipping Gun (30 Lbs. And Over) Chipping Gun (Under 30 Lbs.) Choker Setter Chuck Tender Clary Power Spreader Ctean-up Laborer Concrete Dumper/Chute Operator Concrete Form Stripper Concrete Ptacement Crew Concrete Saw Operator/Core Dritter Crusher Feeder Curing Laborer Demotition: Wrecking & Moving (lnct. Charred Materiat) Ditch Digger Diver Dritt Operator (Hydrautic, Diamond) Dry Stack Watts Dump Person Epoxy Technician 524.91 519.33 520.45 564.94 7A s7s.23 7N 5s2.39 7A ss4.01 7A 552.39 7A 544.40 7A s52.39 7A 552.39 7A ss2.39 7A s52.39 7A 5s4.01 7A ss2.39 7A s53.35 7A ss2.39 7A ss2.39 7A ss3.3s 7A 5s2.39 7A $52.39 7A 552.39 7A 553.3s 7A s52.39 7A s53.35 7A 5s2.39 7A 5s3.35 7A 553.35 7^ 544.40 7A ss2.39 7A 552.39 7A 552.3e 7A ss4.01 7A ss3.35 7A ss2.39 7A ss2.39 7A ss2.39 7^ 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y 1 ! L 4C 10 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V View View View View View View 8Y 8Y 8Y 8Y 8Y 8Y 8Y 8Y 8Y 8Y 8Y 8Y 8Y View View View View View View View View View View View View View King King King 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y ViewKing about:blank 4t18 1t1112021 King King King King King King King King King King King Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Labolers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborg$ Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers LAborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Lêborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers LAborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers LaboreJs Laborers Laborers King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King about:blank King Laborers King Laborers about:blank Erosion Control Worker Fatter & Bucker Chain Saw Fine Graders Firewatch Form Setter Gabian Basket Buitders GeneraI Laborer Grade Checker & Transit Person Grinders Grout Machine Tender Groutmen (Pressure) lnctuding Post Tension Beams GuardraiI Erector Hazardous Waste Worker (Level A) Hazardous Waste Worker (Levet B) Hazardous Waste Worker (Level c) High Scater Jackhammer Laserbeam Operator Maintenance Person Manhote Buitder-Mudman MateriatYard Person Motorman- Dinky Locomotive Nozzteman (Concrete Pump, Green Cutter When Using Combination Of High Pressure Air & Water On Concrete & Rock, Sandbtast, Gunite, Shotcrete, Water Btaster, Vacuum Btaster) Pavement Breaker Pitot Car Pipe Layer Lead Pipe Layer/Taitor Pipe Pot Tender Fipe Retiner Pipe Wrapper Pot Tender Powderman Powderman's Hetper Power Jacks Raitroad Spike Putter - Power Raker - Asphatt Re-timberman Remote Equipment Operator Rigger/SignaI Person 552.39 7A ss3.35 7A 5s2.39 7A 544.40 7A ss2.39 7A s52.39 7A s52.39 7A s54.01 7A 552.39 7A ss2.39 7A ss3.35 7A ss2.39 7A s54.01 7A s53.3s 7A 552.39 7A 5s4.01 7A 5s3.3s 7A ss3.35 7A 552.39 7A 553.3s 7A s52.39 7A ss3.35 7A s53.3s 7A s53.3s 7A 544.40 7A 554.01 7A ss3.35 7A s53.3s 7A 5s3.35 7A s53.35 7A ss2.39 7A s54.01 7^ 552.39 7A 5s3.35 7A 553.35 7A s54.01 7A 554.01 7A 5s3.35 7A s53.3s 7A 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 5/'18 111112021 King King King King King King King King King King King Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Labore$ Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers about:blank Rip Rap Person Rivet Buster Rodder Scaffotd Erector Scate Person Stoper (Over 20") Stoper Sprayer Spreader (Concrete) Stake Hopper Stock Piler Swinging Stage/ Boatswain Chair Tamper & Simitar Etectric, Air & Gas Operated Toots Tamper (Muttipte & Setf- propetted) Tmber Person - Sewer (Lagger, Shorer & Cribber) Tootroom Person (at Jobsite) licpper Track Laborer Track Liner (Power) Traffic Control Laborer Traffic Controt Supervisor Truck Spotter Tugger Operator Tunnel Work-Compressed Air Worker 0-30 psi Tunnel Work-Compressed Air Worker 30.01-44.00 psi Tunnel Work-Compressed Air Worker 44.01-54.00 psi Tunnel Work-Compressed Air Worker 54.01-60.00 psi Tunnel Work-Compressed Air Worker 60.01-64.00 psi Tunnet Work-Compressed Air Worker 64.01-68.00 psi Tunnel Work-Compressed Air Worker 68.01-70.00 psi Tunnel Work-Compressed Air Worker 70.01-72.00 psi Tunnel Work-Compressed Air Worker 72.01-74.00 psi Tunnel Work-Guage and Lock Tender Tunnel Work-Miner Vibrator Vinyl Seamer Watchman 552.39 ss3.35 ss3.35 5s2.39 552.39 553.3s s52.39 ss3.35 552.3e 552.39 544.40 ss3.35 553.35 $53.35 552.39 7A ss2.39 7A 5s2.39 7A ss3.35 7A s47.48 7^ 550.31 7A ss2.39 7A $53.3s 7A 5129.67 7A 5134.70 7A s138.38 7A s144.08 7A s146.20 7A s1s1 .30 7A s153.20 7A 5155.20 7A 5157.20 7A 554.11 7A 5s4.11 A $s3.3s 7A ss2.39 7A s40.36 7A 8Y 8Y 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4Y 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View King Laborers King Laborerq King Laborers 8Y View View View King King King King King King King King King 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 9C View 9C View 8Y View 8Y View 98 View 9B 9B 9B 9B 9B 9B 9B 8Y King King King King King King King King King 98 View View View View View View View View View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View King King King King about:blank 6/1 8 1t1112021 King King King King Laborers Laborers Laborers Laborers - Underground Sewer & Water Laborers - Underground Sewer & Water La n d sca ps_les ns'! ruElig n La nd scap_g_legns'UuELj sn La n d sca ps_¡MaigLC na nEC Lathers Marbte Setters Mgtat Fabrication (ln Shop) Mittwright Modutar Buitdingg Modutar Buitdingg Modutar Buitdingg Modutar Buil.dingg Modular Buitdingg Modutar Buitdin95 Modular Buitding¡ Modutar Buitdingg Painters Pite Driver Pite Driver Pite Driver Pite Driver Pite Driver Pite Driver Pite DrÍver Pile Driver. Pite Driver about:blank Welder Well, Point Laborer Window Washer/Cteaner General Laborer & Topman Pipe Layer Landscape Construction/Landscaping 0r Ptanting Laborers Landscape Operator Groundskeeper Journey Level Journey Level Journey Level Journey Level Cabinet Assembty Electrician Equipment Maintenance Ptumber Production Worker TcoI Maintenance Utitity Person Wetder Journey Level Crew Tênder Crew Tender/Technici an Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air Worker 0-30.00 PSt Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air Worker 30.01 - 44.00 Pst Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air Worker 44.01 - 54.00 PSt Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air Worker 54.01 - 60.00 Pst Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air Worker 60.01 - 64.00 PSt Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air Worker 64.01 - 68.00 PSr Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air Worker 68.01 - 70.00 Pst Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air Worker 70.01 - 72.00 PSr 5s3.3s 7A 553.35 7A s40.36 7A ss2.39 7A ss3.3s 7A 540.36 7A 572.28 7A s17.87 564.94 sp $60.s7 7E s40.08 566.44 7A 513.s0 513.s0 s13.s0 513.50 513.50 s13.s0 513.50 s13.50 s43.40 62 s69.e1 7A 569.91 7A 580.76 7A 585.76 7A $89.76 7A 594.76 7A 597.26 7A 5102.26 7A 5104.26 7A 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View 8Y View View View View View View View 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 4V 3K t 1H 1N t 4C L L ! L L ! t ! 2B 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4C King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King 8X View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View about:blank Pite Driver s106.26 7A View 7t18 1t1112021 King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King Power Equip¡g¡!_.lQpsIators King PowerEquip¡g¡!-.lQpsrals6 King PowerEquip¡en'!-.lQFIA!46 King Pile Driver Pile Driver Ptasterers Ptayground & Park Equiprnen! lnstatters Ptumbers_& Pipifi$ers Power Eq ui prngn llQrc¡¿tol5 Power Equi p_men LtQpsralel! Powe r Eq ui p_mg n'!lQ petêlgfg Powe r Eq ui plnen'!_.]QpsfAto[s Power Eq ui pmenllQrcIaþE Powe t Eq uipmenjllQ æ ratgls Power tq ui pnen'!-.lqpsralQG Powe r Eq u i pJ¡g ¡jLlQ ps.ralg¡s Powe r Eq ui prngn lQp-erators Powe r Eq u i pme n L_lQpS ralg¡! Power Equipmgn!_]QæralqIg Powe r Eq ui p¡en'!_lQps.fatoG Powe r Eq ui pt¡e n t_.lQ æIA!9I5 Powe r Eq ui p:nCg!_.tQrcIatofå about:blank Hyperbaric Worker - Compressed Air Worker 72.01 - 74.00 PSt Journey Level Journey Level Journey Level Journey Level Asphatt Ptant 0perators Assistant Engineer Barrier Machine (zipper) Batch Plant Operator: concrete Bobcat Brokk - Remote Demotition Equipment Brooms Bump Cutter Cabteways Chipper Compressor Concrete Finish Machine - Laser Screed Concrete Pump - Mounted 0r Traiter High Pressure Line Pump, Pump High Pressure Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With Boom Attachment Over 42 M Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With Boom Attachment Up To 42m Conveyors Cranes friction: 200 tons and over Cranes: 100 tons through 199 tons, or 150'of boom (inctuding jib with attachments) Cranes: 20 Tcns Through 44 Tons With Attachments Cranes: 200 tons- 299 tons, or 250'of boom inctuding jib with attachments Cranes: 300 tons and over or 300'of boom inctuding jib with attachments Cranes: 45 Tons Through 99 Tons, Under 150'Of Boom (inctuding Jib With Attachments) Cranes: A-frame - 10 Tons And Under s108.26 7 ^ s6s.19 7A 561.67 re. sr 3.so s90.69 6Z 573.49 7A 56e.12 7A 572.84 7A 572.84 7A 569.12 7A 56e.12 7A 569.12 7A 572.84 7A 573.49 7A 572.84 7A 569.12 7A 569.12 7A 572.28 7A 573.49 7A 572.84 7A 572.28 7^ s75.72 7A 574.22 7A 572.84 7A 574.99 7A 575.72 7A 573.49 7A View View View View 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X View View View View View View View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 4C 4C 1R t 1G 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K King PowerEquip_men!_.lQpera!9fs King PowerEquipmenllQpelalqrs King PowerEquiprnen'!-.lQp€talgl5 King PowerEquip-mgn!-lQp€rators King PoWer Equip-¡gq!¡QpgalAn King PowerEquiprnsn!_QpsßlAE about:blank 569.12 7A 8X View 811B 1t11t2021 King King King King King Power Eq ui p¡gg¡LlQp€GtoI! King Power Equip¡gnilQperatoË King Powe r Eq ui pICn!_Q ps ralSfs Power Eq ui pme[LlQperalQI5King Powe r Eq ui p_me n'!_.lQ pe.IAlgIS Powe r Eq ui p rn enlllQpsrato$ Power Eq ui p¡gn!-.jQrc ralgls Bgwer Eq ui pmen !_lQperalelt Power Eq ui pmgn LlQpelalslt Power Eouioment Ooerators Power Eq ui p:men L_lQrc raþIg Powe r Eq ui p_men'!_lQpelAlels Powe r Eg u i p_mgg!..lQps.rAlg[s about:blank Cranes: Friction cranes through 574.99 199 tons Cranes: through 19 tons with attachments, A-frame over 10 tons Crusher Deck Engineer/Deck Winches (power) Derricks, On Buitding Work Dozers D-9 & Under Dritt Oiters: Auger Type, Truck rOr Crane Mount Dritting Machine Elevator And Man-tift: Permanent And Shaft Type Finishing Machine, Bidwett And Gamaco & Simitar Equipment Forktift: 3000 Lbs And Over With Attachments Forklifts: Under 3000 Lbs. With Attachments Grade Engineer: Using Btue Prints, Cut Sheets, Etc G radechecker/Stakeman GuardraiI Punch Hard Tai[ End Dump Articutating Off- Road Equipment 45 Yards. & Over Hard Tai[ End Dump Articutating Off-road Equipment Under 45 Yards , Horizontal/ DirectionaI Dritl Locator Horizontat/ DirectionaI Dritt Operator Hyd ratifts/ Boom Trucks Over 10 Tons Hydratifts/Boom Trucks, 10 Tons And Under Loader, Overhead 8 Yards. & Over Loader, Overhead, 6 Yards. But Not lnctuding I Yards lLoaders, Overhead Under 6 Yards Loaders, Ptant Feed Loaders: Etevating Type Bett Locomotives, Atl Material Transfer Device Mechanics, Att (teadmen - S0.50 Per Hour Over Mechanic) Motor Patrol Graders 572.28 s72.84 7A 572.84 7A 573.49 7A 572.28 7A 572.28 7A s74.22 7A 569.12 7A s72.84 7^ 572.28 7A 569.12 7A 572.84 7A s69.12 7A 572.84 7A 573.49 7A 572.84 7A 572.28 7A 572.84 7A 572.28 7A 569.12 7A s74.22 7A 573.49 7A s72.84 7A 572.84 7A 572.28 7A s72.84 7A 572,84 7A 574.22 7A 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View View View View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View View View View View View View 7A 7A 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 8X 8X 8X King King King King King King King King King King Power Equip¡gn'!..lQ6¡Ato6 Power Eouioment Ooerators Power Eq ui pmen llQpsralels Power Eq ui plmglllQrc.ra!øs Power Eouioment Ooerators Power Eq ui p¡en!_Qrc ralq¡s Powe r Eq u i p_men'!_.lQ pefAlgIs Power Eouioment Ooerators Power Eq ui p*!0sni!_.lQrcIale[å Power Eq ui pmen'!..lQperalgfs Power Equi pmen'llQperalsfg King King King King King 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8XKing King about:blank King PowerEquipmgallQpg¿tofs King Power EquiplenLlQperators King Power Equipmen'LlQæralAIg King PowerEquipm9n'!_.lQp€ral9rs King Power Equipnen'LlQps.fA!9¡s 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View Powe r Eq ui p!0Cn'!_.10 rcfalg[s 573.49 7A 8X View 9/l 8 111112021 King King King 7A 7A 4.2257 King King King Power Eq ui p menLlQps ral96 King Power Equip¡gg¡QpgAlg6 King PowerEquipggn!..Qps¡aloß Power Equi p¡gg[_lQpCfatoË Powe r Eq ui pmen L-]Qperaþfs Powe_r Eq u i p_men !_.lQ æ ralgl! Power Eq ui p¡Cn'llQrcIato[S Power Eouioment 0oerators Power Eq ui ÐgntlQrc ralg.ts Powe r Eq ui p_m en'!-.jQrc ralers Powe r Eq ui pmg n'!-]Qps.ra!9rl Power Eq ui ptmen l-]QrcfAlglg Power Equi p¡gn'!-.lQps raþË Powe r Eq ui pJrnen !_.lQpeEtoIE King PowerEquip¡en!-.lQplalglt about:blank 'Mucking Machine, Mote, Tunnel Dritt, Boring, Road Header And/or Shietd 0it Distributors, Btower Distribution & Mutch Seeding ,Operator Outside Hoists (Etevators And Mantifts), Air Tuggers, Strato Overhead, Bridge Type Crane: 20 Tons Through 44 Tons Overhead, Bridge Type: 100 Tons And Over Overhead, Bridge Type: 45 Tons Through 99 Tcns ,Pavement Breaker Pite Driver (other Than Crane Mount) Ptant Oiler - Asphatt, Crusher Posthote Digger, MechanicaI Power Ptant Pumps - Water Quad 9, Hd41, D10And Over Quick Tower - No Cab, Under 100 Feet ln Height Based To Boom Remote Control Operator On Rubber Tred Earth Moving Equipment Rigger and Bettman Rigger/Signal Person, Bettman (Certified) Rotlagon Rotter, Other Than Ptant Mix Rolter, Ptant Mix Or Mutti-tift Materials 573.49 7A 3K 569.12 7A 3K s72.28 7A 572.84 7A s73,49 569.12 7A 572.84 7A 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X View View View View View View Ki Ki Ki Ki Ki Ki Ki Ki ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng 572.28 569.12 s6e,12 569.12 573.49 56e.12- King King King Power Eouioment Ooerators Power Eq ui pmen LlQ@lgrS Powe r Eq ui p:¡g n t]Q pCIAlgIs Power Eq ui ænt]QperalgE Power Equi p¡Cn !_]QrcIAlgIg Powe r Eq ui p_men!..lQps ralgfs Power Eq ui p:me¡j!-.lQæra!9I! Power Eq ui p:nenllQperalen Power Eq ui pmen L_.jOpeIAlArå Power Eq ui p. men LlQæralq[s Power Eq ui p_men !_tQpefAlgrå Po wet E q u i p-ne n!_.Q pef algtl Power Eq ui pmen!_.lQrcfato6 573.49 7A 569.12 7A s72.28 7A Roto-mitt, Roto-grinder 572.84 7A Saws - Concrete 572.28 7A Scraper, Self Propetted Under 572.84 7A 45 Yards Scrapers - Concrete & Carry Att 572.28 7A 'scrapers, Setf-propetted: 45 573.49 7A Yards And Over Service Engineers - Equipment 572.28 7A Shotcrete/Gunite Equipment 569.12 7A Shovel, Excavator, Backhoe, 572.28 7A Tractors Under 15 Metric Tons Shovet, Excavator, Backhoe: 573.49 7A Over 30 Metric Tons To 50 Metric Tons Shovet, Excavator, Backhoes, 572.84 7A Tractors: 15 To 30 Metric Tons 573.49 7A 569.12 7A 572.28 7A 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View King King King King King King King King King PowerEquip_menllQrcralqIs King PowerEquipmen!_]Qpslalqrs about:blank 't0118 1t1112021 King King King Powe r Eq ui p¡en L]QrcIAlgIS King Power Equipmeq!_.lQperators shover, Excavator, r::iiii- s74.zz 7^ Over 50 Metric Tons To 90 Metric Tons Shovet, Excavator, Backhoes: 574.99 7A Over 90 Metric Tons Sl,ipform Pavers 573.49 7A Spreader, Topsider & 573.49 7A Screedman Subgrader Trimmer 572.84 7A Tower Bucket Etevators 572.28 7A Tower Crane Up To 175' ln 574.22 7A Height Base Tc Boom Tower Crane: over 175' 574,99 7A through 250' in height, base to boom Tower Cranes: over 250' in 575.72 7^ height from base to boom Transporters, At[ Track Or Truck 573.49 7A Type Trenching Machines 572.28 7A Truck Crane Oiler/driver - 100 572.84 7A Tons And Over Truck Crane Oiter/Driver Under 572.28 7A 100 Tons Truck Mount Portabte Conveyor 572.84 7A Wetder 573.49 7A Wheel Tractors, Farmatl Type 569.12 7A Yo Yo Pay Dozer 572.84 7A Asphatt Plant Operators 573.49 7A Assistant Engineer Barrier Machine (zipper) 569.12 7A 572.84 7A 572.84 7A s6e.12- 7A 569.12 7A 56e.12 7^ 572.84 7A 573.49 7A 572.84 7A 569.12 7A s69.12 7A Batch Ptant Operator, Concrete Bobcat Brokk - Remote Demotition Equipment Brooms Bump Cutter Cabteways Chipper Compressor Concrete Finish Machine - Laser Screed 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View 8X View View View View View View View View View View View View King King Power EquirunentlQrcIAlgIg King PowerEquip¡en'!-.lQp€faton King Power Equip¡enL-.IQrcGIAIS King King King King King King King King King King King Powe r Eq ui p_¡ e¡!-.1Q rcraþrs Power Equi plrnen'!_]Qrc ra!ø! Powe r Eq uipmen'!]Qpefal9ts Power Eq ui pmen!-lQpsfAlglå Power Eq ui p_men !-.lQæra!gIS Powe r Equi pmen'LlQpgAlAIs Powe r Eq ui p_mSû!-]Q p€ßlqlg Power Eq ui p¡en!-1QæGtorg Power Eq ui p:men !-.lQps ralqE Powef Eq ui prngn !_.lQps.ra!g¡! Power Eq ui p¡enl-lOpelalgls Power Eouioment Ooerators- Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Lq ui p¡CU!-.lQpSralSrS: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p-mg n t*Qp€ßlgfs: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pJnen'!_.lQpelators -. Un_derground Sewer & Wate( Power Eouioment Ooerators- Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p_men !-.lQPs ralgfs: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eouioment Operators- Undergroqnd Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p_meCILlQps.G tolf. Underground Sewer & Water Power Eouioment Ooerators- [Jndersround Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p¡Cn LlQæralqIS: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eouioment ODerators- Underground Sewer & Water Potyer Eq ui p:nen LlQpelato rs -. Underground Sewer & Water King Power Equipmgn'!-.lQpratoß King 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X King King King King King King King King 11118about:blank 1t1112021 King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King Powe r Eq ui p¡gn'!_lQpsfatoIs: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p_mgnlQpe¡¿lors -, Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui pjrn en'!.JQpsIAlqfS: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p:men'!_.lQp-C ralgrs: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pmgntlQps.fators-. Undqrground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p¡0enl_.lQp_CfAlg rs -. Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pmenl_lQps ratoIs: Underground Sewer & Water P_swe r Eq u i pmen'!_.lQ ps[atols -. Underground Sewer & Water Power Equi pmgn'l..]Qps[atoIf. Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui Ðen!_.lQps6tolg: Underground Sewer & Water PoweLEq ui prnenL_lQrc ralqI5: Underground _Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pmen'!-]QpgAlqls: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p:ngn!-.!Qpe raþrs -. Underground- Sewer & Water Power Eq ui prnen!_.lQpsIêlgls: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq u i plrnen !-lQps ralAIS: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p Jen !_lQæIalg[t: Underground Sewer & Wate[ Power Eq ui p¡en L]QpeßlsË: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eouioment ODerators- Undersround Sewer & Water Power Eouioment Operators- Under:ground Sewer & Watef Power Eouioment Ooerators- Underground Sewer & Water P-ower Eq ui p¡CntlQÞs.fAtoIs-. Utderground-Sswer & Water Powe r Equi p¡en!-.lQpsfA!9rs-. Underground Sewer & Water concrete Pump - -"::i:: il Traiter High Pressure Line Pump, Pump High Pressure Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With Boom Attachment Over 42 M Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With Boom Attachment Up To 42m Conveyors s72.84 7^ 572.28 7A Cranes friction: 200 tons and 575.72 over Cranes: 100 tons through 199 574.22 tons, or 150'of boom (inctuding jib with attachments) Cranes: 20 Tons Through 44 572.84 Tons With Attachments Cranes: 200 tons- 299 tons, or 574.99 250'of boom including jib with attachments Cranes: 300 tons and over or 575.72 300'of boom inctuding jib with attachments Cranes: 45 Tons Through 99 Tons, Under 150'Of Boom (inctuding Jib With Attachments) Cranes: A-frame - 10 Tons And Under Cranes: Friction cranes through 199 tons Cranes: through 19 tons with attachments, A-frame over 10 tons Crusher s73.4e 572.84 7A 572.28 7A 3K 8X View s73.49 7A 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 3K 8X View 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A s69.12 7A 574.9e 7A 572.28 7A Deck Engineer/Deck Winches (power) Derricks, On Buitding Work Dozers D-9 & Under 572.28 Dritl Oiters: Auger Type, Truck 572.28 Or Crane Mount Dritting Machine 574.22 Etevator And Man-lift: 569.12 Permanent And Shaft Type FinishingMachine, BidweltAnd 572.84 Gamaco & Simitar Equipment Forktift: 3000 Lbs And Over 572.28 With Attachments 84572. s73.49 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A about:blank 12118 111112021 King King King King King King King King King about:blank King PowerEquiprnen!_Qpslators-. Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p¡gg!_1Qæra!g6: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui pmen !_lQpc ra!9I5: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq u i p*m e n'[.1Qpe¡Alelf. Underground Sewer & Water Power Equi Een LlQpslators-, Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p¡Cnt-lQpsßlq¡S: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p ¡ en'!-.tQ pSIalgIE: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p¡qgg!-.lQperAlgrg:. Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p menL_.lQpe rato rs -. Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p_mg0t lQpslAlell: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq u i p_mg n'!lQ perA!96: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq u i pJmC n'!lQ rcßtolE: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pment_.lQpsIalAls -, Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq u i p¡gn t-.lQ ps&þIE: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq u i p_ng n t-.lQ pS ralgIt: Underground Sewer & Water Pqwer Eq uipmeûLlQperalgrs: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui ptngn'l]Q psIêIgIå: Underground Sewer & Water Power Equipment Ooerators- Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui plmg¡!¡Qrelo rs -. Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pment-.1Qæralq6: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pnen'[.]Qps.fA!g¡*. U[dgrground Sewer & Water Power Eouioment Ooerators- Und_erground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p_m e n !_.lQ pS ralgru: Underground Sewer & Water Powe¿Eq Ui pmen!_lQpe ralq¡S: UndergrouLd Sewer & Water Powe r Eq u i pnenllQ F.rAþIE:. about:blank Forktifts: Under 3000 Lbs. With Attachments Grade Engineer: Using Btue Prints, Cut Sheets, Etc G radechecker/ Stakeman GuardraiI Punch Hard Tait End Dump Articutating Off- Road Equipment 45 Yards. & Over Hard Tai[ End Dump Articutating Off-road Equipment Under 45 Yards Horizontat/ Di rectionaI DritI Locator Horizontat/ DirectionaI DritI 0perator Hyd ratifts/ Boom Trucks Over 10 ïcns Hydralifts/Boom Trucks, 1 0 Tons And Under Loader, Overhead 8 Yards. & Over Loader, Overhead, 6 Yards. But Not lnctuding 8 Yards Loaders, Overhead Under 6 Yards Loaders, Ptant Feed Loaders: Etevating Type Bett Locomotives, AtI MateriaI Transfer Device Mechanics, ALt (teadmen - S0.50 Per Hour Over Mechanic) Motor Patrol Graders Mucking Machine, Mote, Tunnel Drill, Boring, Road Header And/or Shietd OiI Distributors, Btower Distribution & Mutch Seeding Operator Outside Hoists (Etevators And Mantifts), Air Tuggers, Strato Overhead, Bridge Type Crane: 20 lrcns Through 44 Tons Overhead, Bridge Type: 100 Tons And Over Overhead, Bridge Type: 45 Tons 569.12 7A 3K 8X View 572.84 7A 3K 8X View s69.12 7A 3K 8X View 572.84 7A 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 573.49 7A s72.84 572.28 572.84 572.28 56e.12 569.12 7A 7A 7A 7^ 7A 7A King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King 574.22 7A s73.49 7A 572.84 7A 572.84 7A 572.28 7A 572.84 7^ 572.84 7A s74.22 7A 573.49 7A 573.49 7A s72.28 7A 572.84 7A 574.22 7A View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View 13/18 573.49 7A 111112021 King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King about:blank King King King King King King King King King Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pmen!_.lQpe rato rs-. Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui plmgn !¡Qæ ralgf51 Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pmenrll0pelAlgIt: Underground Sewer & Water Po_wer Eq ui p ¡gn !-.lQpefa!gf. Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p!ûe n !-lQpSIAlg rs -. Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p¡gq!_.!Qpsra!gI5: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pmen llQps.rAlers -. Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p_¡1en |Qrc&toÊ Underground Sewer & Water Power Equi@!-.lQ@, Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p:menL_lQ ps raþIS: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui Un s n t-.18 pSIAlgIt: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq u i pmen!-]Qpera!9I5: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq uip¡nen!_.Qps&þ rs-. Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p_mgn'LtQps ralgrs: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p_rne n !-.lQ æ¡3!9IS: UndgJground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p¡gn !_]Qpeta!gls: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eouioment Ooerators- Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p¡CnllQps raIAE Ulrderground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pmen'!18rc raleIs: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eouioment Ooerators- Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq u i p ¡gg[-1Q p-erato rs -. U_ndergrou nd_Sewe r & Wate r Power Eq ui p_ment]QrelgIs: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p_men'!..lQpera!gl5: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p_me n'!-lQpefAlgrs -. Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pmen!_.l0psGþfl about:blank Through 99 Tons Pavement Breaker Pile Driver (other Than Crane 572.84 Mount) Ptant Oiter - Asphatt, Crusher 572.28 PosthoteDigger, Mechanicat 569.12 Power Ptant 56e.12 Pumps - Water 56e.12 Quad 9, Hd 41, DlO And Over 573.49 569.12 7A 3K 8X View Quick Tower - No Cab, Under 100 Feet ln Height Based To Boom Remote Controt Operator On Rubber Tired Earth Moving Equipment Rigger and Bettman 56e.12 573.49 56e.12 8X View 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 28572 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 8X View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View Rigger/SignaI Person, Bettman (Certified) Rottagon 572.28 573.49 Rotter, Other Than Ptant Mix 569.12 Rotter, Ptant Mix 0r Mutti-tift Materiats Roto-mitt, Roto-grinder 572.28 572.84 Saws - Concrete 572.28 Scraper, Setf Propetted Under 572.84 45 Yards Scrapers - Concrete & Carry Att 572.28 Scrapers, Setf-propetted: 45 573.49 Yards And Over Service Engineers - Equipment ' 572,28 Shotcrete/GuniteEquipment 569.12 Shovet, Excavator, Backhoe, Tractors Under 15 Metric Tons Shovet, Excavator, Backhoe: Over 30 Metric Tons To 50 Metric Tons Shovet, Excavator, Backhoes, Tractors: 15 To 30 Metric Tons Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: 573.49 572.84 View View 14t't8 s74.22 111112021 King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King Underground Sewer & Water Power Eouioment Ooerators- Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p¡gg[-1Qæralqfs: Underground Sewer & Water Power Equi p rngn LlQpsrators: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p¡1gg!-1Q ps.raþ rs -. Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p¡Cn'LlQpsIAleIf. Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq ui p_mgn LlQ@lgrg: Underground Sewer & Water Powe r Eq u i pm en!..1QæA!gIS: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p¡enllQpe¡glAlr. Underground Sewer & Water Power Eouioment Ooerators- Underground Sewer & Water P-owe r Eq ui p_ngûLlQæ ralSfs: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pment-.lQpefAtoIs: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pngn'llQpefAlgrs-. Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p¡gn !]QrcIAlgrs -. Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui p¡ent_.!Qpslalq[S: Underground Sewer & Water Power Eq ui pms0llQps ra!sIg:. Undefground Sewer & Water Power Eouioment Ooerators- Underground Sewer & Water Power Line Ctearance Tree Trimmers Power Line Ctearance Tree Trimmers Power Line Ctearance Tree Trimmers Power Line Ctearance Tree Trimmers Power Line Ctearance Tree Trimmers Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Mechanics Residentia[ Brick MA$n ResidentiaI Carpsnlefg about:blank Over 50 Metric Tons To 90 Metric Tons Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: Over 90 Metric Tcns .Stipform Pavers Spreader, lìcpsider & Screedman Subgrader Trimmer Truck Crane Oiter/driver - 100 Tons And Over Truck Crane Oiter/Driver Under 100 Tons Truck Mount Portabte Conveyor Journey Level Journey Level 574.99 7A 3K 8X View 573.49 7A 3K 8X View 573.49 7A 3K 8X View 572.84 7A 3K 8X View Tower Bucket Etevators s72.28 7A Tower Crane Up To 175'ln 574.22 7A Height Base To Boom :Tower Crane: over 175' 574.99 7A through 250' in height, base to boom Tower Cranes: over 250'in 575,72 7A height from base to boom Transporters, At[ Track Or Truck 573,49 7A Type Trenching Machines 572.28 7A 572.84 572.28 572,84 s73.4e 560.57 7E 532.06 529.2s 548.17 7A 547.73 5P 8X View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 1G 1N ! t 4C 1E 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 8X 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 6Z 84 0 5tz 53s Welder Wheet Tractors, Farmatt Type 569.12 Yo Yo Pay Dozer Journey Levet ln Charge Spray Person ss0.40 Tree Equipment Operator S53.10 Tree Trimmer 547.48 Tree Trimmer Groundperson 536.10 Journey Level 585.51 View Residentiat Cement Masons Journey Level Res-identi a t D rvwa tt AppllçAlors Jou rney Level Residential Drvwatl Tapsf5 Journey Level about:blank 15118 1t11t2021 King King King ResidentiaI Etectricians ResidentiaI Gtaziers ResidentiaI lnsulation AppUealers Residentiat Laborers Residential Marbte Setters ResidentiaI Painters ResidentiaI Ptumbers & Pipsfilters Residential Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Mechanics ResidentiaI Sheet MetaI Workers Residential Soft Ftoor LayeE Resi denti a I Sp-ruktelEtllcrg {Fire Protection) ResidentiaI Stone Masons ResidentiaI Terrazzo Workers ResidentiaI TerrazzolTle Finishers Residentiat Tte Setters Roofers Roofers Sheet MetatWorkers Shi pþujldrng e shi p_Bcpair Shi pþurldlng e Shi p_ ¡epajl shipþuldrne e shi p_Bcpair shipÞujldj¡g e Ship Reæjr Shi piujldj¡g e Ship_ Semjl shipþujldj¡g e ship sepajl Shi pþsúdug e Ship*Bcpair ship¡silding e ship scæil shipåuildj¡g e shi p_ scpajI shipåuldj¡g e Ship_Bepait shi p juüdj¡g e Shi p_ScpaiI shipþujldjng e ship Reparr Shipiujldl¡g e Ship_ßepajl Shipiurldine e Ship Scpajr 555.87 sA 1G Journey Level (Field or Shop) 554.01 7F 1R about:blank Journey Level Journey Level Journey Level Journey Level Journey Level Journey Levet Journey Level Journey Level Journey Level Journey Level Journey Level Journey Levet Journey Level Journey Level Journey Level Using lrritabte Bituminous Materiats Journey Levet (Fiel,d or Shop) New Construction Boitermaker New Construction Carpenter New Construction Crane Operator New Construction Electrician New Construction Heat & Frost lnsutator New Construction Laborer New Construction Machinist New Construction Operating Engineer New Construction Painter New Construction Pipefitter New Construction Rigger New Construction Sheet Metal New Construction Shipfitter New Construction Warehouse/Teamster New Construction Wetder / Burner Ship Repair Boitermaker Ship Repair Carpenter Ship Repair Crane Operator Ship Repair Etectrician 536.01 s4s.90 7L 52e.87 s26.1 I s27.38 527.80 s3e.43 s51.07 sA s50.8e 5c $60.57 7E 555.71 7E 524.3e 521.04 ss5.s5 5A s58.ss sA 589.61 7F 536.36 TV s36.36 7V 536.36 7V 536.36 TV 579.43 5J s36.3ó 7V s36.36 TV s36.36 7V 536.36 TV 536.36 7V 536.36 7V 536.36 7V s36.36 TV s36.36 TV 536.36 7V 546.1s 7X 544.95 7X s4s.06 T{ 547.42 7X t 1H 1 View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View King King King King ! t L 1 King King King King King King King 3J 2R IN 1N L t 3H 3H 1E L t L ! 4H King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King King L L t t L L L ! L 1King Shiplsjldug e ship_Sepair shipåujldi¡S e Ship_ßcpair Shi pþujlding .e Shi p_ scpaü Shipiuldrng & Ship- Sepail Shi pÞui tc[ne e shi UBepa ir 4J 4J 4K 4J King King King King about:blank 16t18 1t11t2021 King King King King King King King King King King King Shipiurldrng e Ship_ Scpijr shipiujlding e ship_ scpajr shipiujld:¡g e ship_Bemir shi pþuj.ldj¡e e shi p*Bepair Shiplu{drng e Ship_ ¡spajr shi pþujiding e ship_Bcpa ir shipåuildjng e ship ßepajr Shipiuildjng e shi p_ sepaj_r Shipisúdue e Ship lepajr Shipþuitding e Shi p_ Sepajr about:blank Ship Repair Heat & Frost lnsulator Ship Repair Laborer Ship Repair Machinist Ship Repair Operating Engineer Ship Repair Painter Ship Repair Pipefitter Ship Repair Rigger Ship Repair Sheet Metal Ship Repair Shipwright Ship Repair Warehouse / Teamster Journey Level 579.43 5J 546.15 7X $46.15 7X $45.06 7Y s46.1s 7X 546.1s 7X s46.15 7X 546.1s 7X s44.95 7X s4s.06 7Y 549.44 A 531.e6 0 $s1.07 sA 51 3.s0 584.39 5C s13.50 560.57 7E s1e.09 s72.28 7A 569.12 7A 573.49 7A s53.s7 7E 541.81 sA 523.s3 5A s40.09 sA s41.81 sA s40.99 5A s41.81 sA 538.92 $38.92 522.32 s29.60 View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View View 8X View 8X View 8X View View View View View View View View View View View View 4H 4J 4J 4K 4J 4J 4J 4J 4J 4K Sjgn Makers & lnstatlers {Etectrical') Sign Makers & lnstatlers (Non- Journey Levet Etectricat) SoLt Ftoor LaySrs Journey Level Sotar Controts For Windows Journey Level 5p_r!¡klcrfjllcrs_(Fire Journey Level Protection) Stage Rigging Mechanics (Non Journey Level S_t_rusturat) Stone Masons Journey Level Street And Parking Lot SweeæI Journey Level Workers Surveys6 Assistant Construction Site Surveyor SurveyglE Chainman Surveyprs Construction Site Surveyor Tetecommunication Technicians Journey Level Tetephone Line Constru Cabte Spticer Outside Tete@ Hote Digger/Ground Person 0utside Tetephone Line Constru lnstatter (Repairer) Outside Tete@ Special Aparatus lnstatter I Outside Tetephqneline Construc Special Apparatus lnstatter ll Outside Tetephone Line Constru Tetephone Equipment Operator Outside (Heavy) Tetephone _l=ine Construc Tetephone Equipment Operator Outside (Light) Tetephone Line Construc Tetephone Lineperson Oqtside Tete@ TetevisionGroundperson Outside Tete@ Tetevision Lineperson/lnstatter Outside Tetephone Line Constru Tetevision System Technician L tKing King King King King King King King King King King King about:blank 3J L 1X L King 1N t 3K 3K 3K 1E 28 28 ZB 28 2B 28 28 2B 28 28 28 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A King King King King King King King King King View 17118 535.20 1t1112021 , Outside Teteohone Line Construction - Outside Tetephone Line Constru Outside. Têrrazzo Workers Tile Setters rTite, Marble & Terrazzo Finishers Traff ic Controt Stri psË Truck Drivers ,Truck Drivers Truck Drivers Truck Dflyers Truck Drivers Truck Drivers - Ready_.jtvlix Wel[ Dritters & lrrigation Pump_ lnstatters Wett Dritters & lrrigation Pump lnstalters .Wet[ Drittqrs & lrrigation Pur-np- lnstatters about:blank Tetevision Technician Tree Trimmer Journey Level Journey Level Finisher Journey Levet Asphatt Mix Ovelt6 Yards Asphatt Mix To 16 Yards Dump Truck ,Dump Truck & Traiter :Other Trucks Transit Mix lrrigation Pump lnstatler : Oiler Wett Dritter , King 2B 2B 1N 1N 1N 1K 4Y 4Y 4Y 4Y 4Y 4Y 1 5A 5A 1.67 8 92 $¡ s3 View View View View View View View King King King King King King King King King King King King King King ss5.71 7E 555.71 7E s46.54 7E s49.13 7A 563.8s 5p iøt.tt 5p s63.71' 5D s63.8s sp , 563.85 5D : 563.85 5D 517.71 s13.s0 s18.00 View 8L View 8L View 8L View 8L View 8L View 8L View View L 1 about:blank 18118 EXHIBIT B INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS Insurance The Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Agreement, insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, their agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. A. Minimum Scope of Insurance Contractor shall obtain insurance of the types described below: 1.Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written on ISO occurrence form CG 00 01 or its equivalent, with minimum limits of $2,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate for each 1 year policy period. This coverage may be any combination of primary, umbrella or excess liability coverage affording total liability limits of not less than $2,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate. Products and Completed Operations coverage shall be provided for a period of 3 years following Substantial Completion of the work. The Commercial General Liability insurance shall be endorsed to provide the Aggregate per Project Endorsement ISO form CG 25 03 11 85. The City shall be named as an Additional Insured under the Contactor’s Commercial General Liability insurance policy with respect to the work performed for the City. All endorsements adding Additional Insureds shall be issued on form CG 20 10 11 85 or a form deemed equivalent, providing the Additional Insureds with all policies and endorsements set forth in this section. 2.Automobile Liability insurance covering all owned, non-owned, hired and leased vehicles. Coverage shall be written on Insurance Services Office (ISO) form CA 00 01 or a substitute form providing equivalent liability coverage. If necessary, the policy shall be endorsed to provide contractual liability coverage. 3.Workers’ Compensation coverage as required by the Industrial Insurance laws of the State of Washington. B. Minimum Amounts of Insurance Contractor shall maintain the following insurance limits: 1.Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written with minimum limits of $2,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate for each 1 year policy period. This coverage may be any EXHIBIT B (Continued) combination of primary, umbrella or excess liability coverage affording total liability limits of not less than $2,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate. Products and Completed Operations coverage shall be provided for a period of 3 years following Substantial Completion of the work. 2.Automobile Liability insurance with a minimum combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of $1,000,000 per accident. C. Other Insurance Provisions The insurance policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions for Automobile Liability and Commercial General Liability: 1.The Contractor’s insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respect the City. Any insurance, self-insurance, or insurance pool coverage maintained by the City shall be excess of the Contractor’s insurance and shall not contribute with it. 2.The Contractor’s insurance shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be cancelled by either party, except after thirty (30) days prior written notice by certified mail, return receipt requested, has been given to the City. 3.The City of Kent shall be named as an additional insured on all policies (except Professional Liability) as respects work performed by or on behalf of the contractor and a copy of the endorsement naming the City as additional insured shall be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. The City reserves the right to receive a certified copy of all required insurance policies. The Contractor’s Commercial General Liability insurance shall also contain a clause stating that coverage shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respects to the limits of the insurer’s liability. D. Contractor’s Insurance for Other Losses The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all loss or damage from any cause whatsoever to any tools, Contractor’s employee owned tools, machinery, equipment, or motor vehicles owned or rented by the Contractor, or the Contractor’s agents, suppliers or contractors as well as to any temporary structures, scaffolding and protective fences. EXHIBIT B (Continued) E. Waiver of Subrogation The Contractor and the City waive all rights against each other any of their Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extend covered by Builders Risk insurance or other property insurance obtained pursuant to the Insurance Requirements Section of this Contract or other property insurance applicable to the work. The policies shall provide such waivers by endorsement or otherwise. F. Acceptability of Insurers Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current A.M. Best rating of not less than A:VII. G. Verification of Coverage Contractor shall furnish the City with original certificates and a copy of the amendatory endorsements, including but not necessarily limited to the additional insured endorsement, evidencing the Automobile Liability and Commercial General Liability insurance of the Contractor before commencement of the work. H. Subcontractors Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the same insurance requirements as stated herein for the Contractor. AC"R11 CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM/DDIYYYY) 12/16/2020 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW, THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Nicholson & Associates Ins LLC 1802 Black Lake Blvd SW #301 Olympia, WA 98512 CONTACT NAME: Tiffany Karpavicius AICONN Et: (360)352-8444 F Ne; (360)943-9712 E-MAIL ADDRESS: tiffany@nichinsure.com INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # West American Insurance 44393_ ___wsURERA:_ INSURED Christensen, Inc., General Contractor 2840 Crites St SW Ste 100 Tumwater, WA 98612 INSURERS: Ohio Casualty Insurance 24074 INSURERC: Princeton Excess & Surplus Lines 10786 INSURERD: Evanston Insurance Co INSURER E: INSURER F : t,UvEkAGtb CERTIFICATE NUMBER nnnnnRR3-d77R*AdQ R=111Ctnkl kIttMQGo. en THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL g SUER' POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF MM/DD/YYYY POLICY EXP MMIDD/YYYY LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS -MADE OCCUR Y y BKW57232670 06/16/2020 06/16/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 DAMAGE ENTED PREMISES Ea occurrence $ 1,000,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5 000 PERSONAL & AOV INJURY $ 1,000,000 AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY � PECOT- LOC GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 $ OTHER: A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Y BAW57232670 06/16/2020 06/16/2021 Ea MBIN acc den SINGLE LIMIT $ 1,000,000 X ANYAUTO BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS ONLY AUTOS Per accident ( ) BODILY INJURY $ X HIRED NON -OWNED AUTOS ONLY X AUTOS ONLY PROPERTY DAMAGE Per accident $ B X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR US057232670 06/16/2020 06/16/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 8,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS -MADE AGGREGATE $ 8,000,000 DED I X I RETENTION $ 10,000 $ A WORKERS AND EMPLO ERSELIABILOI Y YIN ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? ❑ (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below N / A BKW57232670 06/16/2020 06/16/2021 X STATUTE OERH Stop Gap E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1000000 > > E.L. DISEASE- EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 C Excess Umbrella 82A3FF0002591 06/16/2020 06/16/2021 Limit 2,000,000 D Pollution CPLMOL102917 05/04/2020 05/04/2021 Limit 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) RE: Riverbend Driving Range Improvements - Phase III #FAC 20-04 The City of Kent, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers are included as Additional Insureds as their interest may appear when required by written contract. Insurance is Primary and Non -Contributory. A Waiver of Subrogation applies in favor of the certificate holder, Completed Operations also applies per attached endorsement. City of Kent 220 4th Ave S Kent, WA 98032 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE V 1913t3-2U15 ACUKU CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2016103) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Printed by NTK on December 15, 2020 at 09:55AM COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG88100413 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EXTENSION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART INDEX SUBJECT PAGE NON -OWNED AIRCRAFT 2 NON -OWNED WATERCRAFT 2 PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY -ELEVATORS 2 EXTENDED DAMAGE TO PROPERTY RENTED TO YOU (Tenant's Property Damage) 2 MEDICAL PAYMENTS EXTENSION 3 EXTENSION OF SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS - COVERAGES A AND B 3 ADDITIONAL INSUREDS -BY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PERMIT 3 PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY- ADDITIONAL INSURED EXTENSION 6 ADDITIONAL INSUREDS - EXTENDED PROTECTION OF YOUR "LIMITS OF INSURANCE" 6 WHO 1S AN INSURED - INCIDENTAL MEDICAL ERRORS/MALPRACTICE AND WHO IS AN INSURED - FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXTENSION - MANAGEMENT EMPLOYEES 6 NEWLY FORMED OR ADDITIONALLY ACQUIRED ENTITIES 7 FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS AND PRIOR OCCURRENCES 7 KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE, OFFENSE, CLAIM OR SUIT 7 LIBERALIZATION CLAUSE 7 BODILY INJURY REDEFINED 7 EXTENDED PROPERTY DAMAGE 8 WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US - 8 WHEN REQUIRED IN A CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT WITH YOU O 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CG 88 10 04 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 1 of 8 nth respect to coverage afforded by this endorsement, the provisions of the policy apply unless modified by the endorsement. A. NON -OWNED AIRCRAFT Under Paragraph 2. Exclusions of Section I - Coverage A - Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability, exclusion g. Aircraft, Auto Or Watercraft does not apply to an aircraft provided: 1. It is not owned by any insured; 2. It is hired, chartered or loaned with a trained paid crew; 3. The pilot in command holds a currently effective certificate, issued by the duly constituted authority of the United States of America or Canada, designating her or him a commercial or airline pilot; and 4. It is not being used to carry persons or property for a charge. However, the insurance afforded by this provision does not apply if there is available to the insured other valid and collectible insurance, whether primary, excess (other than insurance written to apply specifically in excess of this policy), contingent or on any other basis, that would also apply to the loss covered under this provision. NON -OWNED WATERCRAFT Under Paragraph 2. Exclusions of Section I - Coverage A - Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability, Subparagraph (2) of exclusion g. Aircraft, Auto Or Watercraft is replaced by the following: This exclusion does not apply to: (2) A watercraft you do not own that is: (a) Less than 52 feet long; and (b) Not being used to carry persons or property for a charge. C. PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY -ELEVATORS 1. Under Paragraph 2. Exclusions of Section 1 - Coverage A - Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liabil- ity, Subparagraphs (3), (4) and (6) of exclusion j. Damage To Property do not apply if such "property damage" results from the use of elevators. For the purpose of this provision, elevators do not include vehicle lifts. Vehicle lifts are lifts or hoists used in automobile service or repair operations. 2. The following is added to Section IV - Commercial General Liability Conditions, Condition 4. Other Insurance, Paragraph b. Excess Insurance: The insurance afforded by this provision of this endorsement is excess over any property insurance, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis. D. EXTENDED DAMAGE TO PROPERTY RENTED TO YOU (Tenant's Property Damage) If Damage To Premises Rented To You is not otherwise excluded from this Coverage Part: 1. Under Paragraph 2. Exclusions of Section 1 - Coverage A - Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability: a. The fourth from the last paragraph of exclusion j. Damage To Property is replaced by the follow- ing: Paragraphs (1), (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not apply to "property damage" (other than damage by fire, lightning, explosion, smoke, or leakage from an automatic fire protection system) to: (i) Premises rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days; or (ii) Contents that you rent or lease as part of a premises rental or lease agreement for a period of more than 7 days. Paragraphs (1), (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not apply to "property damage" to contents of premises rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance applies to this coverage as described in Section III - Limits of Insurance. © 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CG 88 10 04 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 2 of 8 b. The last paragraph of subsection 2. Exclusions is replaced by the following: Exclusions c. through n. do not apply to damage by fire, lightning, explosion, smoke or leakage from automatic fire protection systems to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner. A separate limit of insurance applies to Damage To Premises Rented To You as described in Section III - Limits Of Insurance. 2. Paragraph 6. under Section III - Limits Of Insurance is replaced by the following: 6. Subject to Paragraph 5. above, the Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit is the most we will pay under Coverage A for damages because of "property damage" to: a. Any one premise: (1) While rented to you; or (2) While rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner for damage by fire, lightning, explosion, smoke or leakage from automatic protection sys- tems; or b. Contents that you rent or lease as part of a premises rental or lease agreement. 3. As regards coverage provided by this provision D. EXTENDED DAMAGE TO PROPERTY RENTED TO YOU (Tenant's Property Damage) - Paragraph 9.a. of Definitions is replaced with the following: 9.a. A contract for a lease of premises. However, that portion of the contract for a lease of premises that indemnifies any person or organization for damage by fire, lightning, explosion, smoke, or leakage from automatic fire protection systems to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with the permission of the owner, or for damage to contents of such premises that are included in your premises rental or lease agreement, is not an "insured contract". E. MEDICAL PAYMENTS EXTENSION If Coverage C Medical Payments is not otherwise excluded, the Medical Payments provided by this policy are amended as follows: Under Paragraph 1. Insuring Agreement of Section I - Coverage C - Medical Payments, Subparagraph (b) of Paragraph a. is replaced by the following: (b) The expenses are incurred and reported within three years of the date of the accident; and F. EXTENSION OF SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS - COVERAGES A AND B 1. Under Supplementary Payments - Coverages A and B, Paragraph 1.b. is replaced by the following: b. Up to $3,000 for cost of bail bonds required because of accidents or traffic law violations arising out of the use of any vehicle to which the Bodily Injury Liability Coverage applies. We do not have to furnish these bonds. 2. Paragraph 1.d. is replaced by the following: d. All reasonable expenses incurred by the insured at our request to assist us in the investigation or defense of the claim or "suit", including actual loss of earnings up to $600 a day because of time off from work. G. ADDITIONAL INSUREDS -BY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PERMIT 1. Paragraph 2. under Section II - Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an insured any person or organization whom you have agreed to add as an additional insured in a written contract, written agreement or permit. Such person or organization is an additional insured but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" caused in whole or in part by: a. Your acts or omissions, or the acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf, in the performance of your on going operations for the additional insured that are the subject of the written contract or written agreement provided that the "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurs, or the "per- sonal and advertising injury" is committed, subsequent to the signing of such written contract or written agreement; or O 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CG 88 10 04 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 3 of 8 b. Premises or facilities rented by you or used by you; or c. The maintenance, operation or use by you of equipment rented or leased to you by such person or organization; or d. Operations performed by you or on your behalf for which the state or political subdivision has issued a permit subject to the following additional provisions: (1) This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury", "property damage", or "personal and ad- vertising injury" arising out of the operations performed for the state or political subdivision; (2) This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" included within the "completed operations hazard". (3) Insurance applies to premises you own, rent, or control but only with respect to the following hazards: (a) The existence, maintenance, repair, construction, erection, or removal of advertising signs, awnings, canopies, cellar entrances, coal holes, driveways, manholes, marquees, hoist away openings, sidewalk vaults, street banners, or decorations and similar expo- sures; or (b) The construction, erection, or removal of elevators; or (c) The ownership, maintenance, or use of any elevators covered by this insurance. However: 1. The insurance afforded to such additional insured only applies to the extent permitted by law; and 2. If coverage provided to the additional insured is required by a contract or agreement, the insur- ance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. With respect to Paragraph 1.a. above, a person's or organization's status as an additional insured under this endorsement ends when: (1) All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project (other than service, maintenance or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the additional insured(s) at the location of the covered operations has been completed; or (2) That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. With respect to Paragraph 1.b. above, a person's or organization's status as an additional insured under this endorsement ends when their written contract or written agreement with you for such premises or facilities ends. With respects to Paragraph 1.e. above, this insurance does not apply to any "occurrence" which takes place after the equipment rental or lease agreement has expired or you have returned such equipment to the lessor. The insurance provided by this endorsement applies only if the written contract or written agreement is signed prior to the "bodily injury" or "property damage". We have no duty to defend an additional insured under this endorsement until we receive written notice of a "suit" by the additional insured as required in Paragraph b. of Condition 2. Duties In the Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Suit under Section IV - Commercial General Liability Condi- tions. © 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CG 88 10 04 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 4 of 8 2. With respect to the insurance provided by this endorsement, the following are added to Paragraph 2. Exclusions under Section 1 - Coverage A - Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability: This insurance does not apply to: a. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising from the sole negligence of the additional insured. b. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" that occurs prior to you commencing operations at the location where such "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurs. c. "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the render- ing of, or the failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services, including: (1) The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or (2) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. This exclusion applies even if the claims against any insured allege negligence or other wrongdoing in the supervision, hiring, employment, training or monitoring of others by that insured, if the "occur- rence" which caused the "bodily injury" or "property damage", or the offense which caused the "personal and advertising injury", involved the rendering of, or the failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services. d. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" occurring after: (1) All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project (other than service, maintenance or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the additional insured(s) at the location of the covered operations has been completed; or (2) That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. e. Any person or organization specifically designated as an additional insured for ongoing operations by a separate ADDITIONAL INSURED -OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS endorsement is- sued by us and made a part of this policy. 3. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following is added to Section III - Limits Of Insurance: If coverage provided to the additional insured is required by a contract or agreement, the most we will pay on behalf of the additional insured is the amount of insurance: a. Required by the contract or agreement; or b. Available under the applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations; whichever is less. This endorsement shall not increase the applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the Declaratio ns. H. PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY ADDITIONAL INSURED EXTENSION This provision applies to any person or organization who qualifies as an additional insured under any form or endorsement under this policy. Condition 4. Other Insurance of SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS is amend- ed as follows: a. The following is added to Paragraph a. Primary Insurance: If an additional insured's policy has an Other Insurance provision making its policy excess, and you have agreed in a written contract or written agreement to provide the additional insured coverage on a primary and noncontributory basis, this policy shall be primary and we will not seek contribution from the additional insured's policy for damages we cover, © 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CG 88 10 04 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 5 of 8 b. The following is added to Paragraph b. Excess Insurance: When a written contract or written agreement, other than a premises lease, facilities rental contract or agreement, an equipment rental or lease contract or agreement, or permit issued by a state or political subdivision between you and an additional insured does not require this insurance to be primary or primary and non-contributory, this insurance is excess over any other insurance for which the addi- tional insured is designated as a Named Insured. Regardless of the written agreement between you and an additional insured, this insurance is excess over any other insurance whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis for which the additional insured has been added as an additional insured on other policies. ADDITIONAL INSUREDS - EXTENDED PROTECTION OF YOUR "LIMITS OF INSURANCE" This provision applies to any person or organization who qualifies as an additional insured under any form or endorsement under this policy. 1. The following is added to Condition 2. Duties In The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim or Suit: An additional insured under this endorsement will as soon as practicable: a. Give written notice of an "occurrence" or an offense that may result in a claim or "suit" under this insurance to us; b. Tender the defense and indemnity of any claim or "suit" to all insurers whom also have insurance available to the additional insured; and c. Agree to make available any other insurance which the additional insured has for a loss we cover under this Coverage Part. d. We have no duty to defend or indemnify an additional insured under this endorsement until we receive written notice of a "suit" by the additional insured. 2. The limits of insurance applicable to the additional insured are those specified in a written contract or written agreement or the limits of insurance as stated in the Declarations of this policy and defined in Section III - Limits of Insurance of this policy, whichever are less. These limits are inclusive of and not in addition to the limits of insurance available under this policy. J. WHO IS AN INSURED -INCIDENTAL MEDICAL ERRORS / MALPRACTICE WHO IS AN INSURED - FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXTENSION - MANAGEMENT EMPLOYEES Paragraph 2.a.(1) of Section II - Who Is An Insured is replaced with the following: (1) "Bodily injury" or "personal and advertising injury": (a) To you, to your partners or members (if you are a partnership or joint venture), to your members (if you are a limited liability company), to a co -"employee" while in the course of his or her employ- ment or performing duties related to the conduct of your business, or to your other "volunteer workers" while performing duties related to the conduct of your business; (b) To the spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of that co -"employee" or "volunteer worker" as a consequence of Paragraph (1) (a) above; (c) For which there is any obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury described in Paragraphs (1) (a) or (b) above; or (d) Arising out of his or her providing or failing to provide professional health care services. However, if you are not in the business of providing professional health care services or providing profes- sional health care personnel to others, or if coverage for providing professional health care ser- vices is not otherwise excluded by separate endorsement, this provision (Paragraph (d)) does not apply. Paragraphs (a) and (b) above do not apply to "bodily injury" or "personal and advertising injury" caused by an "employee" who is acting in a supervisory capacity for you. Supervisory capacity as used herein means the "employee's" job responsibilities assigned by you, includes the direct supervision of other "employ- ees" of yours. However, none of these "employees" are insureds for "bodily injury" or "personal and © 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CG 88 10 04 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 6 of 8 advertising injury" arising out of their willful conduct, which is defined as the purposeful or willful intent to cause "bodily injury" or "personal and advertising injury", or caused in whole or in part by their intoxica- tion by liquor or controlled substances. The coverage provided by provision J. is excess over any other valid and collectable insurance available to your "employee". K. NEWLY FORMED OR ADDITIONALLY ACQUIRED ENTITIES Paragraph 3. of Section II -Who Is An Insured is replaced by the following: 3. Any organization you newly acquire or form and over which you maintain ownership or majority interest, will qualify as a Named Insured if there is no other similar insurance available to that organization. However: a. Coverage under this provision is afforded only until the expiration of the policy period in which the entity was acquired or formed by you; b. Coverage A does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" that occurred before you acquired or formed the organization; and c. Coverage B does not apply to "personal and advertising injury" arising out of an offense committed before you acquired or formed the organization. d. Records and descriptions of operations must be maintained by the first Named Insured. No person or organization is an insured with respect to the conduct of any current or past partnership, joint venture or limited liability company that is not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations or qualifies as an insured under this provision. L. FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS AND PRIOR OCCURRENCES Under Section IV - Commercial General Liability Conditions, the following is added to Condition 6. Repre- sentations: Your failure to disclose all hazards or prior "occurrences" existing as of the inception date of the policy shall not prejudice the coverage afforded by this policy provided such failure to disclose all hazards or prior "occurrences" is not intentional. M. KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE, OFFENSE, CLAIM OR SUIT Under Section IV - Commercial General Liability Conditions, the following is added to Condition 2. Duties In The Event of Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Suit: Knowledge of an "occurrence", offense, claim or "suit" by an agent, servant or "employee" of any insured shall not in itself constitute knowledge of the insured unless an insured listed under Paragraph 1. of section II - Who Is An Insures or a person who has been designated by them to receive reports of "occurrences", offenses, claims or "suits" shall have received such notice from the agent, servant or "employee". N. LIBERALIZATION CLAUSE If we revise this Commercial General Liability Extension Endorsement to provide more coverage without additional premium charge, your policy will automatically provide the coverage as of the day the revision is effective in your state. O. BODILY INJURY REDEFINED Under Section V - Definitions, Definition 3. is replaced by the following: 3. "Bodily Injury" means physical injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person. This includes mental anguish, mental injury, shock, fright or death that results from such physical injury, sick- ness or disease. © 2013Liberty Mutual Insurance CG 88 10 04 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 7 of 8 P. EXTENDED PROPERTY DAMAGE Exclusion a. of COVERAGE A. BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY is replaced by the following: a. Expected Or Intended Injury "Bodily injury" or "property damage" expected or intended from the standpoint of the insured. This exclusion does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" resulting from the use of reasonable force to protect persons or property. WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US - WHEN REQUIRED IN A CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT WITH YOU Under Section IV - Commercial General Liability Conditions, the following is added to Condition 8. Trans- fer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us: We waive any right of recovery we may have against a person or organization because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of your ongoing operations or "your work" done under a contract with that person or organization and included in the "products -completed operations hazard" provided: 1. You and that person or organization have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that you waive such rights against that person or organization; and 2. The injury or damage occurs subsequent to the execution of the written contract or written agree- ment. O 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CG 88 10 04 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 8 of 8 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 85 83 04 13 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED CONTRACTORS - PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART A. Paragraph 2. under Section II - Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an insured any person or organization whom you have agreed to add as an additional insured in a written contract or written agreement. Such person or organization is an additional insured but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury" or "property damage": 1. Caused by "your work" performed for that additional insured that is the subject of the written contract or written agreement; and 2. Included in the "products -completed operations hazard". However: a) The insurance afforded to such additional insured only applies to the extent permitted by law; and b) If coverage provided to the additional insured is required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured The insurance provided by this endorsement applies only if the written contract or written agreement is signed prior to the "bodily injury" or "property damage". We have no duty to defend an additional insured under this endorsement until we receive written notice of a "suit" by the additional insured as required in Paragraph b. of Condition 2. Duties In The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Suit under Section IV - Commercial General Liability Conditions. B. With respect to the insurance provided by this endorsement, the following are added to Paragraph 2. Exclusions under Section I - Coverage A - Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability: This insurance does not apply to: 1. `Bodily injury" or "property damage" that occurs prior to you commencing operations at the location where such "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurs. 2. 'Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of the rendering of, or the failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering or surveying services including: a. The preparing, approving or failure to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawing and specifications; and b. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. O 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CG 85 83 04 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission . Page 1 of 2 C. With respect to the insurance afforded by this endorsement, exclusion I. Damage To Your Work of Paragraph 2. Exclusions under Section I - Coverage A - Bodily Injury And Property Damage Liability is replaced by the following: I. Damage To Your Work "Property damage" to "your work" arising out of it or any part of it and included in the "products - completed operations hazard". D. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following is added to Section 11- Limits of Insurance: If coverage provided to the additional insured is required by a contract or agreement, the most we will pay on behalf of the additional insured is the amount of insurance: 1. Required by contract or agreement; or 2. Available under the applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the Declaration. whichever is less. This endorsement shall not increase the applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the Declaratio ns. E. With respect to the insurance afforded by this endorsement, Section IV - Commercial General Liability Conditions is amended as follows: 1. The following is added to Paragraph 2. Duties In The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claims Or Suit: An additional insured under this endorsement will as soon as practicable: a. Give written notice of an "occurrence" or an offense that may result in a claim or "suit" under this insurance to us; b. Tender the defense and indemnity of any claim or "suit" to all insurers whom also have insurance available to the additional insured; and c. Agree to make available any other insurance which the additional insured has for a loss we cover under this Coverage Part. d. We have no duty to defend or indemnify an additional insured under this endorsement until we receive written notice of a "suit" by the additional insured. 2. Paragraph 4. of Section IV - Commercial General Liability Conditions is amended as follows: a. The following is added to Paragraph a. Primary Insurance: If an additional insured's policy has an Other Insurance provision making its policy excess, and you have agreed in a written contract or written agreement to provide the additional insured coverage on a primary and noncontributory basis, this policy shall be primary and we will not seek contribution from the additional insured's policy for damages we cover. b. The following is added to Paragraph b. Excess Insurance: When a written contract or written agreement, other than a premises lease, facilities rental contract or agreement, an equipment rental or lease contract or agreement, or permit issued by a state or political subdivision between you and an additional insured does not require this insurance to be primary or primary and non-contributory, this insurance is excess over any other insurance for which the additional insured is designated as a Named Insured. Regardless of the written agreement between you and an additional insured, this insur- ance is excess over any other insurance whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis for which the additional insured has been added as an additional insured on other policies. O 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CG 85 83 04 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission . Page 2 of 2 COMMERCIAL AUTO CA 88 10 01 10 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE ENHANCEMENT ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage afforded by this endorsement, the provisions of the policy apply unless modified by the endorsement. COVERAGEINDEX SUBJECT ADDITIONAL INSURED BY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PERMIT ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AMENDED DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF ACCIDENT, CLAIM, SUIT OR LOSS AMENDED FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXCLUSION AUDIO, VISUAL AND DATA ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COVERAGE BROAD FORM INSURED BODILY INJURY REDEFINED EMPLOYEES AS INSUREDS (including employee hired auto) EXTENDED CANCELLATION CONDITION EXTRA EXPENSE -BROADENED COVERAGE GLASS REPAIR - WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE(including employee hired auto) HIRED AUTO COVERAGE TERRITORY LOAN/LEASE GAP PARKED AUTO COLLISION COVERAGE (WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE) PERSONAL EFFECTS COVERAGE PHYSICAL DAMAGE - ADDITIONAL TRANSPORTATION EXPENSE COVERAGE RENTAL REIMBURSEMENT SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS TOWING AND LABOR UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERYAGAINST OTHERS TO US SECTION II - LIABILITY COVERAGE is amended as follows: 1. BROAD FORM INSURED PROVISION NUMBER 3 12 18 5 13 1 21 2 22 10 15 6 20 14 16 11 8 9 4 7 17 19 SECTION II - LIABILITY COVERAGE, paragraph A.1. - WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include the following as an insured: d. Any legally incorporated entity of which you own more than 50 percent of the voting stock during the policy period. However, "insured" does not include any organization that: (1) Is a partnership or joint venture; or (2) Is an insured under any other automobile policy; or (3) Has exhausted its Limit of Insurance under any other automobile policy. Paragraph d. (2) of this provision does not apply to a policy written to apply specifically in excess of this policy. e. Any organization you newly acquire or form, other than a partnership or joint venture, of which you own more than 50 percent of the voting stock. This automatic coverage is afforded only for 180 days from the date of acquisition or formation. However, coverage under this provision does not apply: (1) If there is similar insurance or a self -insured retention plan available to that organization; ©2010 Liberty Mutual Insurance Company. All rights reserved. CA 88 10 01 10 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office Inc., with its Permission. Page 1 of 7 (2) If the Limits of Insurance of any other insurance policy have been exhausted; or (3) To "bodily injury" or "property damage" that occurred before you acquired or formed the organization. 2. EMPLOYEES AS INSUREDS SECTION If - LIABILITY COVERAGE, paragraph A.I. - WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include the following as an insured: f. Any "employee" of yours while using a covered "auto" you do not own, hire or borrow but only for acts within the scope of their employment by you. Insurance provided by this endorse- ment is excess over any other insurance available to any "employee". g. An "employee" of yours while operating an "auto" hired or borrowed under a written contract or agreement in that "employee's" name, with your permission, while performing duties re- lated to the conduct of your business and within the scope of their employment. Insurance provided by this endorsement is excess over any other insurance available to the "employee". 3. ADDITIONAL INSURED BY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PERMIT SECTION 11 - LIABILITY COVERAGE, paragraph A.I. - WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include the following as an insured: h. Any person or organization with respect to the operation, maintenance or use of a covered "auto", provided that you and such person or organization have agreed in a written contract, agreement, or permit issued to you by governmental or public authority, to add such person, or organization, or governmental or public authority to this policy as an "insured". However, such person or organization is an "insured": (1) Only with respect to the operation, maintenance or use of a covered "auto"; (2) Only for "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused by an "accident" which takes place after you executed the written contract or agreement, or the permit has been issued to you; and (3) Only for the duration of that contract, agreement or permit 4. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS SECTION II - LIABILITY COVERAGE, Coverage Extensions, 2.a. Supplementary Payments, para- graphs (2) and (4) are replaced by the following: (2) Up to $3,000 for cost of bail bonds (including bonds for related traffic violations ) required because of an "accident" we cover. We do not have to furnish these bonds. (4) All reasonable expenses incurred by the insured at our request, including actual loss of earn- ings up to $500 a day because of time off from work. 5. AMENDED FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXCLUSION In those jurisdictions where, by law, fellow employees are not entitled to the protection afforded to the employer by the workers compensation exclusivity rule, or similar protection, the following provision is added: SECTION II - LIABILITY, exclusion B.S. FELLOW EMPLOYEE does not apply if the "bodily injury" results from the use of a covered "auto" you own or hire. SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended as follows: 6. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE Paragraph A.4. Coverage Extensions of SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, is amended by adding the following: If hired "autos" are covered "autos" for Liability Coverage, and if Comprehensive, Specified Causes of Loss or Collision coverage are provided under the Business Auto Coverage Form for any "auto" you own, then the Physical Damage coverages provided are extended to "autos": a. You hire, rent or borrow; or �2010 Liberty Mutual Insurance Company. All rights reserved. CA 88 10 01 10 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office Inc., with its Permission. Page 2 of 7 7 8. b. Your "employee" hires or rents under a written contract or agreement in that "employee's" name, but only if the damage occurs while the vehicle is being used in the conduct of your business, subject to the following limit and deductible: A. The most we will pay for "loss" in any one "accident" or "loss" is the smallest of: (1) $50,000; or (2) The actual cash value of the damaged or stolen property as of the time of the "loss"; or (3) The cost of repairing or replacing the damaged or stolen property with other property of like kind and quality, minus a deductible. B. The deductible will be equal to the largest deductible applicable to any owned "auto" for that coverage. C. Subject to the limit, deductible and excess provisions described in this provision, we will provide coverage equal to the broadest coverage applicable to any covered "auto" you own. D. Subject to a maximum of $750 per "accident", we will also cover the actual loss of use of the hired "auto" if it results from an "accident", you are legally liable and the lessor incurs an actual financial loss. E. This coverage extension does not apply to: (1) Any "auto" that is hired, rented or borrowed with a driver; or (2) Any "auto" that is hired, rented or borrowed from your "employee". For the purposes of this provision, SECTION V - DEFINITIONS is amended by adding the following: "Total loss" means a "loss" in which the cost of repairs plus the salvage value exceeds the actual cash value. TOWING AND LABOR SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, paragraph A.2. Towing, is amended by the addition of the following: We will pay towing and labor costs incurred, up to the limits shown below, each time a covered "auto" classified and rated as a private passenger type, "light truck" or "medium truck" is dis- abled: a. For private passenger type vehicles, we will pay up to $50 per disablement. b. For "light trucks", we will pay up to $50 per disablement. "Light trucks" are trucks that have a gross vehicle weight (GVVV) of 10,000 pounds or less. c. For "medium trucks" , we will pay up to $150 per disablement. "Medium trucks" are trucks that have a gross vehicle weight (GVVV) of 10,001 - 20,000 pounds. However, the labor must be performed at the place of disablement. PHYSICAL DAMAGE- ADDITIONAL TRANSPORTATION EXPENSE COVERAGE Paragraph A.4.a., Coverage Extension of SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, is amend- ed to provide a limit of $50 per day and a maximum limit of $1,500 @2010 Liberty Mutual Insurance Company. All rights reserved. CA 88 10 01 10 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office Inc., with its Permission. Page 3 of 7 9. RENTAL REIMBURSEMENT SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, A. COVERAGE, is amended by adding the following: a. We will pay up to $75 per day for rental reimbursement expenses incurred by you for the rental of an "auto" because of "accident" or "loss", to an "auto" for which we also pay a "loss" under Comprehensive, Specified Causes of Loss or Collision Coverages. We will pay only for those expenses incurred after the first 24 hours following the "accident" or "loss" to the covered "auto." b. Rental Reimbursement will be based on the rental of a comparable vehicle, which in many cases may be substantially less than $75 per day, and will only be allowed for the period of time it should take to repair or replace the vehicle with reasonable speed and similar quality, up to a maximum of 30 days. c. We will also pay up to $500 for reasonable and necessary expenses incurred by you to remove and replace your tools and equipment from the covered "auto". d. This coverage does not apply unless you have a business necessity that other "autos" avail- able for your use and operation cannot fill. e. If "loss" results from the total theft of a covered "auto" of the private passenger type, we will pay under this coverage only that amount of your rental reimbursement expenses which is not already provided under Paragraph 4. Coverage Extension. f. No deductible applies to this coverage. For the purposes of this endorsement provision, materials and equipment do not include "personal effects" as defined in provision 11. 10. EXTRA EXPENSE - BROADENED COVERAGE Under SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, A. COVERAGE, we will pay for the expense of returning a stolen covered "auto" to you. The maximum amount we will pay is $1,000. 11. PERSONAL EFFECTS COVERAGE A. SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, A. COVERAGE, is amended by adding the following: If you have purchased Comprehensive Coverage on this policy for an "auto" you own and that "auto" is stolen, we will pay, without application of a deductible, up to $600 for "personal effects" stolen with the "auto." The insurance provided under this provision is excess over any other collectible insurance. B. SECTION V - DEFINITIONS is amended by adding the following: For the purposes of this provision, "personal effects" mean tangible property that is worn or carried by an insured." "Personal effects" does not include tools, equipment, jewelry, money or securities. 12. ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, B. EXCLUSIONS is amended by adding the follow- ing: If you have purchased Comprehensive or Collision Coverage under this policy, the exclusion for "loss" relating to mechanical breakdown does not apply to the accidental discharge of an airbag. Any insurance we provide shall be excess over any other collectible insurance or reimbursement by manufacturer's warranty. However, we agree to pay any deductible applicable to the other cov- erage or warranty. 13. AUDIO, VISUAL AND DATA ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COVERAGE SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, B. EXCLUSIONS, exception paragraph a. to exclu- sions 4.c. and 4.d. is deleted and replaced with the following: ©2010 Liberty Mutual Insurance Company. All rights reserved. CA 88 10 01 10 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office Inc., with its Permission. Page 4 of 7 Exclusion 4.c. and 4.d. do not apply to: a. Electronic equipment that receives or transmits audio, visual or data signals, whether or not designed solely for the reproduction of sound, if the equipment is permanently installed in the covered "auto" at the time of the "loss" and such equipment is designed to be solely operated by use of the power from the "auto's" electrical system, in or upon the covered "auto" and physical damage coverages are provided for the covered "auto"; or If the "loss" occurs solely to audio, visual or data electronic equipment or accessories used with this equipment, then our obligation to pay for, repair, return or replace damaged or stolen property will be reduced by a $100 deductible. 14. LOAN / LEASE GAP COVERAGE A. Paragraph C., LIMIT OF INSURANCE of SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended by adding the following: The most we will pay for a "total loss" to a covered "auto" owned by or leased to you in any one "accident" is the greater of the: 1. Balance due under the terms of the loan or lease to which the damaged covered "auto" is subject at the time of the "loss" less the amount of: a. Overdue payments and financial penalties associated with those payments as of the date of the "loss", b. Financial penalties imposed under a lease due to high mileage, excessive use or ab- normal wear and tear, c. Costs for extended warranties, Credit Life Insurance, Health, Accident or Disability Insurance purchased with the loan or lease, d. Transfer or rollover balances from previous loans or leases, e. Final payment due under a "Balloon Loan", f. The dollar amount of any unrepaired damage which occurred prior to the "total loss" of a covered "auto", g. Security deposits not refunded by a lessor, h. All refunds payable or paid to you as a result of the early termination of a lease agreement or as a result of the early termination of any warranty or extended service agreement on a covered "auto", L Any amount representing taxes, j. Loan or lease termination fees; or 2_ The actual cash value of the damage or stolen property as of the time of the "loss An adjustment for depreciation and physical condition will be made in determining the actual cash value at the time of the "loss". This adjustment is not applicable in Texas. B. ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS This coverage applies only to the original loan for which the covered "auto" that incurred the loss serves as collateral, or lease written on the covered "auto" that incurred the loss. C. SECTION V - DEFINTIONS is changed by adding the following: As used in this endorsement provision, the following definitions apply: "Total loss" means a "loss" in which the cost of repairs plus the salvage value exceeds the actual cash value. A "balloon loan" is one with periodic payments that are insufficient to repay the balance over the term of the loan, thereby requiring a large final payment. 02010 Liberty Mutual Insurance Company. All rights reserved. CA 88 10 01 10 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office Inc., with its Permission. Page 5 of 7 15. GLASS REPAIR -WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE Paragraph D. Deductible of SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended by the addition of the following: No deductible applies to glass damage if the glass is repaired rather than replaced. 16. PARKED AUTO COLLISION COVERAGE (WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE) Paragraph D. Deductible of SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended by the addition of the following: The deductible does not apply to "loss" caused by collision to such covered "auto" of the private passenger type or light weight truck with a gross vehicle weight of 10,000 lbs. or less as defined by the manufacturer as maximum loaded weight the "auto" is designed to carry while it is: a. In the charge of an "insured'; b. Legally parked; and c. Unoccupied. The "loss" must be reported to the police authorities within 24 hours of known damage. The total amount of the damage to the covered "auto" must exceed the deductible shown in the Declarations. This provision does not apply to any "loss" if the covered "auto" is in the charge of any person or organization engaged in the automobile business. SECTION IV - BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS is amended as follows: 17. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS SECTION IV- BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, Paragraph B.2. is amended by adding the following: If you unintentionally fail to disclose any hazards, exposures or material facts existing as of the inception date or renewal date of the Business Auto Coverage Form, the coverage afforded by this policy will not be prejudiced. However, you must report the undisclosed hazard of exposure as soon as practicable after its discovery, and we have the right to collect additional premium for any such hazard or exposure. 18. AMENDED DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF ACCIDENT, CLAIM, SUIT, OR LOSS SECTION IV - BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, paragraph A.2.a. is replaced in its entirety by the following: a. in the event of "accident", claim, "suit" or "loss", you must promptly notify us when it is known to: 1. You, if you are an individual; 2. A partner, if you are a partnership; 3. Member, if you are a limited liability company; 4. An executive officer or the "employee" designated by the Named Insured to give such notice, if you are a corporation. To the extent possible, notice to us should include: (1) How, when and where the "accident" or "loss" took place; (2) The "insureds" name and address; and (3) The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses. 19. WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US SECTION IV - BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, paragraph A.5., Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others to Us, is amended by the addition of the following: If the person or organization has waived those rights before an "accident" or "loss", our rights are waived also. ©2010 Liberty Mutual Insurance Company. All rights reserved. CA 88 10 01 10 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office Inc., with its Permission. Page 6 of 7 20. HIRED AUTO COVERAGE TERRITORY SECTION IV - BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, paragraph 13.7., Policy Period, Coverage Territory, is amended by the addition of the following: f. For "autos" hired 30 days or less, the coverage territory is anywhere in the world, provided that the insured's responsibility to pay for damages is determined in a "suit", on the merits, in the United States, the territories and possessions of the United States of America, Puerto Rico or Canada or in a settlement we agree to. This extension of coverage does not apply to an "auto" hired, leased, rented or borrowed with a driver. SECTION V - DEFINITIONS is amended as follows: 21. BODILY INJURY REDEFINED Under SECTION V - DEFINTIONS, definition C. is replaced by the following: "Bodily injury" means physical injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including mental anguish, mental injury, shock, fright or death resulting from any of these at any time. COMMMON POLICY CONDITIONS 22. EXTENDED CANCELLATION CONDITION COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS, paragraph A. - CANCELLATION condition applies except as fol- lows: If we cancel for any reason other than nonpayment of premium, we will mail to the first Named Insured written notice of cancellation at least 60 days before the effective date of cancellation. This provision does not apply in those states which require more than 60 days prior notice of cancella- tion. ©2010 Liberty Mutual Insurance Company. All rights reserved. CA 88 10 01 10 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office Inc., with its Permission. Page 7 of 7 Riverbend Driving Range signature Pages Final Audit Report 2021-01-26 Created: 2021-01-22 By: Diana lazouski (Dlazouski@kentwa.gov) Status: Signed Transaction ID: CBJCHBCAABAAURfVUwOLsMuXSzfNA3aUMcsiEvEn—jLq "Riverbend Driving Range signature Pages" History Document created by Diana lazouski (Dlazouski@kentwa.gov) 2021-01-22 - 5:17:41 PM GMT- IP address: 146.129.252.126 Document emailed to Kevin Christensen (projadmin@cincgc.com) for signature 2021-01-22 - 5:20:09 PM GMT Email viewed by Kevin Christensen (projadmin@cincgc.com) 2021-01-22 - 6:17:11 PM GMT- IP address: 73.83.239.75 1 Document e-signed by Kevin Christensen (projadmin@cincgc.com) Signature Date: 2021-01-26 - 5:55:18 PM GMT - Time Source: server- IP address: 73.83.239.75 Agreement completed. 2021-01-26 - 5:55:18 PM GMT Adobe Sign